neax2400 ipx circuit card manual - textfiles.compdf.textfiles.com/manuals/telecom-f-r/nec ipx...
TRANSCRIPT
OCTOBER, 2000
NEC America, Inc.
NDA-24296ISSUE 1
STOCK # 200774
Circuit Card Manual
®
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER
NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, orfeatures, at any time, without notice.
NEC America, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees andcustomers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC America,Inc. and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NECAmerica, Inc.
NEAX® and Dterm® are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.
Copyright 2000
NEC America, Inc.
Printed in the U.S.A
ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4
DATE OCTOBER, 2000 DATE DATE DATE
ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8
DATE DATE DATE DATE
NEAX2400 IPXCircuit Card Manual Revision Sheet 1/9
NDA-24296
PAGE No.ISSUE No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i 1
ii 1
iii 1
iv 1
v 1
vi 1
vii 1
viii 1
ix 1
x 1
xi 1
xii 1
1 1
2 1
3 1
4 1
5 1
6 1
7 1
8 1
9 1
10 1
11 1
12 1
13 1
14 1
15 1
16 1
17 1
18 1
19 1
20 1
21 1
22 1
23 1
24 1
25 1
26 1
27 1
28 1
29 1
30 1
31 1
32 1
33 1
34 1
35 1
36 1
37 1
38 1
39 1
40 1
41 1
42 1
43 1
44 1
45 1
46 1
47 1
48 1
49 1
50 1
51 1
52 1
53 1
54 1
55 1
56 1
57 1
58 1
59 1
60 1
61 1
62 1
63 1
64 1
PAGE No.ISSUE No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4
DATE OCTOBER, 2000 DATE DATE DATE
ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8
DATE DATE DATE DATE
NEAX2400 IPXCircuit Card Manual Revision Sheet 2/9
NDA-24296
65 1
66 1
67 1
68 1
69 1
70 1
71 1
72 1
73 1
74 1
75 1
76 1
77 1
78 1
79 1
80 1
81 1
82 1
83 1
84 1
85 1
86 1
87 1
88 1
89 1
90 1
91 1
92 1
93 1
94 1
95 1
96 1
97 1
98 1
99 1
100 1
101 1
102 1
PAGE No.ISSUE No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
103 1
104 1
105 1
106 1
107 1
108 1
109 1
110 1
111 1
112 1
113 1
114 1
115 1
116 1
117 1
118 1
119 1
120 1
121 1
122 1
123 1
124 1
125 1
126 1
127 1
128 1
129 1
130 1
131 1
132 1
133 1
134 1
135 1
136 1
137 1
138 1
139 1
140 1
PAGE No.ISSUE No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4
DATE OCTOBER, 2000 DATE DATE DATE
ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8
DATE DATE DATE DATE
NEAX2400 IPXCircuit Card Manual Revision Sheet 3/9
NDA-24296
141 1
142 1
143 1
144 1
145 1
146 1
147 1
148 1
149 1
150 1
151 1
152 1
153 1
154 1
155 1
156 1
157 1
158 1
159 1
160 1
161 1
162 1
163 1
164 1
165 1
166 1
167 1
168 1
169 1
170 1
171 1
172 1
173 1
174 1
175 1
176 1
177 1
178 1
PAGE No.ISSUE No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
179 1
180 1
181 1
182 1
183 1
184 1
185 1
186 1
187 1
188 1
189 1
190 1
191 1
192 1
193 1
194 1
195 1
196 1
197 1
198 1
199 1
200 1
201 1
202 1
203 1
204 1
205 1
206 1
207 1
208 1
209 1
210 1
211 1
212 1
213 1
214 1
215 1
216 1
PAGE No.ISSUE No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4
DATE OCTOBER, 2000 DATE DATE DATE
ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8
DATE DATE DATE DATE
NEAX2400 IPXCircuit Card Manual Revision Sheet 4/9
NDA-24296
217 1
218 1
219 1
220 1
221 1
222 1
223 1
224 1
225 1
226 1
227 1
228 1
229 1
230 1
231 1
232 1
233 1
234 1
235 1
236 1
237 1
238 1
239 1
240 1
241 1
242 1
243 1
244 1
245 1
246 1
247 1
248 1
249 1
250 1
251 1
252 1
253 1
254 1
PAGE No.ISSUE No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
255 1
256 1
257 1
258 1
259 1
260 1
261 1
262 1
263 1
264 1
265 1
266 1
267 1
268 1
269 1
270 1
271 1
272 1
273 1
274 1
275 1
276 1
277 1
278 1
279 1
280 1
281 1
282 1
283 1
284 1
285 1
286 1
287 1
288 1
289 1
290 1
291 1
292 1
PAGE No.ISSUE No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4
DATE OCTOBER, 2000 DATE DATE DATE
ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8
DATE DATE DATE DATE
NEAX2400 IPXCircuit Card Manual Revision Sheet 5/9
NDA-24296
293 1
294 1
295 1
296 1
297 1
298 1
299 1
300 1
301 1
302 1
303 1
304 1
305 1
306 1
307 1
308 1
309 1
310 1
311 1
312 1
313 1
314 1
315 1
316 1
317 1
318 1
319 1
320 1
321 1
322 1
323 1
324 1
325 1
326 1
327 1
328 1
329 1
330 1
PAGE No.ISSUE No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
331 1
332 1
333 1
334 1
335 1
336 1
337 1
338 1
339 1
340 1
341 1
342 1
343 1
344 1
345 1
346 1
347 1
348 1
349 1
350 1
351 1
352 1
353 1
354 1
355 1
356 1
357 1
358 1
359 1
360 1
361 1
362 1
363 1
364 1
365 1
366 1
367 1
368 1
PAGE No.ISSUE No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4
DATE OCTOBER, 2000 DATE DATE DATE
ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8
DATE DATE DATE DATE
NEAX2400 IPXCircuit Card Manual Revision Sheet 6/9
NDA-24296
369 1
370 1
371 1
372 1
373 1
374 1
375 1
376 1
377 1
378 1
379 1
380 1
381 1
382 1
383 1
384 1
385 1
386 1
387 1
388 1
389 1
390 1
391 1
392 1
393 1
394 1
395 1
396 1
397 1
398 1
399 1
400 1
401 1
402 1
403 1
404 1
405 1
406 1
PAGE No.ISSUE No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
407 1
408 1
409 1
410 1
411 1
412 1
413 1
414 1
415 1
416 1
417 1
418 1
419 1
420 1
421 1
422 1
423 1
424 1
425 1
426 1
427 1
428 1
429 1
430 1
431 1
432 1
433 1
434 1
435 1
436 1
437 1
438 1
439 1
440 1
441 1
442 1
443 1
444 1
PAGE No.ISSUE No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4
DATE OCTOBER, 2000 DATE DATE DATE
ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8
DATE DATE DATE DATE
NEAX2400 IPXCircuit Card Manual Revision Sheet 7/9
NDA-24296
445 1
446 1
447 1
448 1
449 1
450 1
451 1
452 1
453 1
454 1
455 1
456 1
457 1
458 1
459 1
460 1
461 1
462 1
463 1
464 1
465 1
466 1
467 1
468 1
469 1
470 1
471 1
472 1
473 1
474 1
475 1
476 1
477 1
478 1
479 1
480 1
481 1
482 1
PAGE No.ISSUE No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
483 1
484 1
485 1
486 1
487 1
488 1
489 1
490 1
491 1
492 1
493 1
494 1
495 1
496 1
497 1
498 1
499 1
500 1
501 1
502 1
503 1
504 1
505 1
506 1
507 1
508 1
509 1
510 1
511 1
512 1
513 1
514 1
515 1
516 1
517 1
518 1
519 1
520 1
PAGE No.ISSUE No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4
DATE OCTOBER, 2000 DATE DATE DATE
ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8
DATE DATE DATE DATE
NEAX2400 IPXCircuit Card Manual Revision Sheet 8/9
NDA-24296
521 1
522 1
523 1
524 1
525 1
526 1
527 1
528 1
529 1
530 1
531 1
532 1
533 1
534 1
535 1
536 1
537 1
538 1
539 1
540 1
541 1
542 1
543 1
544 1
545 1
546 1
547 1
548 1
549 1
550 1
551 1
552 1
553 1
554 1
555 1
556 1
557 1
558 1
PAGE No.ISSUE No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
559 1
560 1
561 1
562 1
563 1
564 1
565 1
566 1
567 1
568 1
569 1
570 1
571 1
572 1
573 1
574 1
575 1
576 1
577 1
578 1
579 1
580 1
581 1
582 1
583 1
584 1
585 1
586 1
587 1
588 1
589 1
590 1
591 1
592 1
593 1
594 1
595 1
596 1
PAGE No.ISSUE No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4
DATE OCTOBER, 2000 DATE DATE DATE
ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8
DATE DATE DATE DATE
NEAX2400 IPXCircuit Card Manual Revision Sheet 9/9
NDA-24296
597 1
598 1
599 1
600 1
601 1
602 1
603 1
604 1
605 1
606 1
607 1
608 1
609 1
610 1
611 1
612 1
613 1
614 1
615 1
616 1
617 1
618 1
PAGE No.ISSUE No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8PAGE No.
ISSUE No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NDA-24296ISSUE 1
OCTOBER, 2000
NEAX2400 IPXCircuit Card Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
NDA-24296 TABLE OF CONTENTSPage i
Revision 1.0
LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
LIST OF TABLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11. GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
CHAPTER 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19SN1695 CPRBF-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20PH-GT09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40PH-GT10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43PA-PC94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47PA-PW54-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51PA-PW54-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56PA-PW55-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61PA-PW55-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66PH-DK10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71PH-IO24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77PH-M22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82PH-M16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88PH-PC36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93PH-PC20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102PH-PC45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105PH-PW14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112PH-SW10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115PH-SW12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134PU-SW01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140PZ-GT13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146PZ-GT16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149PZ-GT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152PZ-M565 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155PZ-ME44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157PZ-PC19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159PZ-PC22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163PZ-PC23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
CHAPTER 3 LINE/TRUNK CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711. GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
PA-CFTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
TABLE OF CONTENTS NDA-24296Page iiRevision 1.0
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
PagePA-CK14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178PH-CK16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181PH-CK16-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192PH-CK17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209PH-CK17-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220PH-CK18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239PA-8COTBJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244PA-16COTBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250PA-CS02-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262PA-CS08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268PA-CS08-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275PA-CS33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283PA-8LCBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295PA-16LCBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303PA-16LCBJ-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315PA-16LCBJ-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325PA-16LCBW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334PA-16LCBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344PA-16ELCJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354PA-16ELCJ-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361PA-FCHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370PA-24LCBV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381PA-M69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392PA-M96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399PA-M103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405PA-8RSTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409PA-8RSTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417PA-8RSTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424PA-SDTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433PA-SDTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448PA-2CCHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453PA-24CCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464PA-2DCHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479PA-ILCG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490PA-4ILCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499PA-8ILCE-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509PA-4DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521PA-4DATB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531PH-M16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541PA-4AMPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548PA-8TLTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554PA-M87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571PA-24PRTB-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582PA-24DTR (DTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592PA-24DTR (DLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Title Page
NDA-24296 LIST OF FIGURESPage iii
Revision 1.0
Figure 1-1 Card Mounting Slot for the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (1/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (2/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (3/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (4/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (1/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (2/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (3/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (4/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (5/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (1/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (2/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (3/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (4/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (5/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Figure 2-1 Location of SN1695 CPRBF-A (CPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Figure 2-2 CPR Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Figure 2-3 The SN1695 CPRBF-A in the IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Figure 2-4 CPR Location for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Figure 2-5 Front View of CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Figure 2-6 Front View of CPR in SP for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Figure 2-7 Front View of CPR in CMP for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Figure 2-8 Front View of CPR in LP for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Figure 2-9 Location of PH-GT09 (GT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Figure 2-10 Face Layout of PH-GT09 (GT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Figure 2-11 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Figure 2-12 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Figure 2-13 Face Layout of PH-GT10 (IOGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Figure 2-14 Location of PA-PC94 (DLMX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Figure 2-15 Face Layout of PA-PC94 (DLMX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Figure 2-16 Location of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Figure 2-17 Face Layout of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Figure 2-18 Location of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Figure 2-19 Face Layout of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Figure 2-20 Location of PA-PW55-A (PWR) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Figure 2-21 Face Layout of PA-PW55-A Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Figure 2-22 Location of PA-PW55-B (PWR) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Figure 2-23 Face Layout of PA-PW55-B Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Figure 2-24 Location of PH-DK10 (DSPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Figure 2-25 Face Layout of PH-DK10 (DSPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Figure 2-26 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Figure 2-27 Location of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Figure 2-28 Face Layout of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Figure 2-29 External Cable Connection for PH-IO24 (IOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Figure 2-30 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Figure 2-31 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Figure 2-32 Face Layout of PH-M22 (MMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Figure 2-33 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
LIST OF FIGURES NDA-24296Page ivRevision 1.0
LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure Title Page
Figure 2-34 Location of PH-M16 (LTST) Card Within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Figure 2-35 Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Figure 2-36 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Figure 2-36 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Figure 2-37 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Figure 2-38 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 4 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Figure 2-39 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the IPX-U/IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Figure 2-40 PCM Highway Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Figure 2-41 Face Layout of PH-PC36 (MUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Figure 2-42 External Interface for PH-PC36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Figure 2-43 Cable Connections between the MUX and the TSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Figure 2-44 Location of PC-PH20 in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Figure 2-45 Face Layout of the PC-PH20 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Figure 2-46 Location of PH-PC45 (EMA) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Figure 2-47 Face Layout of the PH-PC45 (EMA) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Figure 2-48 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel and Music on Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Figure 2-49 -48 V Output Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Figure 2-50 Face Layout of the PH-PW14 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Figure 2-51 Location of PH-SW10 (TSW) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Figure 2-52 PLO Function Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Figure 2-53 Voice Prompting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Figure 2-54 Face Layout of PH-SW10 (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Figure 2-55 PLO Connector Leads Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Figure 2-56 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Figure 2-57 Front Cable Connections for PH-SW10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Figure 2-58 TSW Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Figure 2-59 Music/Tone Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Figure 2-60 Speech Path Memory (SPM) for Voice Prompt Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Figure 2-61 Face Layout of PH-SW12 (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Figure 2-62 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Figure 2-63 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Figure 2-63 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Figure 2-64 Face Layout of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Figure 2-66 Face Layout of PU-SW01 (HSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Figure 2-67 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Figure 2-68 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) in the IPX-U System (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Figure 2-69 External Interface for PZ-GT13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Figure 2-70 Face Layout of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Figure 2-71 Location of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Figure 2-72 External Interface for PZ-GT16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Figure 2-73 Face Layout of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Figure 2-74 Location of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Figure 2-75 External Interface for PZ-GT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Figure 2-76 Face Layout of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Figure 2-77 Location of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Figure 2-78 External Interface for PZ-M565 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
NDA-24296 LIST OF FIGURESPage v
Revision 1.0
LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure Title Page
Figure 2-79 Face Layout of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Figure 2-80 Location of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Figure 2-81 External Interface for PZ-M44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Figure 2-82 Face Layout of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Figure 2-83 Location of PZ-PC19 (LANI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Figure 2-84 External Interface for PZ-PC19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Figure 2-85 Face Layout of PZ-PC19 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Figure 2-86 Cable Connections for PZ-PC19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Figure 2-87 Location of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Figure 2-88 Location of PZ-PC22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Figure 2-89 Face Layout of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Figure 2-90 External Interface for PZ-PC22 (LANI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Figure 2-91 Location of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Figure 2-92 Location for PZ-PC23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Figure 2-93 Face Layout of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Figure 2-94 External Interface for PZ-PC23 (LANI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Figure 3-1 Location of PA-CFTB (CFT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Figure 3-2 Face Layout of PA-CFTB (CFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Figure 3-3 Location of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Figure 3-4 Face Layout of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Figure 3-5 Location of PH-CK16 (PLO) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Figure 3-6 Music Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Figure 3-7 Face Layout of PH-CK16 (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Figure 3-8 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Figure 3-9 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Figure 3-10 Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in 4-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Figure 3-11 Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Figure 3-12 Face Layout of PH-CK16-A (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Figure 3-13 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Figure 3-13 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Figure 3-14 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Figure 3-14 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Figure 3-15 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an
External High-Stability Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Figure 3-16 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Figure 3-17 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Figure 3-18 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . 207Figure 3-19 Connection of External Music-On-Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Figure 3-20 Location of PH-CK17 (PLO) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Figure 3-21 Music Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Figure 3-22 Face Layout of PH-CK17 (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Figure 3-23 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Figure 3-24 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Figure 3-25 Location of PH-CK17-A in 4-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Figure 3-26 Location of PH-CK17-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Figure 3-27 Face Layout of PH-CK17-A (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Figure 3-28 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Figure 3-28 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Figure 3-29 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
LIST OF FIGURES NDA-24296Page viRevision 1.0
LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure Title Page
Figure 3-29 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Figure 3-30 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an
External High-Stability Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Figure 3-31 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Figure 3-32 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Figure 3-33 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . 236Figure 3-34 Connection of External Music-On-Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Figure 3-35 Location of PH-CK18 (CLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Figure 3-36 Face Layout of PH-CK18 (CLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Figure 3-37 LT Connector Lead Location (ISWM-TSWM0/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Figure 3-38 Location of PA-8COTBJ (8COT) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Figure 3-39 Face Layout of PA-8COTBJ (8COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Figure 3-40 LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Figure 3-41 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Figure 3-42 Location of PA-16COTBE (16COT) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Figure 3-43 Face Layout of PA-16 COTBE (16COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Figure 3-44 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Figure 3-44 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Figure 3-45 Connecting Route Diagram (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Figure 3-45 Connecting Route Diagram (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Figure 3-46 Location of PA-CS02-C (2ATI) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Figure 3-47 Face Layout of PA-CS02-C (2ATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Figure 3-48 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Figure 3-49 Location of PA-CS08 (HMATI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Figure 3-50 Face Layout of PA-CS08 (HMATI) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Figure 3-51 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Figure 3-52 Location of PA-CS08-B (HMATI) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Figure 3-53 Face Layout of PA-CS08-B (HMATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Figure 3-54 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Figure 3-55 Location of PA-CS33 (ATI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Figure 3-56 Face Layout of PA-CS33 (ATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Figure 3-57 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Figure 3-58 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Figure 3-59 Desk Console Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Figure 3-60 Distance between PBX and Modular Rosette of Desk Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Figure 3-61 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Figure 3-62 Location of PA-8LCBR (8LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Figure 3-63 Face Layout of PA-8LCBR (8LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Figure 3-64 LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Figure 3-65 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Figure 3-66 Location of PA-16LCBE (16LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Figure 3-67 Face Layout of PA-16LCBE (16LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Figure 3-68 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Figure 3-68 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Figure 3-69 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Figure 3-70 Location of PA-16LCBJ-A (16LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Figure 3-71 Face Layout of PA-16LCBJ-A (16LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Figure 3-72 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Figure 3-72 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
NDA-24296 LIST OF FIGURESPage vii
Revision 1.0
LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure Title Page
Figure 3-73 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Figure 3-74 Location of PA-16LCBJ-B (16LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Figure 3-75 Face Layout of PA-16LCBJ-B (16LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Figure 3-76 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Figure 3-76 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Figure 3-77 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Figure 3-78 Location of PA-16LCBW (LC) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Figure 3-79 Face Layout of PA-16LCBW (LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Figure 3-80 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Figure 3-80 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Figure 3-81 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Figure 3-82 Location of PA-16LCBY(LC) Circuit card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Figure 3-83 Face Layout of PA-16LCBY(LC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345Figure 3-84 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Figure 3-84 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351Figure 3-85 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352Figure 3-86 Location of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354Figure 3-87 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Figure 3-88 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Figure 3-88 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Figure 3-89 Location of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361Figure 3-90 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362Figure 3-91 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366Figure 3-91 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Figure 3-92 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (8DLC Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Figure 3-93 Location of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Figure 3-94 Face Layout of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Figure 3-95 FCH/HUB/DTI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Figure 3-96 FCH Cascade Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Figure 3-97 Location of PA-24LCBV (LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Figure 3-98 Face Layout of PA-24LCBV (LC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382Figure 3-99 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386Figure 3-99 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387Figure 3-100 LC Connector Lead Location (LC Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388Figure 3-101 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389Figure 3-102 Outer View of LC Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390Figure 3-103 Cable Running for LC Cable (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Figure 3-104 Location of PA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Figure 3-105 Face Layout of PA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Figure 3-106 LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Figure 3-107 NCU Connector Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397Figure 3-108 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398Figure 3-109 Location of PA-M96 (HUB) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Figure 3-110 Face Layout of PA-M96 (HUB) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400Figure 3-111 FCH/HUB/DTI/LANI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403Figure 3-112 Location of PA-M103 (HUB) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405Figure 3-113 Face layout of PA-M103 (HUB) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406Figure 3-114 External Interface for PA-M103 (HUB) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Figure 3-115 Location of PA-8RSTK (8RST) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
LIST OF FIGURES NDA-24296Page viiiRevision 1.0
LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure Title Page
Figure 3-116 Face Layout of PA-8RSTK (8RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411Figure 3-117 Location of the PA-8RSTM (8RST) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417Figure 3-118 Face Layout of PA-8RSTM (8RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418Figure 3-119 Location of PA-8RSTY (8RST) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424Figure 3-120 Face Layout of PA-8RSTY (8RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425Figure 3-121 Location of PA-SDTA (SDT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433Figure 3-122 PA-SDTA Card Mounted in the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435Figure 3-123 Face Layout of PA-SDTA (SDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436Figure 3-124 Cable Connection between PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439Figure 3-125 Example of Cable Connection for 1-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440Figure 3-126 Example of Cable Connection for 4-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443Figure 3-127 Location of MUXxxx Connectors for SDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444Figure 3-128 Level Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445Figure 3-129 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446Figure 3-130 Location of PA-SDTB (SDT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448Figure 3-131 Face Layout of PA-SDTB (SDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450Figure 3-132 Location of PA-2CCHA (CCH) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453Figure 3-133 Face Layout of PA-2CCHA (CCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455Figure 3-134 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459Figure 3-134 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460Figure 3-135 Connecting Route Diagram (Digital CCIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461Figure 3-136 Connecting Route Diagram (Analog CCIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462Figure 3-137 Location of PA-24CCTA (24CCT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464Figure 3-138 Face Layout of PA-24CCTA (24CCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466Figure 3-139 Available Locations for Loopback Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468Figure 3-140 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475Figure 3-141 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476Figure 3-142 Location of PA-2DCHA (2DCH) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479Figure 3-143 Face Layout of PA-2DCHA (2DCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481Figure 3-144 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485Figure 3-144 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486Figure 3-145 Connecting Route Diagram (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487Figure 3-145 Connecting Route Diagram (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488Figure 3-146 Location of PA-ILCG (ILC) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490Figure 3-147 Face Layout of PA-ILCG (ILC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492Figure 3-148 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496Figure 3-149 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497Figure 3-150 Location of PA-4ILCH (4ILC) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499Figure 3-151 Face Layout of PA-4ILCH (4ILC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501Figure 3-152 LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506Figure 3-153 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507Figure 3-154 Location of PA-8ILCE-A (ILC) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509Figure 3-155 Face Layout of PA-8ILCE-A (ILC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511Figure 3-156 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517Figure 3-156 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518Figure 3-157 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519Figure 3-158 Location of PA-4DATA (DAT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521Figure 3-159 Face Layout of PA-4DATA (DAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523Figure 3-160 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
NDA-24296 LIST OF FIGURESPage ix
Revision 1.0
LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure Title Page
Figure 3-161 Location of PA-4DATB (DAT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531Figure 3-162 Face Layout of PA-4DATB (DAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533Figure 3-163 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537Figure 3-164 Location of PH-M16 (LTST) card within the System (1-IMG System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541Figure 3-165 Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543Figure 3-166 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545Figure 3-167 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546Figure 3-168 Location of PA-4AMPC (4AMP) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548Figure 3-169 Face Layout of PA-4AMPC (4AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550Figure 3-170 Location of PA-8TLTR (TLT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554Figure 3-171 Face Layout of PA-8TLTR (TLT) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556Figure 3-172 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564Figure 3-172 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565Figure 3-173 Connecting Route Diagram (LD/DID • 2W E&M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566Figure 3-174 Connecting Route Diagram (4W E&M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567Figure 3-175 “2400 ODT CABLE” Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568Figure 3-176 “2400 ODT CABLE-A” Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569Figure 3-177 Location of PA-M87 (RECC/PGADP) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571Figure 3-178 Face Layout of PA-M87 (RECC/PGADP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573Figure 3-179 REC/PGA Connector Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (1/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (2/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (3/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (4/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580Figure 3-181 Location of PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582Figure 3-182 Face Layout of PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583Figure 3-183 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589Figure 3-184 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590Figure 3-185 Location of PA-24DTR (DTI) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592Figure 3-186 Face Layout of PA-24DTR (DTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594Figure 3-187 Available Locations for Loopback Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596Figure 3-188 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602Figure 3-189 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603Figure 3-190 Location of PA-24DTR (DLI) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605Figure 3-191 Face Layout of PA-24DTR (DLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607Figure 3-192 Available Locations for Loopback Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609Figure 3-193 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615Figure 3-194 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
LIST OF FIGURES NDA-24296Page xRevision 1.0
This page is for your notes.
LIST OF TABLES
Table Title Page
NDA-24296 (E) CHAPTER 3Page xi
Revision 1.0
Table 3-1 Balancing Network and Terminal Impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Table 3-2 ATI Card Lamp Indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Table 3-3 Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354Table 3-4 Relationship between SW01-1 and SW01-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Table 3-5 Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361Table 3-6 Type of 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441Table 3-7 Relationship between Cable Connection and Time Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442Table 3-8 Level Margin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445Table 3-9 PA-24CCTA (24CCT) Lamp Indication Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467Table 3-10 Digital PAD Setting Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474Table 3-11 PA-ILCG Lamp Indications Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493Table 3-12 Switch Settings on DAT (Example 60 sec. mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528Table 3-13 Jumper Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536Table 3-14 SWITCH SETTINGS ON DAT (Example <240 sec. mode>) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538Table 3-15 PA-24PRTB-A Lamp Indication Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 (E)Page xiiRevision 1.0
This page is for your notes.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1Page 1
Revision 1.0
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
1. GENERAL
This manual provides circuit card descriptions for the NEAX2400 IPX system.
This manual is for those persons involved in system setup and administration activities for the NEAX2400 IPX.For each circuit card the following items are explained:
• General function
• Slot to mount the circuit card
• Precautions for mounting the card
• Location of the electronic devices on the card surface
• Description of the LED
• Description of the switches
• Physical interface
The circuit cards explained in this manual are divided into two categories, the Control Circuit Cards and theLine/Trunk Circuit Cards. You can easily define the card category by the pull tab color of the circuit card.
• Control Circuit Card
White or red pull tab circuit cards are categorized as control circuit card. Also, the circuit cards in theCentral Processor Rack (CPR) have white or red pull tabs.
• Line/Trunk Circuit Card
Blue or yellow pull tab circuit cards are categorized as line/trunk circuit cards.
Note: This manual is intended to describe only the basic line/trunk interface circuit cards of the NEAX2400 IPX.When you use circuit cards not shown in this manual, you may refer to the NEAX2400 ICS Circuit CardManual with the following changes:
• The line/trunk circuit card shown in the above mentioned manual is compatible with NEAX2400 IPX;however, the exceptions are PA-CS02-C (2AT1) and PA-CS08B (H/MATI).
• The external appearance of PIM U (which is the standard port interface module of NEAX2400 IPX) isthe same as the PIM J of the NEAX2400 ICS.
• The PCM highway running in PIM is different. More details are explained in this manual’s section onPH-PC36 (MUX).
CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296Page 2Revision 1.0
2. MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARD
The control circuit cards for the 1 IMG system should be mounted in their dedicated slots as shown in Figure 1-1. The control circuit cards for the 4 IMG system should be mounted in their dedicated slots as shown in Figure1-2. The control circuit cards for the IPX-U system should be mounted in their dedicated slots as shown inFigure 1-3 and 1-4.
As a general rule, the blue pull tab line/trunk circuit cards are mounted in the universal slots that are located inSlots 04 - 12 and 15 - 23 of the Port Interface Module (PIM).
The yellow pull tab line/trunk circuit cards (MISC) are mounted in Slots 00 - 02 of the LPM.
Additional GT/LANI cards are mounted in the CPR.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1Page 3
Revision 1.0
Figure 1-1 Card Mounting Slot for the 1 IMG System
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA
-PW
55-A(P
WR
)
PA
-PW
54-A(D
PW
R)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-SW
10(TS
W)
PH
-SW
10(TS
W)
PIM3
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA
-PW
55-A(P
WR
)
PA
-PW
54-A(D
PW
R)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM2
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA
-PW
55-A(P
WR
)
PA
-PW
54-A(D
PW
R)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM1
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23P
A-P
W55-A
(PW
R)
PA
-PW
54-A(D
PW
R)
PIM0
BSCM
LPM
PH
-IO24(IO
C)
(IOC
/MIS
C)
(MIS
C)
(MIS
C)
PH
-PC
40(EM
A)
00 01 02 03 04
CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296Page 4Revision 1.0
Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (1/4)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA
-PW
55-A(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-A(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM3
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA
-PW
55-A(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-A(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM2
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA
-PW
55-A(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-A(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM1
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA
-PW
55-A(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-A(P
WR
1)
PIM0
BSCM
LPM
PH
-IO24(IO
C)
PH
-PC
40(EM
A)
00 01 02 03 04
(IOC
/MIS
C)
(MIS
C)
(MIS
C)
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG3
Dummy/APM
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG2
Dummy/APM
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG1
TSWM
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG0
LPM
BSCM
IMG0
NEAX2400IMS (IPX)
4-IMG System
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1Page 5
Revision 1.0
Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (2/4)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA
-PW
55-A(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-A(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM3
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA
-PW
55-A(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-A(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM2
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA
-PW
55-A(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-A(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM1
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA
-PW
55-A(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-A(P
WR
1)
PIM0
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH
-PW
14(PW
RS
W)
PH
-PW
14(PW
RS
W)
PH
-PC
20(DLK
C0)
PH
-PC
20(DLK
C1)
PH
-GT09(G
T0)
PH
-GT09(G
T1)
PH
-SW
12(TDS
W00)
PH
-SW
12(TDS
W01)
PH
-SW
12(TDS
W02)
PH
-SW
12(TDS
W03)
PH
-SW
12(TDS
W10)
PH
-SW
12(TDS
W11)
PH
-SW
12(TDS
W12)
PH
-SW
12(TDS
W13)
PH
-CK
16/17(PLO
0)
PH
-CK
16/17(PLO
1)
(MIS
C)
(MIS
C)
(MIS
C)
(MIS
C)
(MIS
C)
(MIS
C)
TSWM
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG3
Dummy/APM
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG2
Dummy/APM
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG1
TSWM
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG0
LPM
BSCM
IMG1
NEAX2400IMS (IPX)
4-IMG System
CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296Page 6Revision 1.0
Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (3/4)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA
-PW
55-A(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-A(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM3
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA
-PW
55-A(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-A(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM2
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA
-PW
55-A(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-A(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM1
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA
-PW
55-A(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-A(P
WR
1)
PIM0
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Dummy/APM
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG3
Dummy/APM
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG2
Dummy/APM
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG1
TSWM
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG0
LPM
BSCM
IMG2
NEAX2400IMS(IMX)
4IMG-SYSTEM
NEAX2400 IMS (IPX)
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1Page 7
Revision 1.0
Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (4/4)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA
-PW
55-A(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-A(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM3
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA
-PW
55-A(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-A(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM2
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA
-PW
55-A(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-A(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM1
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA
-PW
55-A(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-A(P
WR
1)
PIM0
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Dummy/APM
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG3
Dummy/APM
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG2
Dummy/APM
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG1
TSWM
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG0
LPM
BSCM
IMG3
NEAX2400IMS(IMX)
4IMG-SYSTEM
NEAX2400 IMS (IPX)
CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296Page 8Revision 1.0
Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (1/5)
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG3/7/11/15
Dummy
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG2/6/10/14
TSWM1
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG1/5/9/13
TSWM0
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG0/4/8/12
LPCMG
NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-UMG SYSTEM
ISWM
DUMMY
CMP
CMG
SP
LMG 4 (0~3)
Note: The 2nd IOC card (optional) may be mounted in the slot.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1Page 9
Revision 1.0
Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (2/5)
PA
-PW
55-B (P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B (P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PIM3
PA
-PW
55-B (P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B (P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PIM2
PA
-PW
55-B (P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B (P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PIM1P
A-P
W55-B
(PW
R0)
PA
-PW
54-B (P
WR
1)
PIM0
BSCM
LPM
PH
-M22(M
MC
)
PH
-PC
43(EM
A)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
00 01 02 03 04
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG3/7/11/15
Dummy
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG2/6/10/14
TSWM1
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG1/5/9/13
TSWM0
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG0/4/8/12
LPIMG0/4/8/12
NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-UMG SYSTEM
LMG 4 (0 3)
ISWM
DUMMY
CMP
CMG
SP
CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296Page 10Revision 1.0
Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (3/5)
PA
-PW
55-B (P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B (P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PIM3
PA
-PW
55-B (P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B (P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PIM2
PA
-PW
55-B (P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B (P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PIM1P
A-P
W55-B
(PW
R0)
PA
-PW
54-B (P
WR
1)
PIM0
PH
-PW
14 (PW
RS
W)
PH
-PW
14 (PW
RS
W)
PH
-PC
20 (DLK
C0)
PH
-PC
20 (DLK
C1)
PH
-GT
09 (GT
0)
PH
-GT
09 (GT
1)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W00)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W01)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W02)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W03)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W10)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W11)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W12)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W13)
PH
-CK
16-A/17-A
(PLO
1)
(MIS
C)
(MIS
C)
(MIS
C)
(MIS
C)
(MIS
C)
(MIS
C)
TSWM0
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG3/7/11/15
Dummy
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG2/6/10/14
TSWM1
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG1/5/9/13
TSWM0
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG0/4/8/12
LPIMG1/5/9/13
NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-UMG SYSTEM
PH
-CK
16-A/17-A
(PLO
0)
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LMG 4 (0 3)
ISWM
DUMMY
CMP
CMG
SP
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1Page 11
Revision 1.0
Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (4/5)
PA
-PW
55-B(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM3
PA
-PW
55-B(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM2
PA
-PW
55-B(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM1
PA
-PW
55-B(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B(P
WR
1)
PIM0
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG3/7/11/15
Dummy
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG2/6/10/14
TSWM1
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG1/5/9/13
TSWM0
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG0/4/8/12
LPIMG2/6/10/14
NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-UMG SYSTEM
PH
-PW
14 (PW
RS
W0)
PH
-PW
14 (PW
RS
W1)
PH
-GT
09 (GT
0)
PH
-GT
09 (GT
1)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W00)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W01)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W02)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W03)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W10)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W11)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W12)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W13)
PH
-CK
18 (CLK
0)
PH
-CK
18 (CLK
1)
TSWM1
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LMG 4 (0~3)
ISWM
DUMMY
CMP
CMG
SP
CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296Page 12Revision 1.0
Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (5/5)
PA
-PW
55-B(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM3
PA
-PW
55-B(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM2
PA
-PW
55-B(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM1P
A-P
W55-B
(PW
R0)
PA
-PW
54-B(P
WR
1)
PIM0
Dummy
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG3/7/11/15
Dummy
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG2/6/10/14
TSWM1
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG1/5/9/13
TSWM0
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG0/4/8/12
LPIMG3/7/11/15
NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-UMG SYSTEM
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LMG 4 (0~3)
ISWM
DUMMY
CMP
CMG
SP
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1Page 13
Revision 1.0
Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (1/5)
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG3/7/11/15
Dummy
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG2/6/10/14
TSWM1
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG1/5/9/13
TSWM0
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG0/4/8/12
LPCMG
NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-UMG SYSTEM
ISWM
DUMMY
CMP
CMG
SP
LMG 4 (0~3)
00
00
01
01
02
02
03 04
03 04
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
SP
ISWM
DUMMY
FANU
CMP
PH
-PC
43 (E
MA
)
PZ
-GT
13
(ISA
GT
)P
Z-G
T13
(ISA
GT
)
PZ
-PC
23
(LA
NI)
PZ
-PC
19
(LA
NI)
PZ
-PC
19
(LA
NI)
PZ
-PC
23
(LA
NI)
PZ
-PC
23
(LA
NI)
PZ
-PC
23
(LA
NI)
PH
-DK
10 (D
SP
C)
PH
-IO24 (IO
C)
PW
RS
W0 (P
H-P
W14)
PW
RS
W1 (P
H-P
W14)
HS
W00 (P
U-S
W01) (R
ES
)
HS
W11 (P
U-S
W01) (R
ES
)
HS
W01 (P
U-S
W01)
HS
W10 (P
U-S
W01)
TS
W00 (P
U-S
W00-A
)
TS
W01 (P
U-S
W00-A
)
TS
W02 (P
U-S
W00-A
)
TS
W03 (P
U-S
W00-A
)
TS
W10 (P
U-S
W00-A
)
TS
W11 (P
U-S
W00-A
)
TS
W12 (P
U-S
W00-A
)
TS
W13 (P
U-S
W00-A
)
IOG
T0 (P
H-G
T10)
IOG
T1 (P
H-G
T10)
PLO
0 (P
H-C
K16-A
/17-A
)
PLO
1 (P
H-C
K16-A
/17-A
)
PH
-IO24 (IO
C) N
ote
00 01 02 03 04
PH
-PC
43 (E
MA
)
PZ
-GT
13
(ISA
GT
)P
Z-G
T13
(ISA
GT
)
PZ
-M565
(ISA
GT
A)
PZ
-M565
(ISA
GT
A)
PZ
-PC
22
(LA
NI)
PZ
-ME
44
(ME
M)
PZ
-ME
44
(ME
M)
PZ
-PC
22
(LA
NI)
PZ
-PC
22
(LA
NI)
PZ
-PC
22
(LA
NI)
PH
-M22 (M
MC
)
Note: The 2nd IOC card (optional) may be mounted in this slot.
CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296Page 14Revision 1.0
Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (2/5)
PA
-PW
55-B (P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B (P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PIM3
PA
-PW
55-B (P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B (P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PIM2
PA
-PW
55-B (P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B (P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PIM1P
A-P
W55-B
(PW
R0)
PA
-PW
54-B (P
WR
1)
PIM0
BSCM
LPM
PH
-M22(M
MC
)
PH
-PC
43(EM
A)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
00 01 02 03 04
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG3/7/11/15
Dummy
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG2/6/10/14
TSWM1
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG1/5/9/13
TSWM0
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG0/4/8/12
LPIMG0/4/8/12
NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-UMG SYSTEM
LMG 4 (0 3)
ISWM
DUMMY
CMP
CMG
SP
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1Page 15
Revision 1.0
Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (3/5)
PA
-PW
55-B (P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B (P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PIM3
PA
-PW
55-B (P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B (P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PIM2
PA
-PW
55-B (P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B (P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PH
-PC
36 (MU
X)
PIM1P
A-P
W55-B
(PW
R0)
PA
-PW
54-B (P
WR
1)
PIM0
PH
-PW
14 (PW
RS
W)
PH
-PW
14 (PW
RS
W)
PH
-PC
20 (DLK
C0)
PH
-PC
20 (DLK
C1)
PH
-GT
09 (GT
0)
PH
-GT
09 (GT
1)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W00)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W01)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W02)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W03)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W10)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W11)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W12)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W13)
PH
-CK
16-A/17-A
(PLO
1)
(MIS
C)
(MIS
C)
(MIS
C)
(MIS
C)
(MIS
C)
(MIS
C)
TSWM0
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG3/7/11/15
Dummy
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG2/6/10/14
TSWM1
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG1/5/9/13
TSWM0
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG0/4/8/12
LPIMG1/5/9/13
NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-UMG SYSTEM
PH
-CK
16-A/17-A
(PLO
0)
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LMG 4 (0 3)
ISWM
DUMMY
CMP
CMG
SP
CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296Page 16Revision 1.0
Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (4/5)
PA
-PW
55-B(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM3
PA
-PW
55-B(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM2
PA
-PW
55-B(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM1P
A-P
W55-B
(PW
R0)
PA
-PW
54-B(P
WR
1)
PIM0
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG3/7/11/15
Dummy
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG2/6/10/14
TSWM1
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG1/5/9/13
TSWM0
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG0/4/8/12
LPIMG2/6/10/14
NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-UMG SYSTEM
PH
-PW
14 (PW
RS
W0)
PH
-PW
14 (PW
RS
W1)
PH
-GT
09 (GT
0)
PH
-GT
09 (GT
1)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W00)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W01)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W02)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W03)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W10)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W11)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W12)
PH
-SW
12 (TS
W13)
PH
-CK
18 (CLK
0)
PH
-CK
18 (CLK
1)
TSWM1
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LMG 4 (0~3)
ISWM
DUMMY
CMP
CMG
SP
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1Page 17
Revision 1.0
Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (5/5)
PA
-PW
55-B(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM3
PA
-PW
55-B(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM2
PA
-PW
55-B(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B(P
WR
1)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM1
PA
-PW
55-B(P
WR
0)
PA
-PW
54-B(P
WR
1)
PIM0
Dummy
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG3/7/11/15
Dummy
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG2/6/10/14
TSWM1
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG1/5/9/13
TSWM0
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
IMG0/4/8/12
LPIMG3/7/11/15
NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-UMG SYSTEM
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LMG 4 (0~3)
ISWM
DUMMY
CMP
CMG
SP
CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296Page 18Revision 1.0
This page is for your notes.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 19
Revision 1.0
CHAPTER 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE
This chapter explains the following items for each Control Circuit Card.
• General Function
Explains the general function and purpose of each control circuit card.
• Mounting Location/Condition
Explains the mounting location (mounting module name and slot number, etc.) for each circuit card. If thereare any conditions pertaining to mounting the circuit cards, they are also explained.
• Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The locations of the lamps, switches, and connectors provided on each circuit card are illustrated by a facelayout.
• Lamp Indications
The names, colors, and indication states of lamps mounted on each circuit card are listed.
• Switch Settings
Each circuit card's switches are listed with their names, switch numbers, their setting and its meaning, stan-dard setting, etc.
• External Interface
If the lead outputs of the circuit card are provided by an LT connector, the relation between the mountingslots and the LT connectors is illustrated by an LT Connector Lead Face Layout. If the lead outputs are pro-vided by other than an LT connector, or are provided by the circuit card front connector, the connector leadlocations and the connecting routes are shown.
In addition, a Switch Setting Sheet, which may be used to record the switch settings, is provided at the end ofthe explanation for each circuit card.
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 20Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
1. General Function
The CPR in 1-IMG, 4-IMG, and IPX-U system consists of the following components.
(a) CPU BOARD: Contains the Main Processor Unit (MPU), ROM, and 128 to 256 Mbyte of Random Access Memory (RAM). This board may also contain the ISAGT (PZ-GT13/PZ-GT20) on its Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus, and LANI (PZ-PC19) on the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI).
(b) DSP: Contains the CPR switches and the CPR status indicator lamps.
(c) FDD/HDD: Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Hard Disk Drive (HDD) are mounted on a circuit card, which, if necessary, can be extracted and/or inserted while the system is in operation.
(d) PWR: Supplies the operating power to the CPR and also the MISC slots of the LPM.
Figure 2-1 Location of SN1695 CPRBF-A (CPR)
LANI
LANI
LANI
LANI
HDD
FDD
HDD
FDD
CPU CPU
DSP DSP
ISAGT ISAGT
CPR#0 CPR#1
To HUB
To HUB
To HUB
To HUB
To I/O local bus
To MISC bus
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 21
Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
The CPR in IPX-UMG system consists of the following components.
(a) CPU BOARD: Contains System Processor Unit (SP)/Common Main Processor Unit (CMP)/Local Processor Unit (LP), ROM, and 128 to 256 Mbyte of Random Access Memory (RAM). This board may also contain PCI MEM (PZ-ME44), the ISAGT (PZ-GT13/PZ-GT20/PZ-M565) on its Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus, and LANI (PZ-PC19/PZ-PC22/PZ-PC23) on the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI).
(b) DSP: Contains the CPR switches and the CPR status indicator lamps.
(c) FDD/HDD: Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Hard Disk Drive (HDD) are mounted on a circuit card, which, if necessary, can be extracted and/or inserted while the system is in operation. Note
(d) PWR: Supplies the operating power to the CPR and also the MISC slots of the SP/CMP/LP.
Note: FDD/HDD is not mounted on the CPR of CMP/LP in IPX-UMG system.
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 22Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The CPR is composed of the CPU BOARD, DSP, FDD/HDD, and PWR and is located in the LocalProcessor Module (LPM) as shown in Figure 2-2. Since the CPR provides the Industrial StandardArchitecture (ISA) bus and Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, the ISAGT and LANI cards arelocated in those busses respectively.
Figure 2-2 CPR Location
PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) Note
CPU BOARD
PZ-DK224 (DSP)
PZ-PC19 (LANI)
PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
PZ-IO27(FDD/HDD)
PZ-PC19 (LANI)
PZ-PW92 (PWR)
CPR
LPM
ISWM/PIM0BSCM
Note: This card is mounted in the IMG0 of the IPX-U system only.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 23
Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
When the SN1695 CPRBF-A is used in the IPX-UMG system, the CPR is mounted on each processor mod-ule (SP, CMP, and LPs) as shown in Figure 2-3. As to the mounting location of PWR, FDD/HDD, DSP, andother circuit cards within the CPR, refer to Figure 2-5.
Figure 2-3 The SN1695 CPRBF-A in the IPX-UMG System
00010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 1314 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23
00010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 1314 1516 1718 19 202122 23
000102 0304 0506 07 080910 1112 1314 1516 1718 19 2021 22 23
0001020304 0506 07080910 1112 1314 1516 1718 19 202122 23
0001020304
LANI LANI ISAGT
LANI LANI ISAGT
000102 0304 0506 07 080910 1112 1314 1516 1718 19 2021 22 23
0001020304 0506 07080910 1112 1314 1516 1718 19 202122 23
0001020304
LANI LANI ISAGT
LANI LANI ISAGT
00010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 141516 1718 19 20 2122 23
00010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13141516 1718 19 20 2122 23
00010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13141516 1718 19 20 2122 23
00010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13141516 1718 19 20 2122 23
00010203 04 05 06 0708 09 10 1112 1314 15 1617 18 19 20212223
0001020304 0506 07 080910 1112 1314 1516 17 18 19 20 2122 23
0001020304 0506 07 080910 1112 1314 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23
000102 0304 0506 07080910 1112 1314 1516 1718 19 202122 23
00010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 141516 1718 19 202122 23
00010203 04 05 06 0708 09 10 1112 1314 15 1617 18 19 20212223
0001020304 0506 07 080910 1112 1314 1516 17 18 19 20 2122 23
0001020304 0506 07 080910 1112 1314 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23
000102 0304 0506 07080910 1112 1314 1516 1718 19 202122 23
00010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 141516 1718 19 202122 23
00010203 04 05 06 0708 09 10 1112 1314 15 1617 18 19 20212223
00010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 1314 1516 1718 19 202122 230001020304
LANI LANI ISAGT
LANI LANI ISAGT
CMG
LMG0 ‘3
CMP–CPR
SP–CPR
LP–CPR
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 24Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
Figure 2-4 CPR Location for IPX-UMG System
PZ-GT20 (ISAGT)/PZ-M565 (ISAGT)
CPU BOARDPZ-DK224 (DSP)
PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
PZ-IO27/28 (FDD/HDD)Note 3
PZ-PC19/22/23 (LANI) Note 2
PZ-PW92 (PWR)PZ-ME44(PCI MEM)Note 4
CPR
SP/CMP/LP
ISWM/Dummy/PIM0
Note 1
Note 1: PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) card is mounted in the IMG0 of the IPX-U system or in IMG0/4/8/12 of IPX-UMGsystem.
Note 2: The required LANI card and its mounting slot differs depending on each processor unit on which theCPR is mounted within the IPX-UMG system. Refer to the explanation for PZ-PC22/PZ-PC23 cardin this manual or Installation Manual.
Note 3: FDD/HDD is not mounted on the CPR of CMP/LP in IPX-UMG System.
Note 4: PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) and PZ-M565 (ISAGT) cards are mounted on the CMP only.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 25
Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The CPR contains the following lamps, switches and connectors.
Slots 0-3 provide the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, and Slots 4-6 are the IndustrialStandard Architecture (ISA) bus.
Figure 2-5 Front View of CPR
Note: This card is mounted in the IMG0 of the IPX-U system only.
SW
DC-40V~-58.6V
PZ-PW92
MBRCPU OPE
ON
HDD
-48V OUT
ON
OFF
5A125VAC/DC
I
O
PALM
ON
ALM
OUTPWR
INPWR
ON
1 4
IMG1
SYSTEM SELECT0 STATUS
SENSE
CPURST
SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
WDT
IMG2
IMG0
A B
IMG3
ON
1 12
SYSTEM SELECT1
ON
13 20
SYSTEM SELECT2
PWR(PZ-PW92)
FDD/HDD(PZ-IO27/28) DSP(PZ-DK224)
Note
[CPR for 1-IMG/4-IMG/IPX-U System]
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 26Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
Figure 2-6 Front View of CPR in SP for IPX-UMG System
Figure 2-7 Front View of CPR in CMP for IPX-UMG System
SW
DC-40V~-58.6V
PZ-PW92
MBRCPU OPE
ON
HDD
-48V OUT
ON
OFF
5A125VAC/DC
I
O
PALM
ON
ALM
OUTPWR
INPWR
ON
1 4
IMG1
SYSTEM SELECT0 STATUS
SENSE
CPURST
SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
WDT
IMG2
IMG0
A B
IMG3
ON
1 12
SYSTEM SELECT1
ON
13 20
SYSTEM SELECT2
PWR(PZ-PW92)
FDD/HDD(PZ-IO27/28) DSP(PZ-DK224)
LANI(PZ-PC23)
ISAGT(PZ-GT13)
LANI(PZ-PC19)
[CPR in SP for IPX-UMG System]
SW
DC-40V~-58.6V
PZ-PW92
MBRCPU OPE
ON
-48V OUT
ON
OFF
5A125VAC/DC
I
O
PALM
ON
ALM
OUTPWR
INPWR
ON
1 4
IMG1
SYSTEM SELECT0 STATUS
SENSE
CPURST
SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
WDT
IMG2
IMG0
A B
IMG3
ON
1 12
SYSTEM SELECT1
ON
13 20
SYSTEM SELECT2
A B
PWR(PZ-PW92)
DSP(PZ-DK224)
LANI(PZ-PC22)ISAGTA(PZ-M565)
ISAGT(PZ-GT13)
MEM(PZ-ME44)
[CPR in CMP for IPX-UMG System]
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 27
Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
Figure 2-8 Front View of CPR in LP for IPX-UMG System
SW
DC-40V~-58.6V
PZ-PW92
MBRCPU OPE
ON
-48V OUT
ON
OFF
5A125VAC/DC
I
O
PALM
ON
ALM
OUTPWR
INPWR
ON
1 4
IMG1
SYSTEM SELECT0 STATUS
SENSE
CPURST
SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
WDT
IMG2
IMG0
A B
IMG3
ON
1 12
SYSTEM SELECT1
ON
13 20
SYSTEM SELECT2
PWR(PZ-PW92)
DSP(PZ-DK224)
LANI(PZ-PC22)ISAGT(PZ-GT20)
ISAGT(PZ-GT13)
[CPR in LP for IPX-UMG System]
Note: This card is required when IMG2/6/10/14 and/or IMG3/7/11/15 is configured.
Note
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 28Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp Indications vary depending on the node. The following shows the lamp indications for the CPR inthe IMG for 1-IMG, 4-IMG, and IPX-U system.
[Lamp Indications for 1-IMG/4-IMG/IPX-U System]
Note: No lamp indication in STBY mode.
The following shows lamp indications for the CPR in the ISW.
Note: No lamp indication in STBY mode.
LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION
ON (PWR) Green Lights green when the PWR is supplied.
ALM (PWR) Red Lights red when the PWR is abnormal.
HDD(FDD/HDD)
Red Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed.
WDT (DSP) Red Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred.
CPU OPE (DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU is in active state.
CPU OPE (DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU is in active state.
IMG0 (DSP) Green Flashes green when PZ-GT13 (located in Slot 6) is in operation.
IMG1 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG1 is mounted. Note
IMG2 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG2 is mounted. Note
IMG3 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG3 is mounted. Note
LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION
ON (PWR) Green Lights green when the PWR is supplied.
ALM (PWR) Red Lights red when the PWR is abnormal.
HDD (FDD/HDD) Red Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed.
WDT (DSP) Red Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred.
CPU OPE (DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU of the ISW is in active state.
IMG0 (DSP) GreenLights green when the CPU of the ISW is in active state.
Flashes green when the CPU of the ISW is in stand-by state.
IMG1 (DSP) Green Lights green when the TSW1 of the ISW is used. Note
IMG2 (DSP) Green Lights green when the TSW2 of the ISW is used. Note
IMG3 (DSP) Green Lights green when the TSW3 of the ISW is used. Note
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 29
Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
Note: The segment spinning indication shows a processing status has completed successfully, or “E” indicatesthe processing failed.
LAMPNAME
DESCRIPTION
STATUS(DSP)
Two sets of “7-segment LED” show the CPR processing status. The CPR processing status is determined by the SENSE switch settings, and the new processing status starts when the CPURST switch is pressed. The 7-segment LED indication on each CPR processing status is listed below.
SENSESTATUS
DESCRIPTIONLEFT RIGHT
1
Not used“F”“c”“d”
1. When Program Install
The HD in the CPR is initialized and the program is installed. (These three processes execute)
“F”indicated during HD format.
“c”indicated when copying data from FD to HD
“d” indicated while making the directory on the HD
Not used “1”
2. When Program Load
After program installation, the program should be transferred from the HD to memory.
“1” is indicated during this process.
2
“0-9” “0-9”
3. On-line active CPR
The active CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates the CPU occupancy rate by percentage. (00-99%)
Not used “S”“b”“y”
4. On-line stand-by CPR
The stand-by CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates “S,” “b,” “y”
Not used
5. Program & Office data load
“1”indicated during the Program and Office data transfer from the HD to the memory
“0” indicated during the Office data load
3 Not used “c” “c”indicated when copying the data from FD to HD
4 Not used “d” “d”indicated while making the directory on the HD
5 Not used
The CPR is starting-up with ON LINE (OAI memory clear restart).
“1”indicated during the Program load.
“0”indicated during the process.
6 Not used “F” “F” indicated during HD format.
C Not used “H”The CPR is starting-up OFF LINE.
“H”indicated during the ROM data loading.
“1” “0”
“1” “0”
Segment Spinning Indication
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 30Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
The following shows the lamp indication for the CPR in the SP, CMP, and LP for IPX-UMG system.
[Lamp Indications for the CPR in SP]
[Lamp Indications for the CPR in CMP]
Note: No lamp indication in STBY mode.
LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION
ON (PWR) Green Lights green when the PWR is supplied.
ALM (PWR) Red Lights red when the PWR is abnormal.
HDD (FDD/HDD) Red Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed.
WDT (DSP) Red Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred.
CPU OPE (DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU of the SP is in active state.
IMG0 (DSP) GreenRemains OFF when the CPU is in active state.
Flashes green when the CPU is in stand-by state.
IMG1 (DSP) Green Not used.
IMG2 (DSP) Green Not used.
IMG3 (DSP) Green Not used.
LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION
ON (PWR) Green Lights green when the PWR is supplied.
ALM (PWR) Red Lights red when the PWR is abnormal.
WDT (DSP) Red Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred.
CPU OPE (DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU of the CMP is in active state.
IMG0 (DSP) GreenLights green when the CPU is in active state.
Flashes green when the CPU is in stand-by state.
IMG1 (DSP) Green Lights green when the TSW1 in the ISWM of CMG is used. Note
IMG2 (DSP) Green Lights green when the TSW2 in the ISWM of CMG is used. Note
IMG3 (DSP) Green Lights green when the TSW3 in the ISWM of CMG is used. Note
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 31
Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
[Lamp Indications for the CPR in LP]
Note: No lamp indication in STBY mode.
LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION
ON (PWR) Green Lights green when the PWR is supplied.
ALM (PWR) Red Lights red when the PWR is abnormal.
WDT (DSP) Red Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred.
CPU OPE (DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU is in active state.
IMG0 (DSP) Green Flashes green when PZ-GT13 (located in Slot 6) is in operation.
IMG1 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG1/5/9/13 is mounted. Note
IMG2 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG2/6/10/14 is mounted. Note
IMG3 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG3/7/11/15 is mounted. Note
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 32Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
Note: The segment spinning indication shows a processing status has completed successfully, or indicates “E”meaning the processing failed.
LAMPNAME
DESCRIPTION
STATUS(DSP)
Two sets of “7-segment LED” show the CPR processing status. The CPR processing status is determined by the SENSE switch settings, and the new processing status starts when the CPURST switch is pressed. The 7-segment LED indication on each CPR processing status is listed below.
SENSESTATUS
DESCRIPTIONLEFT RIGHT
0
“0-9” “0-9”1. On-line active CPR
The active CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates the CPU occupancy rate by percentage. (00-99%)
When the “EMA SUP” switch is “OFF” on the PH-PC43 (EMA) card.
Not used “S”“b”“y”
2. On-line stand-by CPR The stand-by CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates “S,” “b,” “y”
Not used “0-F”
3. Both active and stand-by CPRThe setting of SENSE switch is indicated.
When the “EMA SUP” switch is “ON” on the PH-PC43 (EMA) card.
Not used
4. Program & Office data load “1” indicated during the Program and Office data transfer from the HD to the
memory“0” indicated during the Office data load
1
Not used“F”“c”“d”
1. When Program InstallThe HD in the CPR is initialized and the program is installed. (These three process-es execute) “F” indicated during HD format.“c” indicated when copying data from FD (Basic Software #1) to HD “d” indicated while making the directory on the HD
Not used “1”
2. When Program Load After program installation, the program should be transferred from the HD to memory. “1” is indicated during this process.
3 Not used “c” “c” indicated when copying the data from FD to HD
5 Not usedThe CPR is starting-up with ON LINE (OAI memory clear restart).“1” indicated during the Program load.“0” indicated during the process.
C Not used “H”The CPR is starting-up OFF LINE. “H” indicated during the ROM data loading.
“1” “0”
“1” “0”
Segment Spinning Ind
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 33
Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
5. Switch Settings
[for 1-IMG/4-IMG/IPX-U System]
Note: Make-busy of this circuit card is not allowed while the Floppy Disk Drive or Hard Disk Drive is beingaccessed.
SWITCH NAMESWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
SW(PWR)
—ON × PWR is supplied to the CPR.
OFF PWR is not supplied to the CPR.
MB Note(FDD/HDD)
—ON (Up) Make-busy of the FDD/HDD.
OFF (Down) × Normal setting.
MBR(DSP)
—ON (Up)
Make-busy Request of the CPR in which GT is located.
OFF (Down) × Normal setting.
CPURST(DSP)
— —Execute the CPR processing according to the SENSE setting.
SYSTEM SELECT0
(DSP)
1 OFF × Not used.
2 OFF × Not used.
3 OFF × Not used.
4ON Watchdog Timer time-out is not detected.
OFF × Watchdog Timer time-out is detected.
SYSTEM SELECT1
(DSP)
1ON PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR ON.
OFF PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR OFF.
2ON PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR ON.
OFF PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR OFF.
3ON PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR ON.
OFF PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR OFF.
4ON PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR ON.
OFF PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR OFF.
5~7 OFF × Fixed to “OFF.”
8ON IPX-U System
OFF 1IMG/4IMG System
SYSTEM SELECT2
(DSP)1~8 OFF × Not used.
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 34Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
Note: The SENSE switch designates the CPR processing status. The new processing status starts when theCPRRST switch on the DSP is pressed while setting the SENSE switch.
SWITCH NAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SENSE(DSP)Note
1
The following three processes are executed at the FDD/HDD.
• HD formatted
• File copied from FDD to HD
• Directory created on the HD
2 × On-line mode.
3 File copied from FDD to HD within the FDD/HDD.
4 Directory created on the HD of the FDD/HDD.
5OAI memory cleared, and the CPR started up in ON LINE mode by loading the ROM data.
6 HD format of the FDD/HDD.
C The CPR starts up in OFF LINE mode by loading the ROM data.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 35
Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
[for IPX-UMG System]
Note: Make-busy of this circuit card is not allowed while the Floppy Disk Drive or Hard Disk Drive is beingaccessed. This switch is used on the CPR mounted in SP only.
SWITCH NAMESWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW(PWR)
—ON × PWR is supplied to the CPR.
OFF PWR is not supplied to the CPR.
MB Note(FDD/HDD)
—ON (Up) Make-busy of the FDD/HDD.
OFF (Down) × Normal setting.
MBR(DSP)
—ON (Up)
Make-busy Request of the CPR in which GT is located.
OFF (Down) × Normal setting.
CPURST(DSP)
— —Execute the CPR processing according to the SENSE setting.
SYSTEM SELECT0
(DSP)
1 ON × Fixed to “ON.”
2 OFF × Fixed to “OFF.”
3
ONHigh Density system configuration (one LP controls two IMGs)
OFF × Standard system configuration (one LP controls four IMGs)
4ON Watchdog Timer time-out is not detected.
OFF × Watchdog Timer time-out is detected.
SYSTEM SELECT1
(DSP)
1ON PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR ON.
OFF PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR OFF.
2ON PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR ON.
OFF PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR OFF.
3ON PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR ON.
OFF PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR OFF.
4ON PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR ON.
OFF PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR OFF.
5~7 OFF × Fixed to “OFF.”
8 ON × Fixed to “ON.”
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 36Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
Note: This switch setting is valid when the “EMA SUP” switch is ON (UP side).
SWITCH NAMESWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
SYSTEM SELECT2
(DSP)
1~4 OFF × Not used.
5~8
Physical PBI Number (Equipment Number)
Note 1: Physical PBI No. must be the sameon the CPR of system #0 and #1 indual configuration.
Note 2: This setting is required when thesystem applies High Density systemconfiguration (i.e., a LP controlstwo IMGs) only.
SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 PBI No.
ONONOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFF
ONONOFFOFFOFFOFFONONONON
ONONOFFOFFONONOFFOFFONON
ONOFFOFFONOFFONOFFONOFFON
PBI 02 (SP)PBI 04 (CMP)PBI 30 (LP 00)PBI 38 (LP 04) NotePBI 40 (LP 08)PBI 48 (LP 12) NotePBI 50 (LP 16)PBI 58 (LP 20) NotePBI 60 (LP 24)PBI 68 (LP 28) Note
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 37
Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
Note: Refer to the following figure and table for the PBI Number and the Equipment Number for IPX-UMGsystem. The same PBI Number must be assigned to both #0 and #1 processors in dual configuration.
Processor Name PBI No. CPU Accommodation Equipment No.
SP 02 15
CMP 04 14
LP00 (IMG0) 30 0
LP08 (IMG4) 40 2
LP16 (IMG8) 50 4
LP24 (IMG12) 60 6
CMG
SP
CMP
IMG0
LP00
IMG1 IMG2 IMG3
IMG4
LP08
IMG5 IMG6 IMG7
IMG8
LP16
IMG9 IMG10 IMG11
IMG12
LP24
IMG13 IMG14 IMG15
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 38Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
Note 1: The SENSE switch designates the CPR processing status. The new processing status starts when theCPRRST switch on the DSP is pressed while setting the SENSE switch.
Note 2: This switch is used on the CPR mounted in SP only.
Note 3: Connection Hold Restart is proceeded by initializing the system with the TOPU key.
SWITCH NAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SENSE(DSP)Note 1
0Note 2
× On-line mode.
1Note 2
The following three processes are executed at the FDD/HDD.
• HD formatted
• File copied from FDD to HD
• Directory created on the HD
3Note 2
File copied from FDD to HD/Connection Hold Restart. Note 3
5Note 2
OAI memory cleared, and the CPR started up in ON LINE mode by loading the ROM data.
CNote 2
The CPR starts up in OFF LINE mode by loading the ROM data.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 39
Revision 1.0
SN1695 CPRBF-ACPU Board
6. External Interface
See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
SW(PWR)
MB(PWR:PZ-PW106)
MB(FDD/HDD)
MBR(DSP)
SYSTEM SELECT0
(DSP)
SYSTEM SELECT1
(DSP)
SYSTEM SELECT2(DSP)
SENSE(DSP)
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 ON
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 40Revision 1.0
PH-GT09Gate
PH-GT09Gate
1. General Function
The PH-GT09 (GT) circuit card provides both the TSW I/O Local bus and the MISC bus interface. TheCPR controls TSW, PLO, DLKC, and MISC via the ISAGT and GT.
Figure 2-9 Location of PH-GT09 (GT) Card in the System
PLO0
PLO1
TDSW03TDSW I/OLocal Bus
TDSW I/OLocal Bus
TDSW13
TDSW02
TDSW12
TDSW01
TDSW11
TDSW00
DLKC0
MISC
ISAGT
DSP
CPULANI
LANI
GT
TDSW10
CPR #0
To HUB
To HUB
To HUB
To HUB
ISAGT
GT
DLKC1
DSP
CPU
CPR #1
LANI
LANI
EMA
IOC/MISC
MISC Bus
MISC Bus
MISC Bus
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 41
Revision 1.0
PH-GT09Gate
2. Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-10.
Figure 2-10 Face Layout of PH-GT09 (GT)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Mounting Module TSWM
GT
0
GT
1
MB
MBR
OPE/MB
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 42Revision 1.0
PH-GT09Gate
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
Note: Prior to extracting the GT card, flip the MBR switch on and then flip the MB switch on.
6. External Interface
See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.
7. Switch Setting Sheet
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE/MB Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state.
SWITCH NAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Make-busy of circuit card
DOWN × Normal setting
MBR Note
UPWhen the ACT side of GT’s MBR switch is flipped, the ST-BY side of TSW, DLKC, and GT is forced to switch over the ACT side. (When the TSW is dual configuration.)
DOWN × Normal setting.
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MB
MBR
ON
ON
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 43
Revision 1.0
PH-GT10Input Output Gate
PH-GT10Input Output Gate
1. General Function
The PH-GT10 circuit card provides the TSW I/O bus interface allowing the CPU board to control the TSW,HSW, and PLO cards in the Inter-node Switch Module (ISWM) of the ISW/CMG. This circuit card also isequipped with the copy function to be consistent with the data of TSW I/O bus in both systems (single/dual). This circuit card is used for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.
Figure 2-11 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-U System
HSW01
HSW00
TSW03
TSW02
TSW01
TSW00
LANI
LANI
LANI
LANI
HSW11
HSW10
TSW13
TSW12
TSW11
TSW10
PLO 1
PLO 0
RES
CPU CPU
MISC
IOC
EMA
RES
RES RES
(IOGT1)PH-GT10
(IOGT0)PH-GT10
ISAGT ISAGT
MISC I/O BUS
ISAGT BUSISAGT BUS LPM
TSW I/O BUSTSW I/O BUS
ISWM
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 44Revision 1.0
PH-GT10Input Output Gate
Figure 2-12 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-UMG System
HSW01
HSW00
TSW03
TSW02
TSW01
TSW00
LANI
LANIP-BUS
LANI
LANIP-BUS
HSW11
HSW10
TSW13
TSW12
TSW11
TSW10
PLO 1
PLO 0
RES
CPU CPU
MMC
MISC
EMA
RES
RES RES
(IOGT1)PH-GT10
(IOGT0)PH-GT10
ISAGT ISAGT
ISAGT2 ISAGT2
PCI MEMPCI BUS PCI BUSPCI MEM
MISCI/O
BUS
MISCI/O
BUS
ISAGT BUSISAGT BUS CMP
TSW I/O BUSTSW I/O BUS
ISWM
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 45
Revision 1.0
PH-GT10Input Output Gate
2. Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-13.
Figure 2-13 Face Layout of PH-GT10 (IOGT)
Mounting Module ISWM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
MB
MBR
OPE/MB
PWRALMCA4LCOPY
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 46Revision 1.0
PH-GT10Input Output Gate
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
6. External Interface
See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.
7. Switch Setting Sheet
LAMP NAME COLOR MEANING
OPE/MB
Green Lights when this circuit card is in ACT state.
OFF This circuit card is in ST-BY state.
Red Lights when this circuit card is in Make-busy state.
PWRALM Red Lights when On-Board Power Supply for this circuit card is abnormal.
CA4L Red Lights when 4 MHz clock supplied for Local I/O Bus is faulty.
COPY Green Lights when this circuit card is in COPY mode.
SWITCH NAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit Card Make-busy
DOWN × Circuit Card Make-busy cancel
MBR UP Make-busy request
DOWN × Make-busy request cancel
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MB
MBR
ON
ON
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 47
Revision 1.0
PA-PC94Data Link Multiplexer
PA-PC94Data Link Multiplexer
1. General Function
This circuit card mainly provides the two functions: 1) collection of BLF/TGBL information (associatedwith Attendant/Desk Console operation) from DLKC cards of all nodes in an IPX-U/IPX-UMG system,and 2) distribution of the collected data to ATI cards of all nodes. While a DLKC card can manage this pro-cessing solely on an accommodated node basis, the use of this card makes possible the BLF/TGBL man-agement even on a system basis, via the Inter-node Switch (ISW). Note that this card is mounted in a PIMof any node, and if necessary, can have an optional dual configuration.
For details on BLF/TGBL information, refer to the following service features explained in the “FeatureProgramming Manual”.• Busy Lamp Field-Flexible [B-2]• Trunk Group Busy Lamp [T-9]
Figure 2-14 Location of PA-PC94 (DLMX)
IPX-U System/IPX-UMG System
ATI
ATI
ATI
ATI
(TSW 1) (TSW 1)
(TSW 1)
(TSW 1)
TSW/HSW 1
DLMX 0
(DLMX 1)
IN
OUT
DLKC 0
(DLKC 1)
DLKC 0
(DLKC 1)
DLKC 0
(DLKC 1)
DLKC 0
(DLKC 1)
TSW 0 TSW 0
TSW 0
TSW 0
TSW/HSW 0
LN 0/LMG0 LN 1/LMG1
LN 2/LMG2
LN 3/LMG3
ISW/CMG
Note
: Circuit Card
: Circuit Card (No. 1 System)
: BLF/TGBL data from DLKC
: BLF/TGBL data to ATI
: BLF/TGBL data to ATI (No. 1 system)
: BLF/TGBL data from DLKC (No. 1 system)
BLF: Busy Lamp Field - Flexible
TGBL: Trunk Group Busy Lamp
Note: IN - DLMX card gathers BLF/TGBL information from DLKC card of each node, via ISW/CMG.OUT - DLMX card sends the collected BLF/TGBL information to ATI card(s) of each node, via ISW/CMG.
This figure shows an example where a pair of DLMX cards (No. 0/No. 1 system) is accommodated in a PIM ofLN0/LMG0.
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 48Revision 1.0
PA-PC94Data Link Multiplexer
2. Mounting Location/Condition
When this circuit card is used in a single configuration.
Mount this circuit card in any of the shaded slots:
Mounting conditions of this circuit card are as follows:
1. This circuit card cannot be mounted in the slot 05, 07, 09, 10, 11, 12, 16, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23.2. This card is used in odd-number group (G) of the shaded slots above.3. To used this card, be sure to assign “RT=938” on the ATRK command.4. Do not mount another line/trunk circuit card in a slot adjoining the DLMX card within the same
Highway Block (HW) (i.e. do not mount other line/trunk card in the right side of the slot where aDLMX card is mounted).
5. Only one DLMX card can be mounted when the system is composed of single configuration.
When this circuit card is used in a dual configuration.
Mount this circuit card in any of the shaded slots:
Mounting conditions of this circuit card are as follows:
1. A pair of DLMX card No. 0/No. 1 systems must be mounted in the same Highway Block (HW).2. This circuit card cannot be mounted in 32-port slot (10, 11,12, 21, 22, 23).3. This card is used in odd-number group (G) of the shaded slots above.4. To use this card, be sure to assign “RT=938” on the ATRK command.5. A maximum two DLMX cards (a pair of DLMX card) can be mounted when the system is a dual
configuration.
PIMMounting Module
HW 0 HW 1 HW 2 HW 6 HW 7 HW 8Highway Block
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1918 20 21 22 23
DL
MX
DL
MX
DL
MX
DL
MX
DL
MX
DL
MX
Mounting Condition
PIMMounting Module
HW 0 HW 1 HW 2 HW 6 HW 7 HW 8Highway Block
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1918 20 21 22 23
DL
MX
#0
DL
MX
#1
DL
MX
#0
DL
MX
#1
DL
MX
#0
DL
MX
#1
DL
MX
#0
DL
MX
#1
DL
MX
#0
DL
MX
#1
DL
MX
#0
DL
MX
#1
Mounting Condition
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 49
Revision 1.0
PA-PC94Data Link Multiplexer
3. Face Layout of Lamps and Switches
The face layout of lamps and switches is shown below.
Figure 2-15 Face Layout of PA-PC94 (DLMX)
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below:
PA-PC94 Lamp Indications Reference
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.
ACTGreen Lights when this circuit card is in a active state.
OFF Off when this circuit card is in a stand-by state.
LOAD OFF Not used.
PWALM Red Lights when OBP alarm
ACT
PWALM
LOAD
MB KEY
OPE
MNT
MODE
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 50Revision 1.0
PA-PC94Data Link Multiplexer
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
6. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNo.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit card make-busy.
DOWN Circuit card make-busy cancel
MNT
0 OFF × Fixed to OFF.
1 OFF × Fixed to OFF.
2 OFF × Fixed to OFF.
3ON Make-busy-request.
OFF Cancel the make-busy-request.
MODE0 × Standard setting. (TSW fixed connection)
1-7 Not used.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MB
MNT
MODE
ON
0123
ON
0
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 51
Revision 1.0
PA-PW54-ADual Power
PA-PW54-ADual Power
1. General Function
The PA-PW54-A (DPWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards located in the PIM. The -48 V input power source, which is converted to +5 V, -5 V, and +12 V, is distributed to each circuit card inthe PIM. This card also has a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltage can beselected from 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 75 Vrms, 90 Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a Howler Tonecircuit resides on this card.
Figure 2-16 Location of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card in the System
Note: The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) .
HOW (For LC)
CR (For LC)
+5V, +12V, -5V
DC-DC
RGU
HOW
SUBPWR
REL
NFB
PA-PW55-A (PWR) PA-PW54-A (DPWR)
-48 V (For LC, TRK)
DC-DC
RGU
HOW
SUBPWR
REL
NFB
-48 V
+80V (Option) Note
+80 V (For MWL)
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 52Revision 1.0
PA-PW54-ADual Power
2. Mounting Location/Conditions
This circuit card is mounted in the following slot.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PIM
Mounting Module PIM
(PA-P
W54-A
)
DP
WR
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 53
Revision 1.0
PA-PW54-ADual Power
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-17.
Figure 2-17 Face Layout of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card
-48V SW
FUSE
FUSE
SIDE VIEW
SW4
FRONT VIEW
PA-
PW54
-A
5.0A
0.5A
RGUOUT0.5A125V
AC/DC
+80VOUT5A
125VAC/DC
-48VOUT25A
AC250VDC125V
RST
MB
-48VDC
INPUT
-48VSW
-48VIN
CONN
25A
+80V ON-48V ONRGU ON
DC ONOPE
DC ALMCPU ALM
RGU ALMHOW ALM
UP(
)
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 54Revision 1.0
PA-PW54-ADual Power
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
This circuit card has the following switches.
6. External Interface
No cable connections are required.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
+80V ON Green Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied.
–48 V ON Green Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied.
RGU ON Green Remains lit while RGU output is in progress.
DC ON Green Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally.
OPE Green Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible.
CPUALM Red Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated.
DCALM Red Lights when +5 V, +12 V, or –5 V outputs alarm.
RGUALM Red Lights when RGU voltage alarm.
HOWALM Red Lights when howler alarm.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNo.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGDESCRIPTION
–48V SW —ON × –48 V input power is supplied.
OFF –48 V input power is not supplied.
RESET —PUSH Hardware reset of the circuit card.
— × Normal setting.
MB —ON Make-busy of the circuit card.
OFF × Normal setting.
SW4
1ON Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz]
OFF × Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz]
2ON × Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms]
OFF Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 55
Revision 1.0
PA-PW54-ADual Power
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
–48 V
RESET
MB DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel
SW420 [Hz]90 [Vrms]
ON1 2
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 56Revision 1.0
PA-PW54-BDual Power
PA-PW54-BDual Power
1. General Function
The PA-PW54-B (DPWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated in the PIM.The -48V input power source, which is converted to +5V, -5V, and +12V, is distributed to each circuit cardin the PIM. This card is also equipped with a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency andvoltage can be selected among 20Hz, 25Hz, 75Vrms, 90Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, aHowler Tone circuit resides on this card.
Figure 2-18 Location of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card within the System
Note: The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) .
HOW (For LC)
CR (For LC)
+5V, +12V, -5V
DC-DC
RGU
HOW
SUBPWR
REL
NFB
PA-PW55-B (PWR) PA-PW54-B (DPWR)
-48 V (For LC, TRK)
DC-DC
RGU
HOW
SUBPWR
REL
NFB
-48 V
+80V (Option) Note
+80 V (For MWL)
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 57
Revision 1.0
PA-PW54-BDual Power
2. Mounting Location/Conditions
This circuit card is mounted in the following slot.
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
DP
WR
(PA-P
W54-B
)
PIM
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 58Revision 1.0
PA-PW54-BDual Power
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-19.
Figure 2-19 Face Layout of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card
-48V SW
FUSE
FUSE
SIDE VIEW
SW4
FRONT VIEW
PA-
PW54
- B
5.0A
0.5A
RGUOUT0.5A125V
AC/DC
+80VOUT5A
125VAC/DC
-48VOUT25A
AC250VDC125V
RST
MB
-48VDC
INPUT
-48VSW
-48VIN
CONN
20A
+80V ON-48V ONRGU ON
DC ONOPE
DC ALMCPU ALM
RGU ALMHOW ALM
UP(
)
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 59
Revision 1.0
PA-PW54-BDual Power
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
This circuit card has the following switches.
6. External Interface
No cable connections are required.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
+80V ON Green Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied.
–48 V ON Green Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied.
RGU ON Green Remains lit while RGU output is in progress.
DC ON Green Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally.
OPE Green Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible.
CPUALM Red Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated.
DCALM Red Lights in the case of +5 V, +12 V, or –5 V outputs alarm.
RGUALM Red Lights in the case of RGU voltage alarm.
HOWALM Red Lights in the case of howler alarm.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNo.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGDESCRIPTION
–48V SW —ON × –48V input power is supplied.
OFF –48V input power is not supplied.
RESET —PUSH Hardware reset of the circuit card.
— × Normal setting
MB —ON Make busy of the circuit card.
OFF × Normal setting
SW4
1ON Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz]
OFF × Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz]
2ON × Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms]
OFF Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 60Revision 1.0
PA-PW54-BDual Power
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
–48 V
RESET
MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel
SW420 [Hz]90 [Vrms]
ON1 2
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 61
Revision 1.0
PA-PW55-APower
PA-PW55-APower
1. General Function
The PA-PW55-A (PWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards located in the PIM. The -48V input power source, which is converted to +5 V, -5 V, and +12 V, is distributed to each circuit card in theassociated PIM. This card also has a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltagecan be selected from 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 75 Vrms, 90 Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a HowlerTone circuit resides on this card.
Figure 2-20 Location of PA-PW55-A (PWR) Card in the System
Note: The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) .
HOW (For LC)
CR (For LC)
+5V, +12V, -5V
DC-DC
RGU
HOW
SUBPWR
REL
NFB
PA-PW55-A (PWR) PA-PW54-A (DPWR)
-48 V (For LC, TRK)
DC-DC
RGU
HOW
SUBPWR
REL
NFB
-48 V
+80V (Option) Note
+80 V (For MWL)
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 62Revision 1.0
PA-PW55-APower
2. Mounting Location/Conditions
This circuit card is mounted in the following slots.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PW
R(PA
-PW
55-A)
PIM
Mounting Module PIM
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 63
Revision 1.0
PA-PW55-APower
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown below.
Figure 2-21 Face Layout of PA-PW55-A Card
-48V SW
FUSE
FUSE
SIDE VIEW
SW4
FRONT VIEW
PA-
PW55
-A
5.0A
0.5A
RGUOUT0.5A125V
AC/DC
+80VOUT5A
125VAC/DC
-48VOUT25A
AC250VDC125V
RST
MB
-48VDC
INPUT
-48VSW
-48VIN
CONN
25A
+80V ON-48V ONRGU ON
DC ONOPE
DC ALMCPU ALM
RGU ALMHOW ALM
UP(
)
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 64Revision 1.0
PA-PW55-APower
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
This circuit card has the following switches.
6. External Interface
No cable connections are required.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
+80V ON Green Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied.
–48 V ON Green Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied.
RGU ON Green Remains lit while RGU output is in progress.
DC ON Green Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally.
OPE Green Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible.
CPUALM Red Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated.
DCALM Red Lights when +5 V, +12 V, or –5 V outputs alarm.
RGUALM Red Lights when RGU voltage alarm.
HOWALM Red Lights when howler alarm.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNo.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGDESCRIPTION
–48 V SWON × –48 V input power is supplied.
OFF –48 V input power is not supplied.
RESETPUSH Hardware reset of the circuit card.
— × Normal setting
MB —ON Make-busy of the circuit card.
OFF × Normal setting
SW4
1ON Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz]
OFF × Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz]
2ON × Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms]
OFF Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 65
Revision 1.0
PA-PW55-APower
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
–48 V
RESET
MB DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
SW420 [Hz]90 [Vrms]
ON1 2
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 66Revision 1.0
PA-PW55-BPower
PA-PW55-BPower
1. General Function
The PA-PW55-B (PWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated in the PIM.The -48V input power source, which is converted to +5V, -5V, and +12V, is distributed to each circuit cardin the associated PIM. This card is also equipped with a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose outputfrequency and voltage can be selected among 20Hz, 25Hz, 75Vrms, 90Vrms by switch setting on this card.In addition, a Howler Tone circuit resides on this card.
Figure 2-22 Location of PA-PW55-B (PWR) Card in the System
Note: The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) .
HOW (For LC)
CR (For LC)
+5V, +12V, -5V
DC-DC
RGU
HOW
SUBPWR
REL
NFB
PA-PW55-B (PWR) PA-PW54-B (DPWR)
-48 V (For LC, TRK)
DC-DC
RGU
HOW
SUBPWR
REL
NFB
-48 V
+80V (Option) Note
+80 V (For MWL)
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 67
Revision 1.0
PA-PW55-BPower
2. Mounting Location/Conditions
This circuit card is mounted in the following slots.
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PW
R(PA
-PW
55-B)
PIM
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 68Revision 1.0
PA-PW55-BPower
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-23.
Figure 2-23 Face Layout of PA-PW55-B Card
-48V SW
FUSE
FUSE
SIDE VIEW
FRONT VIEW
PA-
PW55
-B
5.0A
0.5A
RGUOUT0.5A125V
AC/DC
+80VOUT5A
125VAC/DC
-48VOUT25A
AC250VDC125V
RST
MB
-48VDC
INPUT
-48VSW
-48VIN
CONN
20A
+80V ON-48V ONRGU ON
DC ONOPE
DC ALMCPU ALM
RGU ALMHOW ALM
UP(
)
SW4
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 69
Revision 1.0
PA-PW55-BPower
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
This circuit card has the following switches.
6. External Interface
No cable connections are required.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
+80V ON Green Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied.
–48 V ON Green Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied.
RGU ON Green Remains lit while RGU output is in progress.
DC ON Green Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally.
OPE Green Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible.
CPUALM Red Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated.
DCALM Red Lights in the case of +5 V, +12 V, or –5 V outputs alarm.
RGUALM Red Lights in the case of RGU voltage alarm.
HOWALM Red Lights in the case of howler alarm.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNo.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGDESCRIPTION
–48V SWON × –48V input power is supplied.
OFF –48V input power is not supplied.
RESETPUSH Hardware reset of the circuit card.
— × Normal setting
MB —ON Make busy of the circuit card.
OFF × Normal setting
SW4
1ON Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz]
OFF × Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz]
2ON × Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms]
OFF Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 70Revision 1.0
PA-PW55-BPower
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
–48 V
RESET
MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel
SW420 [Hz]90 [Vrms]
ON1 2
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 71
Revision 1.0
PH-DK10Display Panel Controller
PH-DK10Display Panel Controller
1. General Function
The main functions of the PH-DK10 card are as follows:
(a) to send out the system operating status, alarm and clock information to the Display Panel.
(b) to collect the MJ/MN/SUP alarm information occurs on CMG and each LMG. In addition, by the collected internal alarm information, this card controls the Audible and Visual Alarm Indicating Panel.
(c) to collect the key information on the TOPU of CMG, then output it to EMA.
(d) to send out the Non-Maskable Interruption (NMI) signal from this card on the CMG to each LP. Additionally, this card activates the communication between the processor in each LP and CMP, SP.
This circuit card is used in the IPX-UMG system.
Refer to the next page for the location of this circuit card within the system.
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 72Revision 1.0
PH-DK10Display Panel Controller
Figure 2-24 Location of PH-DK10 (DSPC)
RELAY
RE
CE
IVE
R
EMA
PH-PC43
PH-M22
CMPISEL
PZ-DK222 (TOP KEY)
RE
CE
IVE
R
EMA
PH-PC43
PH-DK10
SP
RE
CE
IVE
REMA
PH-PC43
PH-M22
SEL
AUDIBLEAND
VISUALALARM
INDICATINGPANEL
DISPLAYPANEL(DSPP)
RELAY
LMG
CMG
RE
CE
IVE
R
EMA
PH-PC43
PH-M22
RELAY
LMG
RELAY
KEY INFORMATION
ALM INFORMATION
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 73
Revision 1.0
PH-DK10Display Panel Controller
2. Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card can be mounted in slot No.00 on SP of CMG.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-25.
Figure 2-25 Face Layout of PH-DK10 (DSPC)
SPMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04
DS
PC CPRAS-A
CPRAS-A
OPE/MB
MB
To MMC onLPR (CMP/LP)
To PZ-DK222on the TOPUof CMG
CN7
CN8
CN6
CN5
CN4
CN3
CN2
CN1
CN0
KEY
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 74Revision 1.0
PH-DK10Display Panel Controller
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE/MBGreen Lights when this circuit card is in operation.
Red Lights when this circuit card is in Make Busy state.
SWITCH NAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit Card Make-busy
DOWN × Circuit Card Make-busy cancel
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 75
Revision 1.0
PH-DK10Display Panel Controller
6. External Interface
Figure 2-26 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel
01 02 03 04 0501 02 03 04 05
6-BELL
8-MNA
9-SUPA
10-MJA
33-MNB
34-SUPB
35-MJB
RPT1(G)
RPT0(-48V)
MDF
MJ/MN/BELL
-48V(RPT0)
G(RPT1)
AUDIBLE AND VISUALALARM INDICATING PANEL
MDF MJ
MN
BELL(BASEU)
SP
MISC0AConnector
RPT Terminal on frontof the BASEUREAR VIEW
DSPC (PH-DK10) : Slot No.00
68PH DSPALM CA
Installation Cable
Connected to DSPP
68PH DSPALM CA andInstallation Cable68PH Connector Champ Connector
12345678910
MPALMSUPA1EXTAMNA1BELL0MJA1
SUPB1
MNB1BELL1MJB1
SUPA0MJA0
MNA0 MNB0SUPB0MJB0
1112
262728293031323334353637
26272829303132333435
MPALM
SUPBMJB
MNB MNA
BELL
SUPAMJA
3637
123456789101112
3839404142434445464748
13141516171819202122232425
4950
68PH DSPALM CA
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 76Revision 1.0
PH-DK10Display Panel Controller
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MBON
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 77
Revision 1.0
PH-IO24Input/Output Controller
PH-IO24Input/Output Controller
1. General Function
The PH-IO24 (IOC) circuit card supplies the system with a serial interface, which conforms to RS-232C,between external equipment such as the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT), Station MessageDetail Recording System (SMDR), Message Center Interface (MCI), Property Management System(PMS). The relationship between the IOC card and the associated cards is as follows, when the CPU is indual configuration.
Note: Firmware SP-3290 IO24 LV2 PROG-A is required in the Hotel system for PMS and Hotel Printer.
Figure 2-27 Location of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card in the System
CPU
BOARD
#0
FDD/HDD #0
GT #1 GT #0
MISC
EMA
MISC/IOC
IOC
CPU
I/O
BOARD
#1
MISC I/O BUS
FDD/HDD #1
I/O
(RS-232C) x4 posts for MAT, SMDR, MCI, PMS, PRT
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 78Revision 1.0
PH-IO24Input/Output Controller
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The IOC cards can be placed in the shaded slots (02, 03) as shown below.
Note: Firmware SP-3290 IO24 LV2 PROG-A is required in the Hotel system for PMS and Hotel Printer.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-28.
Figure 2-28 Face Layout of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card
00 01 02 03 04
Mounting Module LPM
IOC
#1
IOC
#0
OPE
IOC ALM
MB
PORT0
SW50
MBR
PORT1
PORT2
PORT3
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 79
Revision 1.0
PH-IO24Input/Output Controller
4. Lamp Indications
The table below shows lamp indications on this circuit card.
5. Switch Settings
The following is a brief description of the switches on this circuit card. When a switch has a standardsetting, it is indicated with “×” in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION
OPE/MB Green This circuit card is operating normally.
Red This circuit card is placed in the Make-busy state.
IOC ALM Red Clock down WDT alarm occurs to the microprocessor.
PORT0 - PORT3 RS-232C signal status indication. n = port number (0-3)
SDn Green SD: Send Data
RDn Green RD: Receive Data
ERn Green ER: Equipment Ready
DRn Green DR: Data Ready
CDn Green CD: Carrier Detect
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGDESCRIPTION
MBUp The circuit card is placed into Make-busy status.
Down × Cancellation of Make-busy.
MBRUp The circuit card is placed into Make-busy request status.
Down × Cancellation of Make-busy Request.
SW50
1ON This circuit card is used as the extended I/O circuit card #1.
OFF This circuit card is used as the extended I/O circuit card #0.
2ON
Not used (For Business System Only).OFF ×
2ON Free Wheeling with ACK signal (For Hotel System Only).
OFF × Free Wheeling.
3ON
Not used.OFF ×
4ON
Not used.OFF ×
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 80Revision 1.0
PH-IO24Input/Output Controller
6. External Interface
As illustrated in Figure 2-29, the 68PH S 2PORTS CA-A cable is required to connect external equipmentsuch as the MAT, SMDR, MCI, and PRT.
Figure 2-29 External Cable Connection for PH-IO24 (IOC)
Securely insert the connector of the 68PH S 2PORTS CA-A into the appropriate MISC connector. Refer to the table listed below.
The relationship between the MISC connectors and the mounting slot of the IOC (PH-IO24) circuit card is shown below.
The type of cables varies depending on a connected terminal and/or whether modems are used or not. More detailed information on the connecting cables is explained in the “Installation Procedure Manual”.
MISC 3B/2B (Note 1)
68PH S 2PORTS CA-A
Backplane
PH-IO24(IOC)
Circuit #0
Circuit #1
Circuit #2
Circuit #3
RS-232C cable (Note 2)
68PH S 2PORTS CA-A
MISC 3A/2A (Note 1)
17161514131211
ST2
10ST1
09RT
08PB/CI
07ER
06CD
05SG
04 CS03 RS02 RD01 SDPin Signal name
4241403938373635343332313029282726Pin Signal name
TYP0, 1 Connector A
MP
AM
P
TY
P0
TY
P1
TY
P1
TY
P0
To RS-232CTerminal
DR
TYP0, 1 Lead Accommodation
Note 1:
Note 2:
Mounting Slot
02
03
IOC Circuit Number
#0, #1
#2, #3
#0, #1
#2, #3
MISC 2B
MISC 2A
MISC 3B
MISC 3A
MISC Connector
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 81
Revision 1.0
PH-IO24Input/Output Controller
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCHNAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MB
MBR
SW50
Meaning of SW50-1:
ON: This card is used as the No. 1 circuit card.OFF: This card is used as the No. 0 circuit card.
1
ON
2 3 4
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 82Revision 1.0
PH-M22MMC
PH-M22MMC
1. General Function
The main functions of the PH-M22 circuit card are as follows:
• to collect key setting information on the TOPU of the ISW and send the information to the ISW/theother LNs, depending on the ISEL key setting on the ISW. (for IPX-U system)
• to collect various alarm information from all the IMGs/ISW and activate MJ/MN LED on the TOPUdisplay. (for IPX-U system)
• to send out the key information to EMA within the same LMG (for IPX-UMG system)
• to collect the external MJ/MN alarm information output by EMA in each LMG (for IPX-UMG system)
This circuit card is used for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.
Figure 2-30 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-U System
PZ-DK222 (TOP KEY)
PH-PC40PH-M22
EMA
RELAY
RE
CE
IVE
R
PZ-DK222 (TOP KEY)
PH-PC40PH-M22
EMA
RELAY
RE
CE
IVE
R
PZ-DK227 (TOP KEY)
PH-PC40PH-M22
EMA
RELAYR
EC
EIV
ER
ISEL
ISW
LN
LN
AUDIBLEAND
VISUALALARM
INDICATINGPANEL
KEY INFORMATIONALM INFORMATION
SEL
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 83
Revision 1.0
PH-M22MMC
Figure 2-31 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-UMG System
RELAY
RE
CE
IVE
R
EMA
PH-PC43
PH-M22
CMPISEL
PZ-DK222 (TOP KEY)
RE
CE
IVE
R
EMA
PH-PC43
PH-DK10
SP
RE
CE
IVE
REMA
PH-PC43
PH-M22
SEL
AUDIBLEAND
VISUALALARM
INDICATINGPANEL
DISPLAYPANEL(DSPP)
RELAY
LMG
CMG
RE
CE
IVE
R
EMA
PH-PC43
PH-M22
RELAY
LMG
RELAY
KEY INFORMATION
ALM INFORMATION
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 84Revision 1.0
PH-M22MMC
2. Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-32.
Figure 2-32 Face Layout of PH-M22 (MMC)
00 01 02 03 04
LPM/CMP/LPMounting Module
MM
C
CPRAQ-A/CPRAS-A
CPRAQ-A/CPRAS-A
OPE
MB
CN7
CN6
CN5
CN4
CN3
CN2
CN1
CN0
KEY
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 85
Revision 1.0
PH-M22MMC
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Lights when this circuit card is in operation.
SWITCH NAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit Card Make-busy
DOWN × Circuit Card Make-busy cancel
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 86Revision 1.0
PH-M22MMC
6. External Interface
Figure 2-33 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel
Note: External connection for Alarm Indicator is not used in IPX-UMG system.
01 02 03 04 0501 02 03 04 05
123456789101112
MPALM
EXTAA
BELAA-MNAASUPAAMJAA
262728293031323334353637
MNBASUPBAMJBA
BELAA
MNAA
SUPAA
MJAA
MNBA
SUPBA
MJBA
RPT1(G)
RPT0(-48V)
MDF
MJ/MN/BELL
-48V(RPT0)
G(RPT1)
AUDIBLE AND VISUALALARM INDICATING PANEL
MDF MJ
MN
BELL(BASEU)
LPM
MISC0AConnector
RPT Terminal on frontof the BASEUREAR VIEW
MMC (PH-M22) : Slot No.00
68PH EXMISC CA
68PH EXMISC CA andInstallation Cable68PH EXMISC CA
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 87
Revision 1.0
PH-M22MMC
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MB Note: Normal operating mode is down.ON
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 88Revision 1.0
PH-M16Line Test
PH-M16Line Test
1. General Function
This circuit card controlled by CPU is used for line test of a subscriber’s line. The circuit card supportssending Howler Tone to external test equipment, besides the circuit card can detect or send various tones,and send PB (DTMF) signal for automatic trunk test.
Note: A system cannot send Howler Tone during line test. The number of available lines within the line test/automatic trunk test at the same time is only one.
Figure 2-34 Location of PH-M16 (LTST) Card Within the System
LC
LC
INT
TSW
TEL
TEL
PIMLPRA
LTSTTESTEQ GT
EXGT
CPU
EXTENDED I/O BUS
EXTENDED I/O BUS
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 89
Revision 1.0
PH-M16Line Test
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The LTST circuit card can be accommodated in the shaded slots (00, 01, 02) as shown below:
Note: IPX: Slot 00, Slot 01, Slot 02.IPX-U: Slot 01, Slot 02 (Considering PH-M22 MMC)
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-35.
Figure 2-35 Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card
Note: CRIN is used to connect with CRIN test equipment.
LPMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04
PH
-M16
PH
-M16
PH
-M16
MB
OPE/MB
SW0
CRIN
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 90Revision 1.0
PH-M16Line Test
4. Lamp Indications
5. Switch Settings
LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION
OPE/MBGreen This circuit card is operating in normal mode.
Red This circuit card is Make-busy.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit card Make-busy
DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel
SW0
1 ON × Setting of a condition of DT detection(440Hz+350Hz)
2 ON × Setting of a condition of RBT detection(440Hz+480Hz)
3ON Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (67 msec.)
OFF × Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (133 msec.)
4
ONSetting of M-wire control which is concerned withsending test tone of ODT(Set soft control or E-wire loop-back)
OFFSetting of M-wire control which is concerned withsending test tone of ODT(Set soft control only)
5
6
7
8
BASIC INTERVAL TIMER
SW0
5 6 7 8 TIME
ON OFF OFF OFF 8µ
ON ON OFF OFF 16µ
ON ON ON OFF 32µ
ON ON ON ON 64µ
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 91
Revision 1.0
PH-M16Line Test
6. External Interface
Figure 2-36 LT Connector Lead Accommodation
00 01 02 03 04
PH
-M16
PH
-M16
PH
-M16
Circuit Card Backboard Connector
Connector Name
Slot Number
LPM
LPM Backboard
MISC Circuit Card Backboard Connector
MISC CONNECTOR
68PH EXMISC CABLE
MISC Connector Accommodation
26272829303132333435363738394041424344454647484950
123456789
10111213141516171819202122232425
TE
TELBLCBTHOWBTHOWS
INB
TM
TELALCATHOWAONHK
INA
SE TCRATMATAATBOUTAOUTBTA1TB1
MISC CONNECTOR
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 92Revision 1.0
PH-M16Line Test
Figure 2-36 Connecting Route Diagram
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MB
SW0
OUTAOUTA
TE
INAINBTA1TB1
TM
RARB
M
TATB
E
BA
LTST
TLT
LC
PBX MDP
ON (MB)
OFF
1ON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 93
Revision 1.0
PH-PC36Multiplexer
PH-PC36Multiplexer
1. General Function
The PH-PC36 (MUX) circuit card is an interface card for mounting line circuits and/or trunks. In betweenthe CPR and the Port Microprocessor (PM) of the line/trunk circuit, this circuit card provides an interfacefor PM control and management by the CPU. Likewise in between the TSW and the line circuit/trunks, thiscircuit card provides an interface for multiplexing/de-multiplexing of voice Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)information and digital data information.
Figure 2-37 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 1 IMG System
MUX
MUX
MUX
CPRGT
LC/TRK
PM
LC/TRK
PM
LC/TRK
PM
LC/TRK
PM
MUX
TSW/INT/PLO
PCM HWPM BUS
PM BUS
PM BUS
PM BUS
PCM HW
PCM HW
PCM HW
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 94Revision 1.0
PH-PC36Multiplexer
Figure 2-38 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 4 IMG System
TDSW13
TDSW03
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM
IMG 3
TDSW12
TDSW02
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM
IMG 2
TDSW11
TDSW01
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM
IMG 1
TDSW10
TDSW00
MUX
MUX
MUX
MUX
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM
Line/Trunk PM
IMG 0
GT 1
GT 0
CPR 1ISAGT
CPR 0ISAGT
DLKC 1
DLKC 0
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 95
Revision 1.0
PH-PC36Multiplexer
Figure 2-39 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the IPX-U/IPX-UMG System
MUX00
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
DLKC0
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
MUX01
MUX02
MUX03
MUX10
MUX11
MUX12
MUX13
TSW00TSW10
TSW01TSW11
TSW02TSW12
TSW03TSW13
PLO 0
PLO 0
DLKC1
PLO 1
PLO 1
MUXMUX
TSW00
TSW01
TSW02
TSW03
HSW00
HSW01
HSW10
HSW11
TSW10
TSW11
TSW12
TSW13
LN/LMG
ISWM
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 96Revision 1.0
PH-PC36Multiplexer
The PCM highway running is illustrated in Figure 2-40. There are sixteen 2 Mbps PCM highways (HW0 -HW15) in the PIM. Each PCM highway runs from a card slot to the MUX circuit card. For instance,highway number zero (HW0) appears in Slot 04 and also Slot 05, thus the HW0 carries the PCM of theGroup number 0, 1, 2 and 3.
Likewise, the HW6, 7, 14, 15 cover the group numbers 24 through 31. However, the time slots of Groupnumber 24 and 25 are exclusively used for the Speech Path Memory (SPM).
All highways in the PIM lead to a MUX card, so 512 time slots (32 time slots per highway × 16 highways= 512 time slots) of PCM are multiplexed/de-multiplexed at a MUX and sent/received to/from the TSWcircuit card across the 32.786 Mbps of the Low Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS).
Also the MUX card provides the PM bus interface. The CPR controls and administrates the PM of the line/trunk circuit card via the TSW and the MUX.
In addition, this circuit card supports 3-Party Conference (CFT) function and is equipped with eight circuitsof 3-Party Conference. The CFT appear in Time Slots 8 through 31 of the HW13 (Group 21 - 23).
Figure 2-40 PCM Highway Running
MU
X#1
MU
X#0
HW6
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PW
R
PW
R
01
23
45
67
89
1011
1213
1415
1617
1819
2021
2223
01
23
45
67
89
1011
1213
1415
1617
1819
2021
2223
(24)
(25)
2627
2829 31
30 2627
2829
3031
HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3HW4
HW5
HW8 HW9 HW10 HW12
HW7 HW14 HW15
Slot number of the PIM U-A
Group (G) number of the LENS8 circuits of CFTs
Group 24 and 25 are usedfor the SPM 2 Mbps (32 time slots) of PCM highway
HW13HW11
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 97
Revision 1.0
PH-PC36Multiplexer
2. Mounting Location/Condition
For the 1 IMG system, the PH-PC36 (MUX) card is mounted in the PIM 1, 2, and 3.
For the 4 IMG system, the PH-PC36 (MUX) card is required in all PIMs.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-41.
Figure 2-41 Face Layout of PH-PC36 (MUX)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PIM
Mounting Module PIM
MU
X #0
MU
X #1
4321SW01
OFFON
MUXACT
MB
SYNCRCLK ALMPMCLK ALMCFT OPE
MUX
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 98Revision 1.0
PH-PC36Multiplexer
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
MUX ACT Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state.
SYNC GreenLights when 32 Mbps Frame Head (FH) synchronization is established between the MUX and TSW.
RCLK ALM Red Lights when the 32 Mbps clock signals (which is supplied by TSW) loss has occurred.
PMCLK ALM Red
Lights when either the following clock signals output failure has occurred.
• 2 Mbps clock signals (which supplies to the line/trunks)
• Frame Head signal
• 4 Mbps clock signals
CFT OPE Green Lights when the CFT circuit is valid.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit card Make-busy.
DOWN × Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
SW01
1ON 3-Party Conference Function (CFT) is valid.
OFF 3-Party Conference Function (CFT) is invalid.
2ON Setting of A-Law in the CFT function block.
OFF × Setting µ-Law in the CFT function block.
3 OFF × Not used.
4 OFF × Not used.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 99
Revision 1.0
PH-PC36Multiplexer
6. External Interface
For the 1 IMG system, the cable connections between the MUX and the TSW are illustrated in Figure 2-42.
Figure 2-42 External Interface for PH-PC36
TSW#0
MUX#0
MUX#0
MUX#1
MUX#1
MUX#1
MUX#0
TSW#1
MT24 TSW CA-180
MT24 TSW CA-140
MT24 TSW CA-90
PIM 3
PIM 2
PIM 1
PIM 0
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 100Revision 1.0
PH-PC36Multiplexer
The cable connections between the MUX and the TSW are illustrated in Figure 2-43. As seen in this illustration,the cable connected to the front of the MUX leads to the “MUX###” connector on the Back Wired Board (BWB)of the TSWM. See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual for more details.
Figure 2-43 Cable Connections between the MUX and the TSW
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PH
-PC
36(MU
X)
PIM 3
PIM 2
PIM 1
PIM 0
Dummy
IMG3
PIM 3
PIM 2
PIM 1
PIM 0
Dummy/APM
IMG2
PIM 3
PIM 2
PIM 1
PIM 0
TSWM
IMG1
PIM 3
PIM 2
PIM 1
PIM 0
LPM
IMG0
PIM
BWB of TSWM
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 101
Revision 1.0
PH-PC36Multiplexer
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MB
SW01
ON
1ON
2 3 4
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 102Revision 1.0
PH-PC20Data Link Controller
PH-PC20Data Link Controller
1. General Function
This circuit card simultaneously provides all Attendant Consoles (ATTs) in the system (except the 1-IMGsystem) with information such as the termination/answer/release (abandoned) information of ATT calls, orthe station idle/busy information through the TSW system link.
Figure 2-44 Location of PC-PH20 in the System
Note: MG = 01/03/05/07, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 6-7 are used to input the information into TSW by theDLKC.
2. Mounting Location/Conditions
DLKC0 DLKC1
GT1
ISAGT1ISAGT0
CPU0 CPU1
GT0
ATTCON
ATTCON
TSW
ISA BUS
MISC I/O BUS
Note
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Mounting Module TSWM
DLK
C#0
DLK
C#1
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 103
Revision 1.0
PH-PC20Data Link Controller
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-45.
Figure 2-45 Face Layout of the PC-PH20 Card
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
6. External Interface
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE/MB
Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state.
RedRemains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state or when the firmware is abnormal.
PWR ALM Red Lights when the On-Board Power Supply located on this circuit card is abnormal.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit card Make-busy.
DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
OPE/MB
PWR ALM
MB
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 104Revision 1.0
PH-PC20Data Link Controller
No cable connections are required.
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MBON
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 105
Revision 1.0
PH-PC45Emergency Alarm Controller
PH-PC45Emergency Alarm Controller
1. General Function
The PH-PC45 (EMA) circuit card detects various kinds of alarms which might occur in the system, andsends out information about the detected alarm to the circuits concerned. This circuit card can activate thesystem MJ/MN LEDs on the TOPU. Additionally, this card can control the active/stand-by status of theCPU in the case of dual configuration. For the 1 IMG system, this circuit card has the Music-On-Holdsending function, too.
Figure 2-46 Location of PH-PC45 (EMA) Card in the System
DSP
CPU
CPR #0
EMA
IOC
MISC
GT
DSP
CPU
CPR #1
GT
I/O Local Bus I/O Local Bus
MISC Bus # 0 MISC Bus # 1
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 106Revision 1.0
PH-PC45Emergency Alarm Controller
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PH-PC45 (EMA) card is mounted in Slot 04 of the LPM, as shown below.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-47.
Figure 2-47 Face Layout of the PH-PC45 (EMA) Card
Mounting Module LPM
LPM
PH
-IO24 (IO
C)
PH
-PC
40 (EM
A)
00 01 02 03 04
OPE/MB
MB
ACT1CKERR1ACT0
EMASUP
EMASUP
CPU SEL
NMI SEL
CKERR0
SW65
SW62
SW73
SW70
SW92
SW A0
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 107
Revision 1.0
PH-PC45Emergency Alarm Controller
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
Note: Set CPUSEL switch downward, if a single CPU system.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE/MBGreen Indicates the circuit card is operating normally.
Red Indicates the circuit card is in a Make-busy state.
ACT1 Green CPU #1 is in the ACT state.
CKERR 1 Red CPU #1 clock failure has occurred.
ACT0 Green CPU #0 is in the ACT state.
CKERR 0 Red CPU #0 clock failure has occurred.
EMSUPGreen Disable the CPU change-over. (When EMSUP key is set upward .)
OFF Enable to the CPU change-over.
SWITCH NAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Make-busy of the circuit card.
DOWN Normal setting.
EMASUPUP Make-busy of the CPU change-over circuit.
DOWN × Normal setting.
CPUSEL
UP Forced activating the CPU #1.
MIDDLE × Denial of the forced CPU selection. Note
DOWN Forced activating the CPU #0.
NMISELUP
Outputs the Non-Maskable Interruption (NMI) signal to the CPU when a fault occurs.
DOWN × Outputs the RST (Reset) signal to the CPU when a fault occurs.
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 108Revision 1.0
PH-PC45Emergency Alarm Controller
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW62
1ON Power Shut Down (PSDN) function
(used in Australia only)OFF ×
2ON
OFF ×
3ON
OFF ×
4ON
OFF ×
SW65
1ON × Output the CPU-ACT Signal to the another EMA (when this
circuit card is used in the one frame stack configuration).
OFF CPU-ACT Signal does not output.
2ON Not used.
OFF × Not used.
3ON Dual CPU configuration.
OFF Single CPU configuration.
4ON × PZ-DK223 (or PZ-DK173) is used for the DSPP on the
TOPU.
OFF PZ-DK179 is used for the DSPP on the TOPU.
SW70
1ON External music on hold source (FM lead) is used.
OFF Internal music on hold source IC is used.
2ON
Output the alarm information for the external indicator (used in Australia only).
OFF × Alarm information does not output.
SW73
1ON × Power Failure Transfer (PFT) control is valid.
OFF PFT control is invalid.
2ON × µ-law PCM CODEC is applied for the music.
OFF A-law PCM CODEC is applied for the music.
SW62 ON OFF
SW62-1 IMG#0 valid IMG0# invalid
SW62-2 IMG#1 valid IMG1# invalid
SW62-3 IMG#2 valid IMG2# invalid
SW62-4 IMG#3 valid IMG3# invalid
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 109
Revision 1.0
PH-PC45Emergency Alarm Controller
Note: SW92 and SWA0 are used in the 1 IMG system only.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW92Note
1
2
3
4
SWA0Note
1MUSIC CH0 selection. This selection is valid when SW70-1 is OFF.
2
3
4ON Not used
OFF × Not used
5
MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card.
6
7
8ON Not used
OFF × Not used
SW92-1 SW92-2 Impedance of the External Music Source 0 (FM 0)
OFF OFF 600 Ω
ON OFF 8.2 Ω
OFF ON 47K Ω
SW92-1 SW92-2 Impedance of the External Music Source 1 (FM 1)
OFF OFF 600 Ω
ON OFF 8.2 Ω
OFF ON 47K Ω
SWA0-1 SWA0-2 SWA0-3 MUSIC
OFF OFF OFF Für Elise
ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer
Don’t care OFF ON Buzzer
Don’t care ON OFF Chime
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 110Revision 1.0
PH-PC45Emergency Alarm Controller
6. External Interface
External equipment may be connected to this circuit card. The physical connection diagram for the externalequipment for Music-On-Hold and External Alarm is shown in Figure 2-48.
Figure 2-48 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel and Music on Hold
01 02 03 04 0501 02 03 04 05
262728293031323334
EE-MJBMNA-
123456789
FM0FM1MPALMMJAMNABELL
50 EXTA EXTB25
16PH EXALM CA FM0
E
MJA
MNA
BELL
MJB
MNB
RPT1(G)
RPT0(-48V)
CABLING DIAGRAM
CROSS CONNECTION
MDFEXTERNAL
MUSICSOURCE
MJ/MN/BELL
-48V(RPT0)
G(RPT1)
AUDIBLE AND VISUALALARM INDICATING PANEL
MDF MJ
MN
BELL
EALM ConnectorEMA
(Slot No.04)
16PH EXALM CA
(BASEU)
LPMInstallationCable
RPT Terminal on frontof the BASEUREAR VIEW
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 111
Revision 1.0
PH-PC45Emergency Alarm Controller
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MB
EMA-SUP
CPU-SEL
NMI-SEL
SWA0
SW62
SW65
SW70
SW73
SW92
ON
ON
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 ON
1 2 3 4 ON
1 2 ON
1 2 ON
1 2 3 4 ON
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 112Revision 1.0
PH-PW14Power Switch
PH-PW14Power Switch
1. General Function
This circuit card is a power supply card that supplies DC -48 V operating power to the circuit cards mountedin the TSWM. It also provides the DC-DC converter function which generates output power DC +5 V, -5V, and +12 V to MISC slots.
The two PWR SWs cards make the power supply redundant.
Figure 2-49 -48 V Output Circuit Diagram
Con-troller
Con-troller
DC-DC
DC-DC
Load
Load
-48V
-48V INSwitch
FUSE FUSEPWR SW #0FET Switch
PWR SW #1
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 113
Revision 1.0
PH-PW14Power Switch
2. Mounting Location/Conditions
This circuit card is mounted in the following shaded slots (00, 01).
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors for this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-50.
Figure 2-50 Face Layout of the PH-PW14 Card
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Mounting Module TSWM/ISWM
PW
R S
W#0
PW
R S
W#1
P-ONALM
SW
-48V in Fuse(125V AC/DC 15A)
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 114Revision 1.0
PH-PW14Power Switch
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings for various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
6. External Interface
No cable connections are required.
7. Switch Setting Sheet
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
P-ON Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
ALM Red Lights when SW switch is set at OFF position or it is faulty.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SWON × The card supplies the operating power to various circuit
cards.
OFF
MODULE SLOT NO.SWITCHNAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
0001
SW-48 V operating power is supplied to vari-ous circuit cards.
ON
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 115
Revision 1.0
PH-SW10Time Division Switch
PH-SW10Time Division Switch
1. General Function
This circuit card combines the Time Division Switch (TSW) with INT, PLO, MUX, and CFT.
The TSW capacity is 2048×2048 time slots, and it allows non-block switching for the maximum IPXconfiguration. The INT is an intermediate circuit of the CPR which controls and administrates the PortMicroprocessor (PM) of line/trunk circuit cards via the PM BUS.
Figure 2-51 Location of PH-SW10 (TSW) Card in the System
[Connection diagram of the TSW]
MUX
MUX
MUX
CPR
GT
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
MUX
TSW/INT/PLO
PCM HWPM BUS
PM BUS
PM BUS
PM BUS
PCM HW
PCM HW
PCM HW
[Function block diagram]
PLO
MUX
LVDS
CFT
From EMA
TSW
INT
MUSIC
DTG
DTI DCS
MUX
LC/TRK
PH-SW10
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 116Revision 1.0
PH-SW10Time Division Switch
Figure 2-52 shows the clock signal routing around the Phase Locked Oscillator (PLO).
Figure 2-52 PLO Function Diagram
When the system operates as the clock source office of the digital network, the OSC (PA-CK14) card is required,and the OSC supplies the high-precision clock signals (±0.3 ppm deviation) for the base clock of the PLO. Whenthe system operates as the clock subordinate office, the TSW internal oscillator (±5 ppm deviation) can be thebase clock of the PLO. The source clock of the subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or thedigital interface clock (DIU0 - DIU3). When the clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses anotherclock source automatically in the order of:
1. DCS0
2. DCS1
3. DIU0
4. DIU1
5. DIU2
6. DIU3
7. Drifting with the TSW internal oscillator
TSW#1 (PH-SW10)
TSW#0 (PH-SW10)
TSW
TSWPLO
PLO
OSC#1 (PA-CK14)
OSC#0 (PA-CK14)
DCS 0 DCS 1
DCS 1
DCS 0DIU 0DIU 1DIU 2DIU 3
Multiple connection on MDF
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 117
Revision 1.0
PH-SW10Time Division Switch
The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows:
• 32.768 MHz CLK
• 8 KHz FH
• 5 msec × “n” FH (for wireless module).
The MUX performs multiplexing/de-multiplexing of the 2 Mbps PCM highways running in PIM 0, and itsends/receives the PCM to/from the TSW, and operates like the MUX card of PIM 1/2/3.
This circuit card includes the Digital Tone Generator (DTG) and hold tone (MUSIC) insertion circuit. TheTONE ROM located on this circuit card contains the audible tone, and the hold tone is supplied from theEMA card. In addition, the designated time slot of PCM (Speech Path Memory: SPM) can be inserted as atone/music voice prompt. (For example, you can join the SPM and a DAT port by the nailed downconnection, and the DAT's voice prompt is given to the system instead of ordinary tone/music.)
Additionally, this circuit card supports the CFT (3-Party Conference) function and is equipped with eightcircuits of 3-Party Conference Trunk.
Figure 2-53 Voice Prompting
[Voice Prompt sending for Tone] [Voice Prompt sending for Music]
Speech Path MemorySpeech Path Memory
TONE ROM MUSIC from EMA
Tone source selected by office data Music source selected by office data
[Time Slot for Speech Path Memory]
[SPM for music channel 16-29]
MG=01, Unit=2, Group=24, Level=0-7
MG=01, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=0-5
[SPM for music channel 0-15]
MG=01, Unit=0, Group=24, Level=0-7
MG=01, Unit=0, Group=25, Level=0-7
[SPM for Tone channel 16-31]
MG=00, Unit=2, Group=24, Level=0-7
MG=00, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=0-7
[SPM for Tone channel 0-15]
MG=00, Unit=0, Group=24, Level=0-7
MG=00, Unit=0, Group=25, Level=0-7
PIM 3
PIM 2
PIM 1
PIM0
Tone Music
Note
Note: MG=01, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=6-7 are not used.
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 118Revision 1.0
PH-SW10Time Division Switch
2. Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card is mounted in PIM number zero (0) of the slot shown below.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown in Figure 2-54.
Figure 2-54 Face Layout of PH-SW10 (TSW)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Mounting Module PIM
PIM0
TS
W #1
TS
W #0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW11
TSWACT
MUXACT
PLOACT
MB
TSWMBR
PLOMB
M3SYM2SYM1SYM0SY
CFT
SYNCICKECK
SW03
SW04
MUX3
MUX2
MUX1
PMCA
PMJPMN
SW12
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 119
Revision 1.0
PH-SW10Time Division Switch
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
TSWACT
Green Remains lit while the TSW block is in ACT state.
Red Remains lit while the TSW block is in Make-busy state.
Off Remains off while the TSW block is ST-BY side.
MUXACT Green Remains lit while MUX block is in ACT state.
PLOACT Green Remains lit while PLO block is in ACT state.
M3SY Green Lights when MUX #3 synchronization has been established.
M2SY Green Lights when MUX #2 synchronization has been established.
M1SY Green Lights when MUX #1 synchronization has been established.
M0SY Green Lights when MUX #0 synchronization has been established.
PMCA Red Lights when the PM/PCM bus clock FH failure has occurred.
CFT Green Lights when the CFT circuit is valid.
PMJ Red
Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:
• All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office
• 32.768 MHz output clock failure
• 8 KHz output FH failure
• 5 msec × “n” output FH failure
• Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card)
• Both internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) and high-precision clock signals (±0.3 ppm deviation) have failed when the system operates as the clock source office
PMN Yellow
Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:
• One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed
• Drifting failure
• Internal OSC (±5 ppm) failure
• High-precision clock signals (±0.3 ppm) failure
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 120Revision 1.0
PH-SW10Time Division Switch
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SYNC
Green Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.
OFF
Remains off when any of the following have occurred.
• DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS.
• DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI.
• Drifting failure
ICK Green
Lights when the TSW (PA-SW10) internal oscillator is operating normally.
Note 1: The ICK LED will illuminate even when the internal PLO circuit isoperational.
ECK Green
Lights when the high-precision clock signals are received from OSC circuit card (PA-CK14).
Note 2: The ICK LED will not illuminate when the PA-CK14 is operational.
SWITCH NAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit card Make-busy.
DOWN × Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
TSWMBRUP TSW Make-busy request.
DOWN × TSW Make-busy request cancel.
PLOMBRUP PLO Make-busy request.
DOWN × PLO Make-busy request cancel.
SW12 1-F 1 Fixed to “1.”
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 121
Revision 1.0
PH-SW10Time Division Switch
Note: When MUX card mode (SW03-4 ON), only MUX and CFT functions are valid. MUX 1 is used for a con-nection to TSW (Don’t use MUX 2, 3). The LED of MUXACT, M0SY, CFT, and PMCA are valid, other LEDis not lit. In this mode, only SW03 is valid.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW03
1ON 3-Party Conference Trunk (CFT) is valid.
OFF 3-Party Conference Trunk (CFT) is invalid.
2ON Setting of A-law in the CFT function block.
OFF × Setting of µ-law in the CFT function block.
3 OFF × Fixed.
4
ONOnly MUX function is valid (If this card is mounted in PIM 1/2/3). Note
OFF × TSW/INT/PLO/MUX are valid (When this card is mounted in PIM 0).
SW04
1ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.
OFF DIU 0 is not used.
2ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.
OFF DIU 1 is not used.
3ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.
OFF DIU 2 is not used.
4ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.
OFF DIU 3 is not used.
5ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 0
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 0
6ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 1
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 1
7ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 2
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 2
8ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 3
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 3
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 122Revision 1.0
PH-SW10Time Division Switch
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW11
1ON PLO operates as the clock subordinate office.
OFF PLO operates as the clock source office.
2ON Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.
OFF Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.
3ON Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.
OFF Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.
4
ON8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
OFF8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
5
ONWhen clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.
OFFWhen clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock.
6ON
This card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and 5 m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card.
OFF This card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card.
7ON (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FE”)
OFF × (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FF”)
8 OFF × Not used
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 123
Revision 1.0
PH-SW10Time Division Switch
6. External Interface
When this circuit card is used in “clock subordinate office,” clock signals from DTI, CCT, PRT must beextracted. See Figure 2-56 for more information. When this circuit card is used in “clock source office,”cable connections are not necessary.
Figure 2-55 PLO Connector Leads Location
26272829303132333435363738394041424344454647484950
123456789
10111213141516171819202122232425
DCSB0DIU0B0DIU1B0DIU2B0DIU3B0SYN0B0SYN1B0
DCSB1DIU0B1DIU1B1DIU2B1DIU3B1SYN0B1SYN1B1
DCSA0DIU0A0DIU1A0DIU2A0DIU3A0SYN0A0SYN1A0
DCSA1DIU0A1DIU1A1DIU2A1DIU3A1SYN0A1SYN1A1
Mounting Module PIM
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 124Revision 1.0
PH-SW10Time Division Switch
Figure 2-56 Connecting Route Diagram
DCS
TSW #1
TSW #0
/PRTCCT/DTI
CCT/DTI/PRT
CCT/DTI/PRT
CCT/DTI/PRT
POUT A
POUT B
POUT APOUT B
POUT A
POUT B
POUT A
POUT B
DCSA0DCSB0DIU0A0DIU0B0DIU1A0DIU1B0DIU2A0
DIU2B0DIU3A0
DCSA1DCSB1DIU0A1DIU0B1DIU1A1DIU1B1DIU2A1DIU2B1DIU3A1DIU3B1
PBX MDF
Note: The following circuit cards have Clock Output leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA30CCTB),DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (A-24PRT, PA-PRTC).
DIU3B0
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 125
Revision 1.0
PH-SW10Time Division Switch
The front cable connections are shown in Figure 2-57.
Figure 2-57 Front Cable Connections for PH-SW10
TSW#0
MUX#0
MUX#0
MUX#1
MUX#1
MUX#1
MUX#0
TSW#1
MT24 TSW CA-180
MT24 TSW CA-140
MT24 TSW CA-90
PIM 3
PIM 2
PIM 1
PIM 0
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 126Revision 1.0
PH-SW10Time Division Switch
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MB
TSWMBR
PLOMB
SW03
SW04
SW11
SW12
ON
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 ON
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 127
Revision 1.0
PH-SW12Time Division Switch
PH-SW12Time Division Switch
1. General Function
This circuit card provides the Time Division Switch (TSW) and INT function for the system. Each TSWcard is capable of 8192 × 2048 Time Slot (TS) switching for an Interface Module Group (IMG). Four cardsallow 8192 × 8192 TS switching for the 4 IMG configuration.
The INT is an intermediate circuit of the CPR which controls and administers the Port Microprocessor(PM) for line/trunk circuit cards.
Figure 2-58 TSW Configuration
TSW(8Kx2K)
TSW(8Kx2K)
TSW(8Kx2K)
TSW(8Kx2K)
IMG0
IMG0
IMG1
IMG1
IMG2
IMG2
IMG3
IMG3
[TSW configuration]
[INT configuration]
CPU1(LP) ISAGT1 GT1
CPU0(LP) ISAGT0 GT0
TSW1(INT)
TSW0(INT)
MUX01
MUX30
MUX31
MUX00 LC/TRK(PM)
LC/TRK(PM)
ISA BUS I/O BUS
ISA BUS I/O BUS
System #1
System #0
ACT
STBY
STBY
STBY
STBY
ACT ACT
ACT
PM BUS
PM BUS
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 128Revision 1.0
PH-SW12Time Division Switch
The TONE ROM located on this circuit card contains the audible tones, such as Dial Tone, Busy Tone, RingBack Tone, etc. The music on hold source, either the MUSIC ROM or the external source via FM lead, islocated on the PLO card. The tone and the music are inserted into their time slot at this circuit card.Additionally, this circuit card provides the Voice Prompt function that inserts the designated time slot ofPCM (Speech Path Memory : SPM) into the tone or music time slot.
Figure 2-59 Music/Tone Insertion
SEL
SEL
SEL
Speech Path Memoryfor Music/Tone
Music/Tone
MUSIC ROM
TDSW00
PLO#0
TONE ROM
SEL
SEL
SEL
Speech Path Memoryfor Music/Tone
Music/Tone
MUSIC ROM
TDSW1
PLO#1
TONE ROM
FM
FM
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 129
Revision 1.0
PH-SW12Time Division Switch
Figure 2-60 Speech Path Memory (SPM) for Voice Prompt Function
2. Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below. The IPX-U system accommodates twoTSWMs (TSWM0/1).
PIM 3
[SPM for music channel 16-29]
MG = 01, Unit = 2, Group = 24, Level = 0-7
MG = 01, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 0-5
PIM 2
[SPM for music channel 0-15]
MG = 01, Unit = 0, Group = 24, Level = 0-7
MG = 01, Unit = 0, Group = 25, Level = 0-7
PIM 1
[SPM for tone channel 16-31]
MG = 00, Unit = 2, Group = 24, Level = 0-7
MG = 00, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 0-7
PIM0
[SPM for tone channel 0-15]
MG = 00, Unit = 0, Group = 24, Level = 0-7
MG = 00, Unit = 0, Group = 25, Level = 0-7
Note :
Note
MG = 01,Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 6-7 are exclusively used by the DLKC.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Mounting Module TSWM
TS
W 00
TS
W 01
TS
W 02
TS
W 03
TS
W 10
TS
W 11
TS
W 12
TS
W 13
TSWM
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 130Revision 1.0
PH-SW12Time Division Switch
The definitions for the TSW00 - TSW03/TSW10 - TSW13 are listed below.
• 4-IMG System
• IPX-U system
This card is mounted in the TSWM0/1 for the IPX-U system.
• For the card in TSWM0
SYMBOL SYSTEM CONTROLLED IMG
TSW00
0
IMG 0
TSW01 IMG 1
TSW02 IMG 2
TSW03 IMG 3
TSW10
1
IMG 0
TSW11 IMG 1
TSW12 IMG 2
TSW13 IMG 3
SYMBOL SYSTEM FUNCTION CONTROLLED IMG
TSW00
0
Collects the PCM dataIMG 0
TSW01 IMG 1
TSW02Sends the PCM data to the ISW
IMG 0
TSW03 IMG 1
TSW10
1
Collects the PCM dataIMG 0
TSW11 IMG 1
TSW12Sends the PCM data to the ISW
IMG 0
TSW13 IMG 1
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 131
Revision 1.0
PH-SW12Time Division Switch
• For the card in TSWM1
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-61.
Figure 2-61 Face Layout of PH-SW12 (TSW)
SYMBOL SYSTEM FUNCTION CONTROLLED IMG
TSW00
0
Collects the PCM dataIMG 2
TSW01 IMG 3
TSW02Sends the PCM data to the ISW
IMG 2
TSW03 IMG 3
TSW10
1
Collects the PCM dataIMG 2
TSW11 IMG 3
TSW12Sends the PCM data to the ISW
IMG 2
TSW13 IMG 3
MB
TSWMBR
TSWACT
M3SYM2SY M1SYM0SY
PLO 1PLO 0
TONE
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 132Revision 1.0
PH-SW12Time Division Switch
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
6. External Interface
See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual for information about the cable connection to MUX.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
TSWACT
Green Remains lit while the TSW block is in ACT state.
Red Remains lit while the TSW block is in Make-busy state.
Off Remains off while the TSW block is ST-BY side.
M3SY Green Lights when MUX #3 synchronization has been established.
M2SY Green Lights when MUX#2 synchronization has been established.
M1SY Green Lights when MUX#1 synchronization has been established.
M0SY Green Lights when MUX#0 synchronization has been established.
PLO 1 Green Lights when the Frame Head signal and clock signals are received from the PLO 1.
PLO 0 Green Lights when the Frame Head signal and clock signals are received from the PLO 0.
SWITCHNAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit card Make-busy.
DOWN × Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
TSWMBRUP TSW Make-busy request.
DOWN × TSW Make-busy request cancel.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
TONE
1 OFF × Fixed.
2ON (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FE.”)
OFF × (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FF.”)
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 133
Revision 1.0
PH-SW12Time Division Switch
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MB
TSWMBR
TONE
ON
ON
1 2 ON
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 134Revision 1.0
PU-SW00/PU-SW00-ATime Division Switch
PU-SW00/PU-SW00-ATime Division Switch
1. General Function
The PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A circuit card provides the Time division Switch (TSW) and INT function forthe IPX-U/IPX-UMG system. Each circuit card provides switching for a Local Node (LN) and four PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A cards and two PU-SW01 (HSW) cards achieve a maximum of 32,768 time slot (TS)switching for four (4) LNs/LMGs. This circuit card is located in ISWM of the ISW/CMG.
Figure 2-62 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW)
MUX00
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
DLKC0
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
MUX01
MUX02
MUX03
MUX10
MUX11
MUX12
MUX13
TSW00TSW10
TSW01TSW11
TSW02TSW12
TSW03TSW13
PLO 0
PLO 0
DLKC1
PLO 1
PLO 1
MUXMUX
TSW00
TSW01
TSW02
TSW03
HSW00
HSW01
HSW10
HSW11
TSW10
TSW11
TSW12
TSW13
[TSW Configuration]
2M PCM HW x8
2M PCM HW x8
2M PCM HW x8
2M PCM HW x8
2M PCM HW x8
2M PCM HW x8
2M PCM HW x8
2M PCM HW x8
32M TSWMatrix HW
32M SERIAL HW
32M SERIAL HW x4
32M SERIAL HW x4
32M SERIAL HW x4
32M SERIAL HW x4
64KHzClock
64KHzClock
32M TSWMatrix HW
32.768MHz Clock DCS
32.768MHz ClockDCS
32.768MHz Clock 32.768MHz Clock
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 135
Revision 1.0
PU-SW00/PU-SW00-ATime Division Switch
Figure 2-63 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-U System
HSW01
HSW00
TSW03
TSW02
TSW01
TSW00
LANI
LANI
LANI
LANI
HSW11
HSW10
TSW13
TSW12
TSW11
TSW10
PLO 1
PLO 0
RES
CPU CPU
MISC
IOC
EMA
RES
RES RES
IOGT1IOGT0
ISAGT ISAGT
MISC I/O BUS
ISAGT BUSISAGT BUS LPM
TSW I/O BUSTSW I/O BUS
ISWM
[INT Configuration]
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 136Revision 1.0
PU-SW00/PU-SW00-ATime Division Switch
Figure 2-63 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-UMG System
HSW01
HSW00
TSW03
TSW02
TSW01
TSW00
LANI
LANI
LANI
LANI
HSW11
HSW10
TSW13
TSW12
TSW11
TSW10
PLO 1
PLO 0
RES
CPU CPU
MMC
MISC
EMA
RES
RES RES
IOGT1IOGT0
ISAGT ISAGT
ISAGT2 ISAGT2
MISC I/O BUS
MISC I/O BUS
ISAGT BUS
P-BUS
ISAGT BUSP-BUS
CMP
TSW I/O BUSTSW I/O BUS
ISWM
[INT Configuration]
PCI MEMPCI BUS PCI BUSPCI MEM
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 137
Revision 1.0
PU-SW00/PU-SW00-ATime Division Switch
2. Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.
3. Face Layout of lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-64.
Figure 2-64 Face Layout of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Mounting Module ISWM
TS
W (00)
TS
W (01)
TS
W (02)
TS
W (03)
TS
W (10)
TS
W (11)
TS
W (12)
TS
W (13)
TSW MB
TSW MBR
TSWACT
12
34
PWPALMHCKALM
LN33LN32LN31LN30
LN23LN22LN21LN20
LN13LN12LN11LN10
LN03LN02LN01LN00
SWE5
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 138Revision 1.0
PU-SW00/PU-SW00-ATime Division Switch
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
TSWACTGreen Lights when the TDSW block is active.
Red Lights when the TDSW block is in Make-busy state.
PWPALM Red Lights when the On-Board Power Supply (+5V) for this circuit card is abnormal.
HCKALM Red Lights when clock failure (clock down or FH output failure) occurs on the HSW card.
LN33 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.
LN32 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.
LN31 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.
LN30 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.
LN23 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.
LN22 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.
LN21 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.
LN20 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.
LN13 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.
LN12 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.
LN11 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.
LN10 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.
LN03 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.
LN02 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.
LN01 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.
LN00 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 139
Revision 1.0
PU-SW00/PU-SW00-ATime Division Switch
5. Switch Settings
Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
6. External Interface
See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCHNAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
TSW MBUP Circuit card Make-busy.
DOWN × Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
TSW MBRUP Circuit card Make-busy request.
DOWN × Circuit card Make-busy request cancel.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SWE5
1ON × LN (Local Node)/LMG (Local Module Group) connection mode.
OFF MUX connection mode.
2 OFF × Not used.
3 OFF × Not used.
4 OFF × Not used.
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
TSW MB
TSW MBR
ON
ON
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 140Revision 1.0
PU-SW01Highway Switch
PU-SW01Highway Switch
1. General Function
The PU-SW01 circuit card, which is used for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, supports the followingfunctions.
(a) The switch composition is T-T-S-T (T: Time division, S: Space division, T: Time division), and the space division is composed with this circuit card.
(b) This circuit card collects the 16 highways of PCM data from and sends 8 highways to TSW by one card. It is used to perform 16 highways switching by 2 PU-SW01 cards.
Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW)
MUX00
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
DLKC0
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
MUX01
MUX02
MUX03
MUX10
MUX11
MUX12
MUX13
TSW00TSW10
TSW01TSW11
TSW02TSW12
TSW03TSW13
PLO 0
PLO 0
DLKC1
PLO 1
PLO 1
MUXMUX
TSW00
TSW01
TSW02
TSW03
HSW00
HSW01
HSW10
HSW11
TSW10
TSW11
TSW12
TSW13
2M PCM HW x8
2M PCM HW x8
2M PCM HW x8
2M PCM HW x8
2M PCM HW x8
2M PCM HW x8
2M PCM HW x8
2M PCM HW x8
32M TSWMatrix HW
32M SERIAL HW
32M SERIAL HW x4
32M SERIAL HW x4
32M SERIAL HW x4
32M SERIAL HW x4
64KHzClock
64KHzClock
32M TSWMatrix HW
32.768MHz Clock DCS
32.768MHz ClockDCS
32.768MHz Clock 32.768MHz Clock
[TSW Configuration]
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 141
Revision 1.0
PU-SW01Highway Switch
Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-U System
HSW01
HSW00
TSW03
TSW02
TSW01
TSW00
LANI
LANI
LANI
LANI
HSW11
HSW10
TSW13
TSW12
TSW11
TSW10
PLO 1
PLO 0
RES
CPU CPU
MISC
IOC
EMA
RES
RES RES
IOGT1IOGT0
ISAGT ISAGT
MISC I/O BUS
ISAGT BUSISAGT BUS LPM
TSW I/O BUSTSW I/O BUS
ISWM
[INT Configuration]
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 142Revision 1.0
PU-SW01Highway Switch
Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-UMG System
ISAGT2 ISAGT2
PCI MEMPCI BUS PCI BUSPCI MEM
HSW01
HSW00
TSW03
TSW02
TSW01
TSW00
LANI
LANI
LANI
LANI
HSW11
HSW10
TSW13
TSW12
TSW11
TSW10
PLO 1
PLO 0
RES
CPU CPU
MMC
MISC
EMA
RES
RES RES
IOGT1IOGT0
ISAGT ISAGT MISC I/O BUS
MISC I/O
BUS
ISAGT BUS
P-BUS
ISAGT BUSP-BUS
CMP
TSW I/O BUSTSW I/O BUS
ISWM
[INT Configuration]
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 143
Revision 1.0
PU-SW01Highway Switch
2. Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card is mounted in ISWM located in the ISW/CMG. The mounted slots are the shaded partsshown below.
3. Face Layout of lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-66.
Figure 2-66 Face Layout of PU-SW01 (HSW)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Mounting Module ISWM
HS
W (00)
HS
W (01)
HS
W (10)
HS
W (11)
MB
HSWACT
PWRALM
CKALFCKALECKALDCKALCCKALBCKALACKAL9CKAL8CKAL7CKAL6CKAL5CKAL4CKAL3CKAL2CKAL1CKAL0
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 144Revision 1.0
PU-SW01Highway Switch
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
HSWACTGreen Lights when the HSW block is active.
Red Lights when the HSW block is in Make-busy state.
PWPALM Red Lights when the On-Board Power Supply (-48 V) for this circuit card is abnormal.
CKALFGreen Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #15 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #15 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
CKALEGreen Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #14 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #14 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
CKALDGreen Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #13 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #13 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
CKALCGreen Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #12 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #12 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
CKALBGreen Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #11 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #11 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
CKALAGreen Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #10 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #10 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
CKAL9Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #09 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #09 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
CKAL8Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #08 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #08 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
CKAL7Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #07 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #07 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
CKAL6Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #06 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #06 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
CKAL5Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #05 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #05 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
CKAL4Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #04 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #04 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 145
Revision 1.0
PU-SW01Highway Switch
5. Switch Settings
Switch settings on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
6. External Interface
No cable connections are required.
7. Switch Setting Sheet
CKAL3Green Lights when the clock signal is sent normally from #03 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Off Goes off when the clock failure occurs on #03 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
CKAL2Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #02 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #02 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
CKAL1Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #01 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #01 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
CKAL0Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #00 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #00 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
SWITCHNAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit card Make-busy.
DOWN × Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MB
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
ON
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 146Revision 1.0
PZ-GT13Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway
PZ-GT13 Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway
1. General Function
The PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) circuit card controls the TSDW, DLKC, PLO etc. using the PH-GT09 (GT) in theTSWM. This card also provides the MISC I/O bus interface, which permits a microprocessor on the CPRto control EMA and IOC/MISC. The Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus is used to connect thiscircuit card onto the CPR.
Figure 2-67 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
PLO0
PLO1
TSW03TDSW I/OLocal Bus
TDSW I/OLocal Bus
TSW13
TSW02
TSW12
TSW01
TSW11
TSW00
DLKC0
MISC
ISAGT
DSP
CPULANI
LANI
GT
TSW10
CPR #0
To HUB
To HUB
To HUB
To HUB
ISAGT
GT
DLKC1
DSP
CPU
CPR #1
LANI
LANI
EMA
IOC/MISC
MISC I/O Bus MISC I/O Bus
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 147
Revision 1.0
PZ-GT13Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway
Figure 2-68 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) in the IPX-U System (ISW)
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PZ-GT13 is located on the ISA bus which is allocated in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-69.
Figure 2-69 External Interface for PZ-GT13
HSW01
HSW00
TSW03
TSW02
TSW01
TSW00
LANI
LANI
LANI
LANI
HSW11
HSW10
TSW13
TSW12
TSW11
TSW10
PLO 1
PLO 0
RES
CPU CPU
MISC
IOC
EMA
RES
RES RES
(IOGT1)PH-GT10
(IOGT0)PH-GT10
(ISAGT)PZ-GT13
(ISAGT)PZ-GT13
MISC I/O BUS
ISAGT BUSISAGT BUS LPM
TSW I/O BUSTSW I/O BUS
ISWM
PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
CPU BOARD
PZ-DK224 (DSP)
PZ-PC19 (LANI)
PZ-PW92 (PWR)
PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD)
LPMMounting Module
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 148Revision 1.0
PZ-GT13Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway
3. Face Layout of Connectors
The face layout of connectors is shown in Figure 2-70. There are no lamps or switches on this circuit card.
Figure 2-70 Face Layout of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
4. External Interface
This card has no lamps.
5. Switch Settings
No switch settings are required.
6. External Interface
See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.
7. Switch Setting Sheet
No switch settings are required.
FRONT VIEW
A B
ISA BUS INTERFACE
CO
NN
PMG
DS
PP
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 149
Revision 1.0
PZ-GT16Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway
PZ-GT16Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway
1. General Function
The PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) circuit card provides both the I/O Local bus and the MISC bus interface, whichpermits a microprocessor on the CPR to control the lower echelons of circuit cards. The Industry StandardArchitecture (ISA) bus is used to connect this circuit card onto the CPR.
Figure 2-71 Location of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT)
DSP
CPULANI
LANI
CPR#0
DSP
ISAGT CPU LANI
LANI
EMA
IOC/MISC
TSW TSW
To HUB To HUB
To HUB To HUB
I/O Local Bus I/O Local Bus
CPR#1
MISC Bus MISC Bus
ISAGT
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 150Revision 1.0
PZ-GT16Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) is located on the ISA bus, which is allocated in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-72.
Figure 2-72 External Interface for PZ-GT16
PZ-GT16 (GT)
CPU BOARD
PZ-DK224 (DSP)
PZ-PC19 (LANI)
PZ-PW92 (PWR)
PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD)
LPMMounting Module
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 151
Revision 1.0
PZ-GT16Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway
3. Face Layout of Connectors
The face layout of connectors is shown in Figure 2-73. There are no lamps or switches on this circuit card.
Figure 2-73 Face Layout of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT)
4. Lamp Indications
This card contains no lamps.
5. Switch Settings
No switch settings are required.
6. External Interface
See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.
7. Switch Setting Sheet
No switch settings are required.
FRONT VIEW
A B
ISA BUS INTERFACE
CO
NN
PMG
DS
PP
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 152Revision 1.0
PZ-GT20Industry Standard Architecture Gateway
PZ-GT20Industry Standard Architecture Gateway
1. General Function
The main function of the PZ-GT20 circuit card is to connect the Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) buslocated on the CPU and the Local I/O bus, permitting the microprocessor on the CPU to control the TSW,MUX cards of IMG2, 3/6, 7/10, 11/14, 15 via the PH-GT09 card in the TSWM1. This circuit card is usedfor the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.
Figure 2-74 Location of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT)
TSW03
TSW02
TSW01
TSW00
LANI
LANI
LANI
LANI
TSW13
TSW12
TSW11
TSW10
PLO 1
PLO 0
CPU#0 CPU#1EMA
MMC
PH-GT09(IOGT1)
PH-GT09(IOGT0)
PZ-GT13(ISAGT)
PZ-GT20(ISAGT)
PZ-GT20(ISAGT)
PZ-GT13(ISAGT)
ISA BUSISA BUS
LPM (IMG0/4/8/12)
GT-BUSGT-BUS
TSWM#1 (IMG2/6/10/14)
TSWM#0 (IMG1/5/9/13)
TSW03
TSW02
TSW01
TSW00
TSW13
TSW12
TSW11
TSW10
CLK 1
CLK 0
PH-GT09(IOGT1)
PH-GT09(IOGT0)
TSW I/O BUSTSW I/O BUS
IOC/MISC
MISC
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 153
Revision 1.0
PZ-GT20Industry Standard Architecture Gateway
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PZ-GT20 resides on the ISA bus that is located in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-75.
Figure 2-75 External Interface for PZ-GT20
3. Face Layout of Connectors
The face layout of connectors are shown in Figure 2-76. There are no lamps or switches on this circuit card.
Figure 2-76 Face Layout of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT)
PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
CPU BOARD
PZ-DK224 (DSP)
PZ-PC19/PC22 (LANI)
PZ-PW92 (PWR)
PZ-IO27/28 (FDD/HDD)
LP(IMG0/4/8/12)Mounting Module
Note: FDD/HDD is not mounted on the CPR of LP in IPX-UMG system.
ISA BUS INTERFACE
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 154Revision 1.0
PZ-GT20Industry Standard Architecture Gateway
4. External Interface
This card contains no lamps.
5. Switch Settings
No switch settings are required.
6. External Interface
See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.
7. Switch Setting Sheet
No switch settings are required.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 155
Revision 1.0
PZ-M565Industry Standard Architecture Gateway
PZ-M565 Industry Standard Architecture Gateway
1. General Function
This circuit card has the relay functions as mentioned below:
(a) to receive the NMI (Non-Maskable Interruption) signal from the PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) card, then output it to ISA Bus.
(b) to receive the ACT signal from the EMA card, then output it to PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) card.
This card is used in IPX-UMG system connecting the two cards on CPU#0 and #1 in CMP with a bus cable.
Figure 2-77 Location of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card in the System
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PZ-M565 (ISAGT) card is mounted in PCI Slot No.05 on CPU Board within the CMP of IPX-UMGsystem as shown in Figure 2-78.
Figure 2-78 External Interface for PZ-M565
CMP
EMA
MISC
DSPC/MMC
PZ-M565(ISAGT2)
PZ-GT13(ISAGT)
LANI
LANI CPU#0
PCIMEM
ISA BUSPZ-M565(ISAGT2)
PZ-GT13(ISAGT)
LANI
LANICPU#1
ISA BUS
PCI BUSPCI BUSPCI
MEM
5.0 A
CMP-CPR
PCI bus ISA bus
PZ-PW92DC-40V -58.6
I
O
SWON
OFF
ON
ALM
PALM
OUTPWR
INPWR
5A125VAC/DC
CPUOPE WDT IMG0
IMG1 IMG2 IMG3
PZ-M565
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 156Revision 1.0
PZ-M565Industry Standard Architecture Gateway
3. Face Layout of Connectors
The face layout of connectors is shown below.
Figure 2-79 Face Layout of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card
4. Lamp Indications
This card contains no lamps.
5. Switch Settings
No switch settings are required.
6. External Interface
See the NEAX 2400 IPX-UMG Installation Manual.
7. Switch Setting Sheet
No switch settings are required.
CONN
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 157
Revision 1.0
PZ-ME44PCI Memory
PZ-ME44 PCI Memory
1. General Function
Mounted on CPU Board of CMP in IPX-UMG system, this circuit card provides the Memory Copyfunction related to ACT/ST-BY system changeover.
Figure 2-80 Location of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card in the System
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) card is mounted in PCI Slot No. 02 on CPU Board of CMP as shown in Figure2-81.
Figure 2-81 External Interface for PZ-M44
EMA
MISC
DPSC/MMC
I/O Local Bus I/O Local Bus
MISC Bus #0 MISC Bus #1
DSP
ISAGTCPU
CPR #0
ISAGT2
DSP
CPU
CPR #1
ISAGT2
PCI MEMPCI MEM
ISAGT
5.0 A
PCI bus ISA bus
PZ-PW92DC-40V -58.6
I
O
SWON
OFF
ON
ALM
PALM
OUTPWR
INPWR
5A125VAC/DC
CPUOPE WDT IMG0
IMG1 IMG2 IMG3
PZ-ME44
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 158Revision 1.0
PZ-ME44PCI Memory
3. Face Layout of Connectors
The face layout of connectors and lamps is shown in Figure 2-82.
Figure 2-82 Face Layout of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
No switch settings are required.
6. External Interface
See the NEAX2400 IPX-UMG Installation Manual.
7. Switch Setting Sheet
No switch settings are required.
LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION
COPYGreen Copy mode
OFF Self mode
SOFTGreen Normally operating in copy mode (Valid when “copy” lamp lights)
OFF Remains OFF during ACT → STBY memory copy
WE Green Lights when Memory writing
CONN
COPY
SOFT
WE
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 159
Revision 1.0
PZ-PC19Local Area Network Interface
PZ-PC19Local Area Network Interface
1. General Function
The PZ-PC19 (LANI) circuit card provides the interface for the 10-BASE-T and the Peripheral ComponentInterconnect (PCI) Bus. The microprocessor on the CPR sends/receives the Fusion Link Data and/orMaintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) data across the LAN interface (LANI).
Figure 2-83 Location of PZ-PC19 (LANI)
To another Fusion Node
FCCHDTIDTIFCCH
HUB
HUB
HUB
LANI
LANI
LANI CPUISAGTISAGT
LANI
DSPDSP
CPR #1CPR #0
NIC
MAT
PCI10-BASE-T
10-BASE-T
CPU
IMX
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 160Revision 1.0
PZ-PC19Local Area Network Interface
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PZ-PC19 (LANI) is located on the PCI bus in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-84.
Figure 2-84 External Interface for PZ-PC19
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown in Figure 2-85.
Figure 2-85 Face Layout of PZ-PC19 Card
Mounting Module LPM
PZ-GT13/GT16 (ISAGT)
CPU BOARD
PZ-DK224 (DSP)
PZ-PC19 (LANI)
PZ-PW92 (PWR)
PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD)
10 BASE-T
EST3EST2EST1EST0
PCI BUS INTERFACE
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 161
Revision 1.0
PZ-PC19Local Area Network Interface
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
No switch settings are required.
LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION
EST0 Green Layer 1 link has established.
EST1 Green Data packet sending/receiving.
EST2 Red Layer 1 link failure.
EST3 Yellow Data packet collision has occurred.
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 162Revision 1.0
PZ-PC19Local Area Network Interface
6. External Interface
Figure 2-86 Cable Connections for PZ-PC19
7. Switch Setting Sheet
No switch settings are required.
24DTR
CN2
FCH
FCH
PZ-PC19(LANI)
HUB
10 BASE-T straight Cable10 BASE-T straight Cable
TO IMX MAT
10 BASE-T straight Cable
HUB
10AL (10)FLT CA
DTI
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 163
Revision 1.0
PZ-PC22Local Area Network Interface
PZ-PC22 Local Area Network Interface
1. General Function
The PZ-PC22 (LANI) circuit card is a single port Ether card that builds up Fusion link or Ether LANcorresponding to 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX. The card is mounted on the Peripheral ComponentInterconnect (PCI) bus slot in the CPR, and provides the interface to the Processor bus.
This card is mounted on the CPR of CMP/LP in the IPX-UMG system.
Figure 2-87 Location of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card in the System
LAN CPU
LP#0
LAN CPU
CMP#0
LAN
LAN
CPU
SP#0
10BASE-T
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX(P-BUS)
100BASE-TX(P-BUS)
HUB
HUB
HUB
FCCH DTI
LANCPU
LP#1
LANCPU
CMP#1
LAN
LAN
CPU
SP#1
10BASE-T
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX(P-BUS)
100BASE-TX(P-BUS)
HUB
HUB
FCCHDTI
To other Fusion Node
NIC
MAT
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 164Revision 1.0
PZ-PC22Local Area Network Interface
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PZ-PC22 (LANI) card is accommodated on the PCI bus in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-88.
Figure 2-88 Location of PZ-PC22
3. Face Layout of Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-89.
Figure 2-89 Face Layout of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card
5.0 A
CMP-CPR/LP-CPR
PCI bus ISA bus
PZ-PW92DC-40V -58.6
I
O
SWON
OFF
ON
ALM
PALM
OUTPWR
INPWR
5A125VAC/DC
CPUOPE WDT IMG0
IMG1 IMG2 IMG3
PZ-PC22
100M
TXRXLINK
COL
LAN
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 165
Revision 1.0
PZ-PC22Local Area Network Interface
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
No switch settings are required.
LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION
100M Green 100MHz mode
TXRX Green Data packet sending/receiving
LINK Green Link has been established.
COL Yellow Data packet collision has occurred.
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 166Revision 1.0
PZ-PC22Local Area Network Interface
6. External Interface
Figure 2-90 External Interface for PZ-PC22 (LANI)
7. Switch Setting Sheet
No switch settings are required.
PZ-PC22 (LANI)
HUB
100 BASE-TX Straight Cable
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 167
Revision 1.0
PZ-PC23Local Area Network Interface
PZ-PC23 Local Area Network Interface
1. General Function
The PZ-PC23 (LANI) circuit card is a multiple ports Ether card that builds up Fusion link or external EtherLAN corresponding to 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX. In the IPX-UMG system, one connector is used forEthernet, and the other for Fusion link. The card is mounted on the Peripheral Component Interconnect(PCI) bus slot within the CPR, and provides the interface to the Processor bus or Fusion link.
This card is mounted on the CPR of SP in the IPX-UMG system.
Figure 2-91 Location of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card in the System
LAN CPU
LP#0
LAN CPU
CMP#0
LAN
LAN
CPU
SP#0
10BASE-T
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX(P-BUS)
100BASE-TX(P-BUS)
HUB
HUB
HUB
FCCH DTI
LANCPU
LP#1
LANCPU
CMP#1
LAN
LAN
CPU
SP#1
10BASE-T
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX(P-BUS)
100BASE-TX(P-BUS)
HUB
HUB
FCCHDTI
To other Fusion Node
NIC
MAT
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 168Revision 1.0
PZ-PC23Local Area Network Interface
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PZ-PC23 (LANI) card is accommodated on the PCI bus Slot No.0 and No.3 in the CPR of SP as shownin Figure 2-92.
Figure 2-92 Location for PZ-PC23
3. Face Layout of Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-93.
Figure 2-93 Face Layout of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card
5.0 A
PCI bus ISA bus
PZ-PW92DC-40V -58.6
I
O
SWON
OFF
ON
ALM
PALM
OUTPWR
INPWR
5A125VAC/DC
CPUOPE WDT IMG0
IMG1 IMG2 IMG3
PZ-PC23
SP-CPR
100M0
TXRX0LINK0
COL0
LAN0
Note
Note
100M1
TXRX1LINK1
COL1
LAN1
Note: Connect the Ether cable to “LAN0” connector for Processor bus within the IPX-UMG system. WhenFusion network is used, connect the Ether cable to “LAN1” connector to establish Fusion link.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2Page 169
Revision 1.0
PZ-PC23Local Area Network Interface
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
No switch settings are required.
LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION
100M0/1 Green 100MHz mode
LINK0/1 Green Link has been established.
TXRX0/1 Green Data packet sending/receiving
COL0/1 Yellow Data packet collision has occurred.
CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296Page 170Revision 1.0
PZ-PC23Local Area Network Interface
6. External Interface
Figure 2-94 External Interface for PZ-PC23 (LANI)
7. Switch Setting Sheet
No switch settings are required.
24DTR
CN2
FCH
FCH
PZ-PC23(LANI)
PZ-PC19(LANI)
HUB
Connected to the MAT
10 BASE-T Straight Cable
HUB
10AL (10)FLT CA
DTI
HUB(PH-CM103)
10 BASE-T Straight Cable 10 BASE-T Straight Cable
100 BASE-TX Straight Cable
NDA-24296 Chapter 3Page 171
Revision 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LINE/TRUNK CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE
1. GENERAL
This chapter explains the following items about circuit cards.
• General Function
Explains the general function and purpose for each control circuit card.
• Mounting Location/Condition
Explains the mounting location (mounting module name and slot number, etc.) of each circuit card. If thereare any conditions pertaining to mounting the circuit cards, they are also explained.
• Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The locations of the lamps, switches, and connectors provided on each circuit card are illustrated by a facelayout.
• Lamp Indications
Names, colors, and indication states of lamps mounted on each circuit card are listed.
• Switch Settings
Each circuit card’s switches are listed with their names, switch numbers, setting and its meaning, standardsetting, etc.
• External Interface
If the lead outputs of the circuit card are provided by an LT connector, the relation between the mountingslots and the LT connectors is illustrated by an LT Connector Lead Face Layout. If the lead outputs areprovided by other than an LT connector, or are provided by the circuit card front connector, the connectorlead locations and the connecting routes are shown.
In addition, a Switch Setting Sheet is provided at the end of the explanation of circuit cards.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 172Revision 1.0
PA-CFTB8-party Conference Trunk
PA-CFTB8-party Conference Trunk
1. General Function
The PA-CFTB (CFT) circuit card provides an interface for establishing a conference, which is made up ofa maximum of eight parties.A maximum of seven Tie Lines can participate in a conference when the associated trunks can receive ananswer signal and a release signal from the distant switching system. On the other hand, in the case of aC.O. line, one C.O. line can be connected even if the public switching system cannot send an answer signaland/or release signal. Note that a Tie Line and a C.O. Line cannot take part in a conference at the same time.The card adopts “N-1 addition” method for establishing a conference.
Note: This circuit card is used for following features:• Station-Controlled Conference (Refer to Feature Programming Manual [S-56])• Attendant-Controlled Conference (Refer to Feature Programming Manual [A-2])• Add On Conference-8 Party (Refer to Feature Programming Manual [A-121])• Group Call-Automatic Conference (20-party) (Refer to Wireless System Manual)
Figure 3-1 Location of PA-CFTB (CFT) within the System
NETWORK
Answer/Release Signal →
Conferee
ConferenceOriginator
CPU
Local I/O Bus
GT
INT SW INT PA-CFTB
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PC
M IN
T
VP
RO
C
PCM INT: PCM InterfaceVPROC: Voice Processor Block
TLT
TLT
LC
LC
CH
This diagram shows an example of a “Preset” conference involving Tie Line connections.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 173
Revision 1.0
PA-CFTB8-party Conference Trunk
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-CFTB (CFT) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.
Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 174Revision 1.0
PA-CFTB8-party Conference Trunk
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2 Face Layout of PA-CFTB (CFT)
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMPNAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.
BL0
BL7
Red BL-lamp remains lit while the corresponding circuit is busy.
Flash BL-lamp flashes when the corresponding circuit is busy.
OPE
N-OPE
MBSW2
SW1
SW0
BL7
BL0
-
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 175
Revision 1.0
PA-CFTB8-party Conference Trunk
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO. SETTING STANDARD
SETTING MEANING
MB UP Circuit card make busy
DOWN × Circuit card make busy cancel
SW0
1ON × Fixed in the system
OFF
2ON × Fixed in the system
OFF
3ON × Fixed in the system
OFF
4ON × Fixed in the system
OFF
5ON × Fixed in the system
OFF
6ON × Fixed in the system
OFF
7ON
OFF × Fixed in the system
8ON
OFF × Fixed in the system
12 34 56 78
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 176Revision 1.0
PA-CFTB8-party Conference Trunk
SW11
ON × Fixed in the system
OFF
2ON × Fixed in the system
OFF
3ON × Fixed in the system
OFF
4ON × Fixed in the system
OFF
5ON × Fixed in the system
OFF
6ON × Fixed in the system
OFF
7ON × Fixed in the system
OFF
8ON
OFF × Fixed in the system
SW21
ON × µ-law PCM encoder
OFF A-law PCM encoder
2ON Conference connection is set up by PB tel.
OFF Conference connection is not set up by PB tel.
3
ONWhen port Microprocessor (PM) is SP-388, SP-457, SP-863, SP-990, SP-1114.
OFFWhen Port Microprocessor (PM) is SP-519, SP-1141.
4 OFF × Not used
5 OFF × Not used
6 OFF × Not used
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO. SETTING STANDARD
SETTING MEANING
12 34 56 78
12 34 56 78
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 177
Revision 1.0
PA-CFTB8-party Conference Trunk
6. Switch Setting Sheet
SW2
7
ONCFTB Insertion Loss (PAD value) Setting
OFF
8
ON
OFF
MODULE SLOTNO.
SWITCHNAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
SW0
SW1
SW2
MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO. SETTING STANDARD
SETTING MEANING
SW2-7 SW2-8 PAD [dB]
OFF OFF 0OFF ON 3ON OFF 6ON ON 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 178Revision 1.0
PA-CK14Oscillator
PA-CK14Oscillator
1. General Function
The PLO block of the TSW card generates its base clock signals, and adjusts their phase with the sourceclock signals so the PLO can send the synchronized clock signals to the TSW. When the 1 IMG system isa clock-subordinate-office of the digital network, the base clock accuracy of the PLO/ PH-SW10 (±5 ppmdeviation) is sufficient. However, the more high-precision base clock signals are required at the clock-source-office, as this circuit card provides --- PA-CK14 (±0.3 ppm deviation). When this circuit card ismounted, the 1 IMG system selects the PA-CK14 (OSC) clocks as the base clock of the PLO.
Figure 3-3 Location of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card in the System
SEL
SEL
TDSW
MUX0
PLO
SEL
SEL
TDSW
MUX0
PLO
BWBBWB
BWB BWB
OSCOSC
DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCEDTI 1 CLOCK SOURCEDTI 2 CLOCK SOURCEDTI 3 CLOCK SOURCE
DSC 0DSC 1
FRONT CABLES FRONT CABLES
MUX1 MUX2 MUX3 MUX1 MUX2 MUX3
LC/TRKLC/TRKLC/TRKLC/TRKLC/TRKLC/TRKLC/TRKLC/TRK
DSC1
DSC0
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 179
Revision 1.0
PA-CK14Oscillator
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-CK14 (OSC) is located in Port Interface Module number zero (PIM 0). The card mounted in slotnumber 09 works as the primary OSC, 17 for the secondary OSC.
Note: This card occupies two slots.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4 Face Layout of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Mounting Module PIM
OS
C#0
OS
C#1
PIM0
CLKOUT 0
CLKOUT 1
MB
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 180Revision 1.0
PA-CK14Oscillator
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
6. External Interface
Since the base clock signals are delivered through the printed-wiring on the Back Wired Board (BWB) ofPIM 0, this circuit card does not require any external cabling.
7. Switch Setting Sheet
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
CLKOUT0 Green Lights when OSC card delivers the clock signals to TSW#0.
CLKOUT1 Green Lights when OSC card delivers the clock signals to TSW#1.
SWITCH NAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBON Make-busy of the circuit card.
OFF × Normal setting.
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MBON
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 181
Revision 1.0
PH-CK16Phase Lock Oscillator
PH-CK16Phase Lock Oscillator
1. General Function
This circuit card, used together with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronizationwith the network. With this circuit card, the 4 IMG system can be a clock subordinate office of the digitalnetwork. As seen in Figure 3-5, the PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching networkselection.
Figure 3-5 Location of PH-CK16 (PLO) Card in the System
TDSW00 TDSW01 TDSW02 TDSW03
SEL
PLL PLL
PLO #0 PLO #1
OSC OSC
TDSW10 TDSW11 TDSW12 TDSW13
SEL
34PH EXCLK CA-A 34PH EXCLK CA-A
MDF
MDF
BWB BWB
BWBBWB
DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE
DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE
DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE
DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCEDCS 0
DCS 1
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 182Revision 1.0
PH-CK16Phase Lock Oscillator
The source clock of the clock subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the digital interfaceclock (DIU0 - DIU3). When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another clock sourceautomatically in the order of:
1. DCS
2. DIU0
3. DIU1
4. DIU2
5. DIU3
6. PLO changeover or the PLO internal oscillator drifting
The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows:
• 32.768 MHz CLK
• 8 KHz FH
• 5 msec × “n” FH
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 183
Revision 1.0
PH-CK16Phase Lock Oscillator
The MUSIC ROM located on this circuit card also contains the hold tone, and is supplied to the TSW circuitcard. When an external music on hold is applied to the 4 IMG system, this circuit card provides the interface forthe external hold tone source.
Figure 3-6 Music Source
SEL
SEL
SEL
Speech Path Memoryfor Music/Tone
Music/Tone
MUSIC ROM
TDSW00
PLO#0
TONE ROM
SEL
SEL
SEL
Speech Path Memoryfor Music/Tone
Music/Tone
MUSIC ROM
TDSW1
PLO#1
TONE ROM
FM
FM
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 184Revision 1.0
PH-CK16Phase Lock Oscillator
2. Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-7.
Figure 3-7 Face Layout of PH-CK16 (PLO)
Mounting Module TSWM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PLO
0
PLO
1
1 2 3 4
1 2
SW8F
SWAC
SWAB
MB
ACT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MJMNSYNCICKPALM
SW01
SW02
SW03
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 185
Revision 1.0
PH-CK16Phase Lock Oscillator
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
ACTGreen Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.
Off Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state.
MJ Red
Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:
• All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office
• 32.768 MHz output clock failure
• 8 KHz output FH failure
• 5 msec × “n” output FH failure
• Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card)
• Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock source office
MN Red
Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:
• One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed
• Drifting failure
• Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) failure
SYNC
Green Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.
OFF
Remains off when either of the following has occurred:
• DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS.
• DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI.
• Drifting failure
ICK Green Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally.
PALM Red Remains lit when power is abnormal.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 186Revision 1.0
PH-CK16Phase Lock Oscillator
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit card Make-busy.
DOWN × Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
SW03 1 - F 1 Fixed to “1.”
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW01
1ON × Clock subordinate office.
OFF Clock source office.
2ON Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.
OFF Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.
3ON Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.
OFF Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.
4
ON8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
OFF8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
5
ONWhen clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.
OFFWhen clock source failure has not occurred in all supply routes, the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock.
6ON
This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and 5 m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card.
OFF This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card.
7ON A-law CODEC is used for the hold music.
OFF × µ-law CODEC is used for the hold music.
8 OFF × Not used.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 187
Revision 1.0
PH-CK16Phase Lock Oscillator
SW02
1ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.
OFF DIU 0 is not used.
2ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.
OFF DIU 1 is not used.
3ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.
OFF DIU 2 is not used.
4ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.
OFF DIU 3 is not used.
5ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 0
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 0
6ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 1
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 1
7ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 2
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 2
8ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 3
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 3
SWAC1
ON External hold tone source is used via FM lead.
OFF × MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone.
2 OFF × Not used.
SW8F
1
2
3
4
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW8F-1 SW8F-2Impedance of the External
Music Source 0 (FM 0)
OFF OFF 600 Ω
ON OFF 8.2 Ω
OFF ON 47K Ω
SW8F-3 SW8F-4Impedance of the External
Music Source 1 (FM 1)
OFF OFF 600 Ω
ON OFF 8.2 Ω
OFF ON 47K Ω
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 188Revision 1.0
PH-CK16Phase Lock Oscillator
SWAB
1
Note: Don’t care.
2
3
4ON Not used.
OFF × Not used.
5MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card.
6
7
8ON Not used.
OFF × Not used.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SWA0-1 SWA0-2 SWA0-3 MUSIC
OFF OFF OFF Für Elise
ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer
Note OFF ON Buzzer
Note ON OFF Chime
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 189
Revision 1.0
PH-CK16Phase Lock Oscillator
6. External Interface
When this circuit card is located in the TSWM, connect 34PH EXCLK CA-A to the EXCLK0/EXCLK1connectors on the backplane of the TSWM.
Figure 3-8 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23Slot No.
TSWM
FRONT VIEW
PLO
#1
PLO
#0
26 1
FM 127 2
FM 028 3
SYN 1B
E29 4
SYN 0B
E30 5
DIU 3B
SYN 1A31 6
DIU 2B
SYN 0A32 7
DIU 1B
DIU 3A33 8
DIU 0B
DIU 2A34 9
DCS B
DIU 1A35 10 DIU 0A36 11 DCS A37 1238 13
EXCLK0(Slot No.21)
EXCLK1(Slot No.23)
TSWM
REAR VIEW
34PH EXCLK CA-A
34PH EXCLK CA-A
34PH EXCLK CA-A LEAD ACCOMMODATION
Installation Cable
MDF
To Digital Interface and/or DCS
Mounting Module TSWM
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 190Revision 1.0
PH-CK16Phase Lock Oscillator
Figure 3-9 Connecting Route Diagram
DCSB1DIU0A1DIU0B1DIU1A1DIU1B1DIU2A1DIU2B1DIU3A1DIU3B1
DCSA1
DCSB0DIU0A0DIU0B0DIU1A0DIU1B0DIU2A0DIU2B0DIU3A0DIU3B0
DCSA0
POUT BPOUT A
POUT BPOUT A
POUT BPOUT A
POUT BPOUT ACCT /DTI
/PRT
CCT /DTI/PRT
CCT /DTI/PRT
CCT /DTI/PRT
PLO #0
PLO #1
DCS
Note : The following circuit cards have Clock Output Leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA-30CCTB),DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (PA-24PRT, PA-30PRTC).
MDFPBX
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 191
Revision 1.0
PH-CK16Phase Lock Oscillator
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MB
SW01
SW02
SW03
SWAC
SW8F
SWAB
ON
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1 2 ON
1 2 3 4 ON
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 192Revision 1.0
PH-CK16-APhase Lock Oscillator
PH-CK16-APhase Lock Oscillator
1. General Function
This circuit card, used with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization. With thiscircuit card, the system can be a clock subordinate office of the digital network. As seen in Figure 3-10, thePLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network selection.
Figure 3-10 Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in 4-IMG System
OSC64K+8K
(BWB)
(BWB)
CLK, FH, WFHACT, ALM
34PH EXCLK CA-A
PLO #0
TSW 00
BWB BWB
DTI0 DCS0
(MDF)
DCS11 2 3
PLO #1
SEL
PLL
Drv
SEL
PLL
Drv
OSC
34PH EXCLK CA-A
TSW 01 TSW 02 TSW 03 TSW 00 TSW 01 TSW 02 TSW 03
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 193
Revision 1.0
PH-CK16-APhase Lock Oscillator
Figure 3-11 Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System
LN0/LMG0(IMG2/IMG3)
LN3/LMG3(IMG2/IMG3)/(IMG14/IMG15)
32M, FH+WFHPLO ACT
32M, FH+WFHPLO ACT
CLK1(TSWM1)
TSW10~13
CLK0(TSWM1)
TSW00~03
MUX(System1)
MUX(System0)
LC/TRK
HSW00
ISWM
HSW01
CLK1(TSWM1)
TSW10~13
CLK0(TSWM1)
TSW00~03
MUX(System1)
MUX(System0)
LC/TRK
LN0/LMG0(IMG0/IMG1)
fromLN/LMG DTI
fromLN/LMG DTI
32M, FH+WFHPLO ACT
32M, FH+WFHPLO ACT(BWB)
32M, FH+WFHPLO ACT
(BWB)
64K+FH, WFHTSW ACT
(Cable)
64K+FH, WFHTSW ACT
(Cable)
PLO 1(TSWM0)
TSW10~13
PLO 0(TSWM0)
TSW00~03
MUX(System1)
MUX(System0)
LC/TRK
LN3/LMG3(IMG0/IMG1)/(IMG12/IMG13)
32M, FH+WFHPLO ACT
PLO 1(TSWM0)
TSW10~13
PLO 0(TSWM0)
TSW00~03
MUX(System1)
MUX(System0)
LC/TRK
TSW00 TSW03
HSW10
OSC64K+8K
(BWB)
(BWB)
CLK, FH, WFHACT, ALM
PLO 0
DTI0 DCS0 (MDF) DCS11 2 3
PLO 1
SEL
PLL
Drv
HSW11
TSW10 TSW13
SEL
PLL
Drv
OSC
~
~ ~
~
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 194Revision 1.0
PH-CK16-APhase Lock Oscillator
2. Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.
<For 4-IMG System>
<For IPX-U/IPX-UMG System>
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
TSWM(IMG1)Mounting Module
PLO
(#0)
PLO
(#1)
ISWMMounting Module
TSWM0(IMG1/5/9/13)Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PLO
(#0)
PLO
(#1)
PLO
(#0)
PLO
(#1)
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 195
Revision 1.0
PH-CK16-APhase Lock Oscillator
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-12.
Figure 3-12 Face Layout of PH-CK16-A (PLO)
1 2 3 4
1 2
SW11
SW10
SW12
MB
OPE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MJMNSYNCICK
CKPKGALM0ALM1
PALM
SW01
SW02
SW031
23
45
67
81
23
45
67
8
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 196Revision 1.0
PH-CK16-APhase Lock Oscillator
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below:
Note: This lamp is effective when this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system. When this cardis mounted in ISWM, this lamp is not used.
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.
MJ Red
Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:
• All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office
• 32.768 MHz output clock failure (including CLK card)
• 8 KHz output clock failure (including CLK card)
• Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card) Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock source office
MN Red
Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:
• One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply route has failed
• Drifting failure
• Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) failure
SYNC Green Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.
ICK Green Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally.
CKPKGNote
Green Lights when the CLK card in TSWM1 is in normal operation.
ALM0Note
Red Lights when clock failure has occurred in the CLK card.
ALM1Note
Red Lights when FH failure has occurred in the CLK card.
PALM Red Remains lit when the On-Board Power Supply is abnormal.
SWITCH NAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit card Make-busy.
DOWN × Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
SW03 1 - F 1 Fixed to “1”.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 197
Revision 1.0
PH-CK16-APhase Lock Oscillator
The key setting of “SW01” differs depending on the mounting location.
[Mounted in ISWM of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System or TSWM of 4-IMG System]
Note: When this card is used in the 4-IMG or ISWM of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, specify the clock source(DCS or DTI) according to the clock network configuration for the office.
Note 1: This standard setting is applicable when this card is mounted in ISWM of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW01
1ON
×Note 1
Clock subordinate office.
OFF Clock source office.
2
ON Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.
OFF×
Note 1Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.
3
ON Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.
OFF×
Note 1Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.
4
ON8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
OFF×
Note 18 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
5
ONWhen clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.
OFF×
Note 1When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO keeps on outputting the current phase clock.
6
ONThis circuit card is used with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and 5m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card.
OFF×
Note 1This circuit card is not used with SYNC (PA-CK16) card.
7ON A-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.
OFF × µ-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.
8 OFF × Fixed to “OFF” (Not used).
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 198Revision 1.0
PH-CK16-APhase Lock Oscillator
[Mounted in TSWM0 of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System]
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW01
1ON × Clock subordinate office. (Fixed)
OFF Clock source office.
2
ONDigital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.)
OFFDigital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.)
3
ONDigital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.)
OFFDigital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.)
4
ON8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
OFF × 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
5
ONWhen clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.
OFF × When clock source failure has not occurred, the PLO keeps on outputting the current phase clock.
6ON ×
This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and 5m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card.(Fixed to “ON”)
OFF This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card.
7ON A-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.
OFF × µ-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.
8 OFF × Fixed OFF (Not used).
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 199
Revision 1.0
PH-CK16-APhase Lock Oscillator
Note 2: When this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U system, the DCS clock from the ISWM is used. The DTIclock can also be used as an alternate clock supply route in case of DCS clock failure.
Note 3: When this card is mounted in ISWM, set to “ON (=CLK card is not used).”If mounted in TSWM0 on LN/LMG,• set to “OFF” if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is used.• set to “ON” if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is not used.
SW02Note 2
1ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.
OFF DIU 0 is not used.
2ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.
OFF DIU 1 is not used.
3ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.
OFF DIU 2 is not used.
4ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.
OFF DIU 3 is not used.
5ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 0.
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 0.
6ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 1.
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 1.
7ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 2.
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 2.
8ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 3.
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 3.
SW10
1ON External hold tone source is used via FM lead.
OFF × MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone.
2Note 3
ON CLK card is not used.
OFF CLK card is used.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 200Revision 1.0
PH-CK16-APhase Lock Oscillator
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW11
1
2
3
4
SW12
1
2
3
4ON Not used.
OFF × Not used.
5MUSIC (CH1) selection. The music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card.
6
7
8ON Not used.
OFF × Not used.
SW11-1 SW11-2Impedance of the External
Music Source 0 (FM 0)
OFF OFF 600 ΩON OFF 8.2 ΩOFF ON 47K Ω
SW11-3 SW11-4Impedance of the External
Music Source 1 (FM 1)
OFF OFF 600 ΩON OFF 8.2 ΩOFF ON 47K Ω
SW12-1 SW12-2 SW12-3 MUSIC
OFF OFF OFF Für Elise
ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer
Don’t Care ON OFF Buzzer
Don’t Care OFF ON Chime
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 201
Revision 1.0
PH-CK16-APhase Lock Oscillator
6. External Interface
PLO leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1.
• PLO mounting slots
The PLO card is mounted in Slots 21 and 23 of TSWM.
• LT cable connectors
Connect the LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the TSWM backplane.
Figure 3-13 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
EX
CLK
0
EX
CLK
1P
LO
PLO
TSW
Front View
TSWM
EXCLK0
EXCLK1
TSWM
Backplane
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 202Revision 1.0
PH-CK16-APhase Lock Oscillator
• EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment
Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from adigital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the four inputs. (There are a maximum of four inputs.)DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) → DIU3xx (low).
Figure 3-13 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (2/2)
PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1.
• PLO mounting slots
The PLO card is mounted in Slots 09 and 13 of ISWM.
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A
REAR VIEW
EXCLK0EXCLK1
TSWM
MDF
Installation Cable To Digital Interface and/or DCS
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Cable Lead Location
26272829303132333435363738
12345678910111213
FM1FM0
DIU3BDIU2BDIU1BDIU0B
DCSB
SYN1BSYN0B
EE
DIU3ADIU2ADIU1ADIU0A
DCSA
SYN1ASYN0A
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23
EX
CLK
0
EX
CLK
1P
LO
PLO
Front View
ISWM
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 203
Revision 1.0
PH-CK16-APhase Lock Oscillator
• LT cable connectors
Connect LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the ISWM backplane.
Figure 3-14 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2)
• EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment
Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from adigital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of four inputs. (There are a maximum of four inputs.) DIUleads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) → DIU3xx (low).
Figure 3-14 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (2/2)
EXCLK1 EXCLK0
Backplane
ISWM
MDF
To Digital Interface and/or DCSInstallation Cable
ISWMEXCLK0(Slot No.09)EXCLK1
(Slot No.13)
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A
Rear View 26272829303132333435363738
12345678910111213
FM1FM0
DIU3BDIU2BDIU1BDIU0B
DCSB
SYN1BSYN0B
EE
DIU3ADIU2ADIU1ADIU0A
DCSA
SYN1ASYN0A
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 204Revision 1.0
PH-CK16-APhase Lock Oscillator
• Cable Connection Diagram
Provide the following wiring at the MDF. The connection diagram in Figure 3-15 shows an example of asystem with the PLO cards in dual configuration.
Figure 3-15 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External High-Stability Oscillator
MDF
ISW/CMG
ExternalHigh-StabilityOscillator #1
CLK
ExternalHigh-StabilityOscillator #0
CLK
PCM Cable(IP)
PCM Cable(IP)
DCSA
DCSBLT Connector Cable
EXCLK1DCSB
DCSALT Connector Cable
EXCLK0
EXCLK1
PLO#1
EXCLK0
PLO#0
BASEU
ISWM
maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24 AWG)
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 205
Revision 1.0
PH-CK16-APhase Lock Oscillator
Figure 3-16 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface in LN/LMG. This example assumesthat the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route.
Figure 3-16 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface
MDF
ISW/CMG
LN/LMG
PCMCarrier
EquipmentDSU
CLK
PCM Cable (2P) to other node
Installation Cable
Installation Cable
maximum 100meters (330 feet) (24AWG)
Installation Cable RA
RB
TA
TB
POUTA
POUTB
DIU0A0
DIU0B0
DIU1A0
DIU1B0
DIU2A0
DIU2B0
DIU3A0
DIU3B0
DIU0A1
DIU0B1
DIU1A1
DIU1B1
DIU2A1
DIU2B1
DIU3A1
DIU3B1
EXCLK0
PLO#0
LT Connector
DigitalInterface
EXCLK1
PLO#1
maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24AWG)
Note 1:
Note 1
Note 2
PLO has a maximum 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority.
Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 206Revision 1.0
PH-CK16-APhase Lock Oscillator
Figure 3-17 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1)
26 1
LEADNAME
LEADNAME
27 228 3
PINNo.
PINNo.
29 430 5
FM1FM0
31 632 733 834 93536
1011
E
DIU 3BDIU 2B
DIU 3ADIU 2A
E
DIU 1B DIU 1ADIU 0B DIU 0A
CLK00(Slot No.08)
CLK10(Slot No.12)
TSWM1TSWM0
ISWM
Installation Cable
DIU Connection Note MDF
To Digital Interface
EXCLK0(Slot No.21)
PLO CLOCK0(Slot No.21)
EXCLK1(Slot No.23)
PLO CLOCK1(Slot No.23)
PLO CLOCK0(Slot No.21)
PLO CLOCK1(Slot No.23)
ISW-LN PLO CA-A
PLO-CLK CA-A
DCS Connection
Note: For the DUI connection route diagram, see Figure 3-18.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 207
Revision 1.0
PH-CK16-APhase Lock Oscillator
Figure 3-18 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface. This figure assumes that the DigitalTrunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route. (This connection is not required for IPX-UMGsystem.)
Figure 3-18 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface
DIU0A1DIU0B1DIU1A1DIU1B1DIU2A1DIU2B1DIU3A1DIU3B1
DIU0A0DIU0B0DIU1A0DIU1B0DIU2A0DIU2B0DIU3A0DIU3B0
RARBTATB
POUT APOUT B
PCM Cable (2P) to other nodePCM
CarrierEquipment
DSU
CLK
Note 1:
Note 2
Note 1
PLO has a maximum of 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes.DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority.
Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.
MDF
maximum 100meters (330 feet) (24AWG)
Installation Cable
LT Connector
Installation Cable
Installation Cable
EXCLK1
PLO#1
EXCLK0
PLO#0
DigitalInterface
IMG
maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24 AWG)
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 208Revision 1.0
PH-CK16-APhase Lock Oscillator
Figure 3-19 Connection of External Music-On-Hold
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE
MB
SW01
SW02
SW03
SW10
SW11
SW12
ISW-LN PLO CA-A cable/34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A
Pin Assignment
PINNo.2627282930313233
LEADNAMEFM1FM0
LEADNAME
EE
PINNo.123456789
MUSICSOURCE
MDF
ISW-LN PLO CA-A/34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A andInstallation Cable(25 P)
Multiple connections between systems 0 and 1are required on the MDF.
Note
Note: FM1 is not used at this time.
ON
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1 2 ON
1ON
2 3 4
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 209
Revision 1.0
PH-CK17Phase Lock Oscillator
PH-CK17Phase Lock Oscillator
1. General Function
This circuit card, used together with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronizationwith the network. Since this circuit card provides a high precision base clock oscillator, the 4 IMG systemcan be a clock source office for the digital network. As seen in Figure 3-20, the PLO can be redundantregardless of the system switching network selection.
Figure 3-20 Location of PH-CK17 (PLO) Card in the System
TDSW00 TDSW01 TDSW02 TDSW03
SEL
PLL PLL
PLO #0 PLO #1
OSC OSC
TDSW10 TDSW11 TDSW12 TDSW13
SEL
34PH EXCLK CA-A 34PH EXCLK CA-A
MDF
MDF
BWB BWB
BWBBWB
DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE
DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE
DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE
DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCEDCS 0
DCS 1
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 210Revision 1.0
PH-CK17Phase Lock Oscillator
The source clock of the clock subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the digital interfaceclock (DIU0 - DIU3). When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another clock sourceautomatically in the order of:
1. DCS
2. DIU0
3. DIU1
4. DIU2
5. DIU3
6. PLO changeover or the PLO internal oscillator drifting
The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows:
• 32.768 MHz CLK
• 8 KHz FH
• 5 msec × “n” FH
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 211
Revision 1.0
PH-CK17Phase Lock Oscillator
The MUSIC ROM also located on this circuit card contains the hold tone, and is supplied to the TSW circuitcard. When an external music on hold is applied to the 4 IMG system, this circuit card provides the interface forthe external hold tone source.
Figure 3-21 Music Source
SEL
SEL
SEL
Speech Path Memoryfor Music/Tone
Music/Tone
MUSIC ROM
TDSW00
PLO#0
TONE ROM
SEL
SEL
SEL
Speech Path Memoryfor Music/Tone
Music/Tone
MUSIC ROM
TDSW1
PLO#1
TONE ROM
FM
FM
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 212Revision 1.0
PH-CK17Phase Lock Oscillator
2. Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-22.
Figure 3-22 Face Layout of PH-CK17 (PLO)
TSWMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
TSWM
PLO
0
PLO
1
1 2 3 4
1 2
SW06
SW05
SW04
MB
ACT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MJMNSYNCICKPALM
SW01
SW02
SW03
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 213
Revision 1.0
PH-CK17Phase Lock Oscillator
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
ACTGreen Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.
Off Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state.
MJ Red
Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:
• All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office.
• 32.768 MHz output clock failure.
• 8 KHz output FH failure.
• 5 msec × “n” output FH failure.
• Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card).
• Internal OSC (±0.3 ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock source office.
MN Red
Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:
• One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes failed.
• Drifting failure.
• Internal OSC (±0.3 ppm deviation) failure.
SYNC
Green Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.
OFF
Remains off when either of the following has occurred.
• DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS.
• DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI.
• Drifting failure.
ICK Green Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally.
PALM Red Remains lit when power is abnormal.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 214Revision 1.0
PH-CK17Phase Lock Oscillator
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit card Make-busy.
DOWN × Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
SW03 1 - F 1 Fixed to “1.”
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW01
1ON Clock subordinate office.
OFF Clock source office.
2ON Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.
OFF Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.
3ON Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.
OFF Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.
4
ON8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
OFF8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
5
ONWhen clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.
OFFWhen clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock.
6
ONThis circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card and 5m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card.
OFFThis circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card.
7ON A-law CODEC is used for the hold music.
OFF × µ-law CODEC is used for the hold music.
8 OFF × Not used.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 215
Revision 1.0
PH-CK17Phase Lock Oscillator
SW02
1ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.
OFF DIU 0 is not used.
2ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.
OFF DIU 1 is not used.
3ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.
OFF DIU 2 is not used.
4ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.
OFF DIU 3 is not used.
5ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 0
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 0
6ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 1
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 1
7ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 2
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 2
8ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 3
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 3
SW051
ON External hold tone source is used via FM lead.
OFF × MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone.
2 OFF Not used.
SW06
1
2
3
4
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW8F-1 SW8F-2Impedance of the External
Music Source 0 (FM 0)
OFF OFF 600 ΩON OFF 8.2 ΩOFF ON 47K Ω
SW8F-3 SW8F-4Impedance of the External
Music Source 1 (FM 1)
OFF OFF 600 ΩON OFF 8.2 ΩOFF ON 47K Ω
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 216Revision 1.0
PH-CK17Phase Lock Oscillator
SW04
1
Note: Don’t care.
2
3
4ON Not used.
OFF × Not used.
5MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card.
6
7
8ON Not used.
OFF × Not used.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SWA0-1 SWA0-2 SWA0-3 MUSIC
OFF OFF OFF Für Elise
ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer
Note OFF ON Buzzer
Note ON OFF Chime
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 217
Revision 1.0
PH-CK17Phase Lock Oscillator
5. External Interface
When this circuit card is located in the TSWM, connect 34PH EXCLK CA-A to the EXCLK0/EXCLK1connectors on the backplane of the TSWM.
Figure 3-23 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23Slot No.
TSWM
FRONT VIEW
PLO
#1
PLO
#0
26 1
FM 127 2
FM 028 3
SYN 1B
E29 4
SYN 0B
E30 5
DIU 3B
SYN 1A31 6
DIU 2B
SYN 0A32 7
DIU 1B
DIU 3A33 8
DIU 0B
DIU 2A34 9
DCS B
DIU 1A35 10 DIU 0A36 11 DCS A37 1238 13
EXCLK0(Slot No.21)
EXCLK1(Slot No.23)
TSWM
REAR VIEW
34PH EXCLK CA-A
34PH EXCLK CA-A
34PH EXCLK CA-A LEAD ACCOMMODATION
Installation Cable
MDF
To Digital Interface and/or DCS
Mounting Module TSWM
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 218Revision 1.0
PH-CK17Phase Lock Oscillator
Figure 3-24 Connecting Route Diagram
DCSB1DIU0A1DIU0B1DIU1A1DIU1B1DIU2A1DIU2B1DIU3A1DIU3B1
DCSA1
DCSB0DIU0A0DIU0B0DIU1A0DIU1B0DIU2A0DIU2B0DIU3A0DIU3B0
DCSA0
POUT BPOUT A
POUT BPOUT A
POUT BPOUT A
POUT BPOUT ACCT /DTI
/PRT
CCT /DTI/PRT
CCT /DTI/PRT
CCT /DTI/PRT
PLO #0
PLO #1
DCS
Note : The following circuit cards have Clock Output Leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA-30CCTB),DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (PA-24PRT, PA-30PRTC).
MDFPBX
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 219
Revision 1.0
PH-CK17Phase Lock Oscillator
6. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MB
SW01
SW02
SW03
SW05
SW06
SW04
ON
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1 2 ON
1 2 3 4 ON
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 220Revision 1.0
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
1. General Function
This circuit card used with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization betweennetworks. Since this circuit card provides a high precision base clock oscillator, the system containing thiscircuit card can be a clock source office of the digital network. As seen in Figure 3-25, the PLO can beredundant regardless of the system switching network selection.
Figure 3-25 Location of PH-CK17-A in 4-IMG System
OSC64K+8K
(BWB)
(BWB)
CLK, FH, WFHACT, ALM
34PH EXCLK CA-A
PLO #0
TSW 00
BWB BWB
DTI0 DCS0
(MDF)
DCS11 2 3
PLO #1
SEL
PLL
Drv
SEL
PLL
Drv
OSC
34PH EXCLK CA-A
TSW 01 TSW 02 TSW 03 TSW 00 TSW 01 TSW 02 TSW 03
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 221
Revision 1.0
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
Figure 3-26 Location of PH-CK17-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System
LN0/LMG0(IMG2/IMG3)
LN3/LMG3(IMG2/IMG3)/(IMG14/IMG15)
32M, FH+WFHPLO ACT
32M, FH+WFHPLO ACT
CLK1(TSWM1)
TSW10~13
CLK0(TSWM1)
TSW00~03
MUX(System1)
MUX(System0)
LC/TRK
HSW00
ISWM
HSW01
CLK1(TSWM1)
TSW10~13
CLK0(TSWM1)
TSW00~03
MUX(System1)
MUX(System0)
LC/TRK
LN0/LMG0(IMG0/IMG1)
fromLN/LMG DTI
fromLN/LMG DTI
32M, FH+WFHPLO ACT
32M, FH+WFHPLO ACT(BWB)
32M, FH+WFHPLO ACT
(BWB)
64K+FH, WFHTSW ACT
(Cable)
64K+FH, WFHTSW ACT
(Cable)
PLO 1(TSWM0)
TSW10~13
PLO 0(TSWM0)
TSW00~03
MUX(System1)
MUX(System0)
LC/TRK
LN3/LMG3(IMG0/IMG1)/(IMG12/IMG13)
32M, FH+WFHPLO ACT
PLO 1(TSWM0)
TSW10~13
PLO 0(TSWM0)
TSW00~03
MUX(System1)
MUX(System0)
LC/TRK
TSW00 TSW03
HSW10
OSC64K+8K
(BWB)
(BWB)
CLK, FH, WFHACT, ALM
PLO 0
DTI0 DCS0 (MDF) DCS11 2 3
PLO 1
SEL
PLL
Drv
HSW11
TSW10 TSW13
SEL
PLL
Drv
OSC
~
~ ~
~
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 222Revision 1.0
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
2. Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.
This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.
<For 4-IMG System>
<For IPX-U/IPX-UMG System>
TSWM0(IMG1)Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
TSWM(IMG1)Mounting Module
PLO
(#0)
PLO
(#1)
ISWMMounting Module
TSWM0(IMG1/5/9/13)Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PLO
(#0)
PLO
(#1)
PLO
(#0)
PLO
(#1)
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 223
Revision 1.0
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-27:
Figure 3-27 Face Layout of PH-CK17-A (PLO)
1 2 3 4
1 2
SW11
SW10
SW12
MB
OPE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW01
SW02
SW03
12
34
56
78
12
34
56
78
MJMNSYNCICK
CKPKGALM0ALM1
PALM
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 224Revision 1.0
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below:
Note: This lamp is effective when this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system. When this cardis mounted in ISWM, this lamp is not used.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.
MJ Red
Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:
• All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office
• 32.768 MHz output clock failure (including CLK card)
• 8 KHz output clock failure (including CLK card)
• Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card)
• Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) have failed when the system operates as the clock source office
MN Red
Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:
• One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed
• Drifting failure
• Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) failure
SYNC Green Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.
ICK Green Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally.
CKPKGNote
Green Lights when the CLK card in TSWM1 is in normal operation.
ALM0Note
Red Lights when clock failure has occurred in the CLK card.
ALM1Note
Red Lights when FH failure has occurred in the CLK card.
PALM Red Remains lit when the On-Board Power Supply is abnormal.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 225
Revision 1.0
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit card Make-busy.
DOWN × Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
SW03 1 - F 1 Fixed to “1.”
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 226Revision 1.0
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
The key setting of “SW01” differs depending on the mounting location.
[Mounted in ISWM of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System or TSWM of 4-IMG System]
Note 1: When this card is used in the 4-IMG or ISWM of IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, specify the clock source (DCSor DTI) according to the clock network configuration for the office.
Note 2: This standard setting is applicable when this card is mounted in ISWM of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW01
1ON
×Note 2
Clock subordinate office.
OFF Clock source office.
2
ON Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.
OFF×
Note 2Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.
3
ON Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.
OFF×
Note 2Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.
4
ON8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
OFF×
Note 28 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
5
ONWhen clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.
OFF×
Note 2When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO keeps on outputting the current phase clock.
6
ONThis circuit card is used associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card and 5 m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card.
OFF×
Note 2This circuit card is not used associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card.
7ON A-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.
OFF × µ-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.
8 OFF × Fixed to “OFF” (Not used).
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 227
Revision 1.0
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
[Mounted in TSWM0 of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System]
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW01
1ON × Clock subordinate office. (Fixed)
OFF Clock source office.
2
ONDigital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.)
OFFDigital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.)
3
ONDigital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.)
OFFDigital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.)
4
ON8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
OFF × 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
5
ONWhen clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.
OFF × When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock.
6
ON ×This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card and 5 m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card.(Fixed to “ON” )
OFFThis circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card.
7ON A-law CODEC is used for Music-On-Hold.
OFF × µ-law CODEC is used for Music-On-Hold.
8 OFF × Fixed OFF (Not used).
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 228Revision 1.0
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
Note 1: When this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, DCS clock from the ISWM is used.The DTI clock can also be used as an alternate clock supply route in case of DCS clock failure.
Note 2: When this card is mounted in ISWM, set to “ON (=CLK card is not used).”If mounted in TSWM0 on LN/LMG,• set to “OFF” if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is used.• set to “ON” if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is not used.
SW02Note 1
1ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.
OFF DIU 0 is not used.
2ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.
OFF DIU 1 is not used.
3ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.
OFF DIU 2 is not used.
4ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.
OFF DIU 3 is not used.
5ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 0.
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 0.
6ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 1.
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 1.
7ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 2.
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 2.
8ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 3.
OFF 2 M clock for DIU 3.
SW10
1ON External hold tone source is used via FM lead.
OFF × MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone.
2Note 2
ON CLK card is not used.
OFF × CLK card is used.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 229
Revision 1.0
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW11
1
2
3
4
SW12
1
2
3
4ON Not used.
OFF × Not used.
5MUSIC (CH1) selection. The music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card.
6
7
8ON Not used.
OFF × Not used.
SW11-1 SW11-2Impedance of the External
Music Source 0 (FM 0)
OFF OFF 600 ΩON OFF 8.2 ΩOFF ON 47K Ω
SW11-3 SW11-4Impedance of the External
Music Source 1 (FM 1)
OFF OFF 600 ΩON OFF 8.2 ΩOFF ON 47K Ω
SW12-1 SW12-2 SW12-3 MUSIC
OFF OFF OFF Für Elise
ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer
Don’t Care ON OFF Buzzer
Don’t Care OFF ON Chime
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 230Revision 1.0
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
6. External Interface
PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1
• PLO mounting slots
The PLO card is mounted in Slots 21 and 23 of TSWM.
• LT cable connectors
Connect the LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the TSWM backplane.
Figure 3-28 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
EX
CLK
0
EX
CLK
1P
LO
PLO
TSW
Front View
TSWM
EXCLK0
EXCLK1
TSWM
Backplane
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 231
Revision 1.0
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
• EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment
Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from adigital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the four inputs. (There are a maximum of four inputs.)DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) DIU3xx (low).
Figure 3-28 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG) (2/2)
PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1.
• PLO mounting slots
The PLO card is mounted in Slots 09 and 13 of ISWM.
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A
REAR VIEW
EXCLK0EXCLK1
TSWM
MDF
Installation Cable To Digital Interface and/or DCS
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Cable Lead Location
26272829303132333435363738
12345678910111213
FM1FM0
DIU3BDIU2BDIU1BDIU0B
DCSB
SYN1BSYN0B
EE
DIU3ADIU2ADIU1ADIU0A
DCSA
SYN1ASYN0A
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
EX
CLK
0
EX
CLK
1P
LO
PLO
Front View
ISWM
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 232Revision 1.0
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
• LT cable connectors
Connect LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the ISWM backplane.
Figure 3-29 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2)
• EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment
Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from adigital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the four inputs. (There are a maximum of four inputs.)DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) DIU3xx (low).
Figure 3-29 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (2/2)
EXCLK1 EXCLK0
Backplane
ISWM
MDF
To Digital Interface and/or DCSInstallation Cable
ISWMEXCLK0(Slot No.09)EXCLK1
(Slot No.13)
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A
Rear View 26272829303132333435363738
12345678910111213
FM1FM0
DIU3BDIU2BDIU1BDIU0B
DCSB
SYN1BSYN0B
EE
DIU3ADIU2ADIU1ADIU0A
DCSA
SYN1ASYN0A
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 233
Revision 1.0
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
• Cable Connection Diagram
Provide the following wiring at the MDF. The connection diagram in Figure 3-30 shows an example of asystem that has the PLO cards in dual configuration.
Figure 3-30 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External High-Stability Oscillator
MDF
ISW/CMG
ExternalHigh-StabilityOscillator #1
CLK
ExternalHigh-StabilityOscillator #0
CLK
PCM Cable(IP)
PCM Cable(IP)
DCSA
DCSBLT Connector Cable
EXCLK1DCSB
DCSALT Connector Cable
EXCLK0
EXCLK1
PLO#1
EXCLK0
PLO#0
BASEU
ISWM
maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24 AWG)
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 234Revision 1.0
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
Figure 3-31 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface in LN/LMG. This example assumesthat the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route.
Figure 3-31 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface
MDF
ISW/CMG
LN/LMG
PCMCarrier
EquipmentDSU
CLK
PCM Cable (2P) to other node
Installation Cable
Installation Cable
maximum 100meters (330 feet) (24AWG)
Installation Cable RA
RB
TA
TB
POUTA
POUTB
DIU0A0
DIU0B0
DIU1A0
DIU1B0
DIU2A0
DIU2B0
DIU3A0
DIU3B0
DIU0A1
DIU0B1
DIU1A1
DIU1B1
DIU2A1
DIU2B1
DIU3A1
DIU3B1
EXCLK0
PLO#0
LT Connector
DigitalInterface
EXCLK1
PLO#1
maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24AWG)
Note 1:
Note 1
Note 2
PLO has a maximum 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority.
Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 235
Revision 1.0
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
Figure 3-32 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1)
CLK00(Slot No.08)
CLK10(Slot No.12)
TSWM1TSWM0
ISWM
Installation Cable
DIU Connection Note MDF
To Digital Interface
EXCLK0(Slot No.21)
PLO CLOCK0(Slot No.21)
EXCLK1(Slot No.23)
PLO CLOCK1(Slot No.23)
PLO CLOCK0(Slot No.21)
PLO CLOCK1(Slot No.23)
ISW-LN PLO CA-A
PLO-CLK CA-A
DCS Connection
Note: For DIU connection route diagram, see the figure on the next page.
26 1
LEADNAME
LEADNAME
27 228 3
PINNo.
PINNo.
29 430 5
FM1FM0
31 632 733 834 935 10
E
DIU 3BDIU 2B
DIU 3ADIU 2A
E
DIU 1B DIU 1ADIU 0B DIU 0A
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 236Revision 1.0
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
Figure 3-33 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface. This figure assumes that the DigitalTrunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route. (This connection is not required for IPX-UMGsystem.)
Figure 3-33 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface
DIU0A1DIU0B1DIU1A1DIU1B1DIU2A1DIU2B1DIU3A1DIU3B1
DIU0A0DIU0B0DIU1A0DIU1B0DIU2A0DIU2B0DIU3A0DIU3B0
RARBTATB
POUT APOUT B
PCM Cable (2P) to other nodePCM
CarrierEquipment
DSU
CLK
Note 1:
Note 2
Note 1
PLO has a maximum of 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes.DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority.
Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.
MDF
maximum 100meters (330 feet) (24AWG)
Installation Cable
LT Connector
Installation Cable
Installation Cable
EXCLK1
PLO#1
EXCLK0
PLO#0
DigitalInterface
IMG
maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24 AWG)
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 237
Revision 1.0
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
Figure 3-34 Connection of External Music-On-Hold
ISW-LN PLO CA-A cable/34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A
Pin Assignment
PINNo.2627282930313233
LEADNAMEFM1FM0
LEADNAME
EE
PINNo.123456789
MUSICSOURCE
MDF
ISW-LN PLO CA-A /34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A andInstallation Cable(25P)
Multiple connections between the systems 0 and 1are required on the MDF.
Note
Note: FM1 is not used at this time.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 238Revision 1.0
PH-CK17-APhase Lock Oscillator
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE
MB
SW01
SW02
SW03
SW10
SW11
SW12
ON
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1 2 ON
1ON
2 3 4
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 239
Revision 1.0
PH-CK18Clock
PH-CK18Clock
1. General Function
This circuit card is used for the Local Node (LN) of the IPX-U system or used for the Local Module Group(LMG) of the IPX-UMG system. The main function of this circuit card is to supply basic clock signals tothe system. This card receives clock signals from the Phase Lock Oscillator (PLO) located in TSWM0 ofIMG1/5/9/13, distributing the following signals to the Time Division Switch (TSW) located in TSWM1 ofIMG2/6/10/14.
• 32.768 MHz CLK• 8 KHz FH• 5 msec × “n” FH (for Wireless System)
Figure 3-35 Location of PH-CK18 (CLK)
LN0/LMG0 (IMG2/IMG3)
LN3/LMG3 (IMG2/IMG3) /(IMG14/IMG15)
32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT
32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT
CLK1 (TSWM1)
TSW 10~13
CLK0 (TSWM1)
TSW 00~03
MUX (System1)
MUX (System0)
LC/TRK
HSW00
ISW
HSW01
CLK1 (TSWM1)
TSW 10~13
CLK0 (TSWM1)
TSW 00~03
MUX (System1)
MUX (System0)
LC/TRK
LN0/LMG0 (IMG0/IMG1)
from LN/LMG DTI
from LN/LMG DTI
32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT
32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT (BWB)
32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT
(BWB)
64K+FH, WFH TSW ACT
(Cable)
64K+FH, WFH TSW ACT
(Cable)
PLO 1 (TSWM0)
TSW 10~13
PLO 0 (TSWM0)
TSW 00~03
MUX (System1)
MUX (System0)
LC/TRK
LN3/LMG3 (IMG0/IMG1) /(IMG12/IMG13)
32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT
PLO 1 (TSWM0)
TSW 10~13
PLO 0 (TSWM0)
TSW 00~03
MUX (System1)
MUX (System0)
LC/TRK
TSW00 TSW03
HSW10
OSC64K+8K
(BWB)
(BWB)
CL K, FH, W F H A C T, A LM
PLO 0
DTI0 DCS0 (MDF) DCS11 2 3
PLO 1
SEL
PLL
Drv
HSW11
TSW10 TSW13
SEL
PLL
Drv
OSC
~
~ ~
~
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 240Revision 1.0
PH-CK18Clock
2. Mounting Location/Condition
Mounting locations for this circuit card are shown below.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of each lamp and switch on this circuit card is shown in the figure below:
Figure 3-36 Face Layout of PH-CK18 (CLK)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
CLK
(#0)TSWM1(IMG2/6/10/14)Mounting Module
CLK
(#1)
MB
OPE
ALM0ALM1
PALM
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 241
Revision 1.0
PH-CK18Clock
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown below:
5. Switch Settings
Switch settings for this circuit card are shown below.
LAMP COLOR MEANING
OPE Green Lights when this circuit card is in ACT state.
ALM 0 Red Lights when clock signal failure has occurred.
ALM 1 Red Lights when Frame Head signal failure has occurred.
PALM Red Lights when the On Board Power Supply failure has occurred.
SWITCH NAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBON Circuit card Make-busy.
OFF × Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 242Revision 1.0
PH-CK18Clock
6. External Interface
Figure 3-37 LT Connector Lead Location (ISWM-TSWM0/1)
CLK00 (Slot No.08)
CLK10 (Slot No.12)
TSWM1TSWM0
ISWM
Installation Cable
DIU Connection Note MDF
To Digital Interface and/or DCS
EXCLK0 (Slot No.21)
PLO CLOCK0 (Slot No.21)
EXCLK1 (Slot No.23)
PLO CLOCK1 (Slot No.23)
PLO CLOCK0 (Slot No.21)
PLO CLOCK1 (Slot No.23)
ISW-LN PLO CA-A
PLO-CLK CA-A
DCS Connection
26 1
LEAD NAME
LEAD NAME
27 2
28 3
PIN No.
PIN No.
29 430 531 632 733 834 935 10
DIU 3BDIU 2B
DIU 3ADIU 2A
DIU 1B
DIU 1ADIU 0B DIU 0A
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 243
Revision 1.0
PH-CK18Clock
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MBON
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 244Revision 1.0
PA-8COTBJCentral Office Trunk
PA-8COTBJCentral Office Trunk
1. General Function
The PA-8COTBJ (8COT) circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 8C.O. lines and thesystem. And this card also provides the caller ID service. Depending upon keys setting of this card, the firstcircuit on this card can be used as an interface for Paging Equipment. In this instance, the second circuit isalso used for the purpose of activating the Paging Equipment. Example of the Paging Equipment and CallerID service are illustrated below. In addition, the appropriate value of Terminal Impedance and BalancingNetwork (BNW) can be selected by key setting.
Figure 3-38 Location of PA-8COTBJ (8COT) Card within the System
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-8COTBJ (8COT) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
This diagram shows an example where this card is used as both a PGT and COTs.
Terminal
INT
"555-1234"
AttendantConsole
ATI
SW INT
COT
circuit 1
circuit 2
circuit 7
circuit 8
PA-8COTBJ MDF
Speech Line
Control Line
G
"555-1234"
PAGINGEQUIPMENT
To Battery
PUBLIC
NETWORK
"555-1234"
Terminal
Local I/O Bus
MODEM
GTCPU
MODEM
COT
PGT
PGT
PIMMounting Module
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 245
Revision 1.0
PA-8COTBJCentral Office Trunk
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-39.
Figure 3-39 Face Layout of PA-8COTBJ (8COT)
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
8COT Lamp Indication Reference
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
BL0
BL7
Green
Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.
Flashes to the dial pulses being sent out for an outgoing call, or the corresponding circuit is in make busy state.
OFF BL-lamp remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
OPE
BL4~7
BL0~3
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW05
SW00(MB)
SW01(MB0-7)
-
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 246Revision 1.0
PA-8COTBJCentral Office Trunk
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCHSWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARDSETTING
MEANING
SW00(MB)
UP Circuit card make busy
DOWN × Circuit card make busy cancel
SW01(MB0-7)
ONRequest for make-busy of the trunk circuit corre-sponding to MB switch.
OFF × Request for cancelling the make-busy of the trunk cir-cuit corresponding to MB switch.
SW02 1-4
Terminal Impedance and B.N.W.setting
SW03
1 OFF × Fixed to OFF (Not Used)
2 OFF × Fixed to OFF (Not Used)
3 OFF × Fixed to OFF (Not Used)
4 OFF × Fixed to OFF (Not Used)
SW04
1 ON × Fixed to ON
2 OFF × Fixed to OFF
3 OFF × Fixed to OFF
4ON
Paging Trunk is available (When this switch is set to ON, CH0 and CH1 cannot be used as CO trunks.)
OFF Paging Trunk is not available.
SW05
1 OFF × Fixed to OFF
2 ON × Fixed to ON
3 OFF × Fixed to OFF
4 OFF × Fixed to OFF
SW0 (SW10) MEANINGS
1 2 3 4 B.N.W.Terminal
Impedance
OFF OFF OFF OFF EIA/TIA 464-A 600 Ω+2.16 µOFF ON ON OFF CCITT Q.517
900 Ω+2.16 µON ON ON OFF 900 Ω
Other Combinations Inhibited
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 247
Revision 1.0
PA-8COTBJCentral Office Trunk
6. External Interface
Figure 3-40 LT Connector Leads Accommodation
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
Accommodated in 3
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
B0 A0B1 A1B2 A2B3 A3B4 A4B5 A5B6 A6B7 A7
B0 A0B1 A1B2 A2B3 A3B4 A4B5 A5B6 A6B7 A7
B0 A0B1 A1B2 A2B3 A3B4 A4B5 A5B6 A6B7 A7
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 248Revision 1.0
PA-8COTBJCentral Office Trunk
Figure 3-41 Connecting Route Diagram
Table 3-1 Balancing Network and Terminal Impedance
Balancing Network Terminal Impedance
EIA/TIA 464-A
900Ω
CCITT Q. 517AT&T Echo Test
Network
Note: As illustrated above, two circuits (#0, #1) are required for connecting paging equipment.
• Cable Connections for Paging Equipment
PBX Installation Cable MDF
A0
B0LT Connector
A
BCOT
PUBLICNETWORK
PBX
COT
-48V
G
FUSE -48V
G
B
A
B1A1
Installation Cable MDF
LT Connector
A0
B0
G Control Line
Speech Path
PAGING EQUIPMENT
• Cable Connections for a C.O. Line
0.21µF
1 k Ω350 Ω
2.16µF600 Ω
600+2.16µ
900 Ω
2.16µF900 Ω
0.05µF100 Ω
800 Ω
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 249
Revision 1.0
PA-8COTBJCentral Office Trunk
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO.SWITCHNAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
SW00(MB)
UP: Circuit card make busy.DOWN: Circuit card make busy
cancel.
SW01(MB0-7)
Make Busy switches associated with No. 0 through No. 7 Circuits.ON: Make busy on each
circuit basis.OFF: Make busy cancel on
each circuit basis.
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW05
ON
ON
OFF
No.8No.7No.6No.5No.4No.3No.2No.1
1 2 3 4 ON
1 2 3 4 ON
1 2 3 4 ON
1 2 3 4 ON
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 250Revision 1.0
PA-16COTBECentral Office Trunk
PA-16COTBECentral Office Trunk
1. General Function
This circuit card is accommodated in the PIM and supports the following interface.
(a) Interface with 16 C.O. lines
(b) Interface with 14 C.O. lines and 1 Paging Equipment line.
Figure 3-42 Location of PA-16COTBE (16COT) Card within the System
TSW
LC
Paging Equipment
C.O. Line
COT
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 251
Revision 1.0
PA-16COTBECentral Office Trunk
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card are shown below.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
PIMMounting Module
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 252Revision 1.0
PA-16COTBECentral Office Trunk
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-43.
Figure 3-43 Face Layout of PA-16 COTBE (16COT)
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
BL0
BL15
Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.
FlashFlashes to the dial pulses being sent out for an outgoing call, or the corresponding circuit is in make busy state.
OFF BL- lamp remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
OPE
SW00(MB)
BL15
BL0
SW02(MB8-15)
SW01(MB0-7)
SW0 SW1
~
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 253
Revision 1.0
PA-16COTBECentral Office Trunk
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW00(MB)
UP Circuit card make busy
DOWN × Circuit card make busy cancel
SW01(MB0 ~ 7)
0ON No. 0 Circuit make busy
OFF × No. 0 Circuit make busy cancel
1ON No. 1 Circuit make busy
OFF × No. 1 Circuit make busy cancel
2ON No. 2 Circuit make busy
OFF × No. 2 Circuit make busy cancel
3ON No. 3 Circuit make busy
OFF × No. 3 Circuit make busy cancel
4ON No. 4 Circuit make busy
OFF × No. 4 Circuit make busy cancel
5ON No. 5 Circuit make busy
OFF × No. 5 Circuit make busy cancel
6ON No. 6 Circuit make busy
OFF × No. 6 Circuit make busy cancel
7ON No. 7 Circuit make busy
OFF × No. 7 Circuit make busy cancel
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 254Revision 1.0
PA-16COTBECentral Office Trunk
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW02(MB8 ~ 15)
0ON No. 8 Circuit make busy
OFF × No. 8 Circuit make busy cancel
1ON No. 9 Circuit make busy
OFF × No. 9 Circuit make busy cancel
2ON No. 10 Circuit make busy
OFF × No. 10 Circuit make busy cancel
3ON No. 11 Circuit make busy
OFF × No. 11 Circuit make busy cancel
4ON No. 12 Circuit make busy
OFF × No. 12 Circuit make busy cancel
5ON No. 13 Circuit make busy
OFF × No. 13 Circuit make busy cancel
6ON No. 14 Circuit make busy
OFF × No. 14 Circuit make busy cancel
7ON No. 15 Circuit make busy
OFF × No. 15 Circuit make busy cancel
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 255
Revision 1.0
PA-16COTBECentral Office Trunk
Note: Switch No.5-8 is only available when SP-3331 is used for E911 service. If SP-3003 is used, these switchesare fixed to off.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW0(SW10)
1 - 4
Terminal Impedance
5, 6
Wink Signal Detection Time.
7, 8
Answer Signal Detection Time.
SW0 (SW10) MEANING
1 2 3 4 Terminal impedance
OFF OFF OFF OFF 600 Ω + 2.16 µF
OFF ON ON OFF 900 Ω + 2.16 µF
Other Combinations Not used
SW0 (SW10)Detection Time
5 6
OFF OFF 56 ms
ON OFF 96 ms
OFF ON 136 ms
ON ON 176 ms
SW0 (SW10)Detection Time
7 8
OFF OFF 56 ms
ON OFF 96 ms
OFF ON 136 ms
ON ON 176 ms
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 256Revision 1.0
PA-16COTBECentral Office Trunk
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW1(SW11)
1ON × Fixed
OFF
2ON
OFF × Fixed
3
ON(Call abandon detecting condition - Disconnection if ringing signal does not arrive longer than three seconds.)
OFF × Fixed (Call abandon detecting condition - Disconnection if ringing signal does not arrive longer than six seconds.)
4
ONAvailability of Paging Function - No. 0 Circuit is used as a Paging trunk (No. 1 Circuit cannot be used as a C.O. trunk)
OFFAvailability of Paging Function - No. 0 Circuit is used as a C.O. trunk (No. 1 Circuit can be used as a C.O. trunk)
5ON
OFF × Fixed
6ON × Fixed
OFF
7ON
OFF × Fixed
8ON
OFF × Fixed
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 257
Revision 1.0
PA-16COTBECentral Office Trunk
PAD Setting
ARTD APADTRANSMIT(D-A) PAD
RECEIVE(A-D) PAD
REMARKS
7 15 0dB 0dB
2 2 3dB 3dB
3 3 6dB 6dB
4 4 0dB-5dB
(Gain)
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 258Revision 1.0
PA-16COTBECentral Office Trunk
6. External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown inFigure 3-44.
Figure 3-44 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2)
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B0B1
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
B2B3
Accommodated in 2
B4B5B6B7B8B9
B10B11B12B13B14B15
A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9
A10A11A12A13A14A15
B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9
B10B11B12B13B14B15
A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9
A10A11A12A13A14A15
1 2 1 2 1 21 2 1 2 1 2
PW
R
PW
R
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 259
Revision 1.0
PA-16COTBECentral Office Trunk
Figure 3-44 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2)
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
PW
R
PW
R
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0Highway Block
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B0B1
Accommodated in 3
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 ConnectorLT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
B2B3B4B5B6B7
A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7
B8B9
B10B11B12B13B14B15
A8A9
A10A11A12A13A14A15
3 3 3 3 3 3
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 260Revision 1.0
PA-16COTBECentral Office Trunk
Figure 3-45 Connecting Route Diagram (1/2)
Figure 3-45 Connecting Route Diagram (2/2)
NEAX2400 IPX
A0
MDF
C.O. LineA
BB0COT
Connection with C.O. Line
NEAX2400 IPX
A0
MDF
A
BB0COT
Connection with Paging Equipment
Paging Equipment
(MR)
B0
B1 G
G
-48V
FUSEG
Distibution Board
Speech Signal Leads
-48V
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 261
Revision 1.0
PA-16COTBECentral Office Trunk
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
SW00 (MB)UP : Circuit card make busyDOWN: Circuit card make busy
cancel
SW01 (MB0-7)
Make Busy Switches associated with No. 0 through No. 7 Circuits.ON : Make busy on each circuit
basis.OFF: Make busy cancel on each
circuit basis.
SW02 (MB8-15)
Make Busy Switches associated with No. 8 through No. 15 Circuits.ON : Make busy on each circuit
basis.OFF: Make busy cancel on each
circuit basis.
SW0
SW1
ON
OFF
ON
No.7 No.6 No.5 No.4 No.3 No.2 No.1 No.0
OFF
ON
No.7 No.6 No.5 No.4 No.3 No.2 No.1 No.0
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 262Revision 1.0
PA-CS02-CAttendant Interface
PA-CS02-CAttendant Interface
1. General Function
This circuit card is an attendant console (ATTCON) interface card which supports the interface functionfor accommodating ATTCON (maximum two sets of ATTCON per card), PM function (controlling of AT-TCON and exchanging of control commands with the CPU), PB/DP sending function (sending of PB sig-nals or DP signals under control of the PM), receiving data (ATTCON Call Termination Information) linkinterface function, etc. The PA-CS02-C card is exclusively for a system which adopts “µ-law” as its encod-ing law.
Figure 3-46 Location of PA-CS02-C (2ATI) Card within the System
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-CS02-C (ATI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.
CPU GATE
SW
INT
I/O Local Bus
12M PCM Highway
2M PCM Highway ×12
PM Bus ×2
ATTENDANTCONSOLE (×2)
: Control Line: Speech Path
IO Local Bus : Input Output Local Bus
PM Bus : Port Microprocessor Bus
ATI
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
ATI
ATI
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 263
Revision 1.0
PA-CS02-CAttendant Interface
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-47.
Figure 3-47 Face Layout of PA-CS02-C (2ATI)
OPE
N-OPE
MB
BLS1
BLS0
SW7
SW8
BLA1
BLA0
SW6
SW2
SW3
3210
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 264Revision 1.0
PA-CS02-CAttendant Interface
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
Table 3-2 ATI Card Lamp Indication
LAMP COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.
BLS0BLS1
Red Lights when the corresponding sender circuit is in use.
FlashFlashes when the corresponding sender circuit is in make-busy state or when select signals are being transmitted.
BLA0BLA1
Red Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.
Flash Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.
SWITCH SWITCHNO. SETTING STANDARD
SETTING MEANING
MB —UP Circuit card make busy
DOWN × Circuit card make busy cancel
SW2 (TAS1)SW3 (TAS0)
1
2
3
4
SETTING OF TAS CURRENT LIMIT RESISTANCESW2-1/SW3-1
SW2-2/SW3-2
SW2-3/SW3-3
SW2-4/SW3-4
RESISTANCE
ONOFFONOFFONOFFONOFF
ONONOFFOFFONONOFFOFF
ONONONONOFFOFFOFFOFF
OFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFF
0 Ω200 Ω390 Ω590 Ω820 Ω1020 Ω1210 Ω1410 Ω
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 265
Revision 1.0
PA-CS02-CAttendant Interface
SWITCH SWITCHNO. SETTING STANDARD
SETTING MEANING
SW6 (TAS1)SW7 (TAS0)
1
2
3
4
SW8
0ON No. 0 circuit make-busy request
OFF × Normal setting
1ON No. 1 circuit make-busy request
OFF × Normal setting
2 OFF × Not used
3 OFF × Not used
SETTING OF TAS SIGNALLING SYSTEM
SW6-1/SW7-1
SW6-2/SW7-2
SW6-3/SW7-3
SW6-4/SW7-4
TAS(A WIRE)
TAS(B WIRE)
ON ON ON ON -48V G
OFF ON OFF OFF CR G
OFF ON OFF ON G G
OFF OFF OFF ON LOOP LOOP
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 266Revision 1.0
PA-CS02-CAttendant Interface
6. External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card is as shown in Figure 3-48.
Figure 3-48 LT Connector Lead Accommodation
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200Group No.
Slot No.
PIM
Highway Block
AT
I
AT
I
1 2 3 4
ON
SW1
IC
ATT0
ATT1
LT
RLT
[ATT TERM (PZ-M366)]1 2 3 4
ON
SW0
To LT5/LT11
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
< LT Connector on the ATT TERM>
TAS 0A
TAS 1A
TAS 0B
TAS 1B
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
PIMMounting Module
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 267
Revision 1.0
PA-CS02-CAttendant Interface
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
12, 23
SW2
SW3
SW6
SW7
SW8
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ON
OFF
No.3No.2No.1No.0
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 268Revision 1.0
PA-CS08Hotel Attendant Interface
PA-CS08Hotel Attendant Interface
1. General Function
This circuit card is the Hotel Attendant Console (Hotel ATTCON) interface card that supports the interfacefunction for the Hotel ATTCON (maximum two sets of Hotel ATTCON per card), PM function (controllingof Hotel ATTCON and exchanging of control commands with the CPU), PB/DP sending function (sendingof PB signals or DP signals under control of the PM), receiving data (Hotel ATTCON Call TerminationInformation) link interface function, etc.
Figure 3-49 Location of PA-CS08 (HMATI) Card in the System
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-CS08 (HMATI) card can be mounted in the shaded slots as shown below.
CPU GT
TDSW
MUX
2M PCM Highway
PM Bus
ATTENDANTCONSOLE (×2)
: Control Line: Speech Path
I/O Local Bus : Input/Output Local Bus
PM Bus : Port Microprocessor Bus
HMATI
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
HM
AT
I
HM
AT
I
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 269
Revision 1.0
PA-CS08Hotel Attendant Interface
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-50.
Figure 3-50 Face Layout of PA-CS08 (HMATI) Card
OPE
N-OPE
MB
FU0 (Note )
SW11
BLS1
BLA1BLA0
SW04
SW03
SW02
SW08
SW07
SW09
SW12
3210
FU1 (Note )
BLS0
Note: When extracting/inserting this card, care should be taken as to the FU0, FU1.<Extraction> MB key → ON Remove the FU0 and FU1. Extract this card.<Insertion> Mount this card without the FU0 and FU1. Plug in the FU0 and FU1.
MB key → OFF
1 2 3
1 2
3
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 270Revision 1.0
PA-CS08Hotel Attendant Interface
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state.
BLS0BLS1
Red Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.
BlinkBlinks when the corresponding circuit is busy.
Note: The lamp also blinks when dial signals are being sent out.
BLA0BLA1
Red Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.
Blink Blinks when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 271
Revision 1.0
PA-CS08Hotel Attendant Interface
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings for various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCHSWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
MB
UP Circuit card Make-busy.
DOWNCircuit card Make-busy cancel.
SW02 (TAS0)SW03 (TAS1)
1
2
3
4
SW04
1 ON × Fixed
2 OFF × Fixed
3 ON × Fixed
4 OFF × Fixed
SW07 (TAS0)SW08 (TAS1)
1
2
3
4
SETTING OF TAS SIGNALLING SYSTEM
SWITCH TAS (A WIRE) TAS (B WIRE)
1 -48V G
2 CR G
3 G G
4 LOOP LOOP
SETTING OF TAS CURRENT LIMIT RESISTANCE
SW7-1/SW8-1
SW7-2/SW8-2
SW7-3/SW8-3
SW7-4/SW8-4
RESISTANCE
ONOFFONOFFONOFFONOFF
ONONOFFOFFONONOFFOFF
ONONONONOFFOFFOFFOFF
OFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFF
0 Ω200 Ω390 Ω590 Ω820 Ω
1020 Ω1210 Ω1410 Ω
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 272Revision 1.0
PA-CS08Hotel Attendant Interface
Note: When the PB signal is sent from the Hotel ATT, set the SW 12-1~4 ON, and assign AHSY command, INDEX114, b7 = I.
SWITCHSWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
SW11
1ON
OFF × Fixed
2ON
OFF × Fixed
3ON
OFF × Fixed
4ON
OFF × Fixed
SW12
1ON ×
Fixed (all ON)
OFF
2ON ×
OFF
3ON ×
OFF
4ON ×
OFF
SW9
0ON No. 0 System is in Make-busy request.
OFF × Normal setting
1ON No. 1 System is in Make-busy request.
OFF × Normal setting
2 OFF × Not used
3 OFF × Not used
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 273
Revision 1.0
PA-CS08Hotel Attendant Interface
6. External Interface
The location for the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-51.
Figure 3-51 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM)
PIMPIMMounting Module
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4LT5
1915181417131612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
23222120
HM
AT
I
Group No.
Slot No.
PIM
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
LT5, 11 Connector
(LT Connector on the ATT TERM)
TAS 0A0TAS 1A0
TAS 0B0TAS 1B0
LT11
HM
AT
I
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 274Revision 1.0
PA-CS08Hotel Attendant Interface
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MBUP: Circuit card Make-busy.DOWN: Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW07
SW08
SW09 SW9-2, SW9-3: Not used
SW11
SW12
ON
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
No. 3No. 2No. 1No. 0
ON
OFF
(Piano Switch)
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 275
Revision 1.0
PA-CS08-BHotel Attendant Interface
PA-CS08-BHotel Attendant Interface
1. General Function
This circuit card is Hotel attendant console (Hotel ATTCON) interface card which supports the interfacefunction for accommodating Hotel ATTCON (maximum two sets of Hotel ATTCON per card), PM func-tion (controlling of Hotel ATTCON and exchanging of control commands with the CPU), PB/DP sendingfunction (sending of PB signals or DP signals under control of the PM), receiving data (Hotel ATTCONCall Termination Information) link interface function, etc.
Figure 3-52 Location of PA-CS08-B (HMATI) Card within the System
CPU GT
TSW
MUX
I/O Local Bus
2M PCM Highway
PM Bus
ATTENDANTCONSOLE (×2)
: Control Line: Speech Path
I/O Local Bus : Input/Output Local Bus
PM Bus : Port Microprocessor Bus
HMATI
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 276Revision 1.0
PA-CS08-BHotel Attendant Interface
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-CS08-B (HMATI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
HM
ATI
HM
ATI
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 277
Revision 1.0
PA-CS08-BHotel Attendant Interface
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown below.
Figure 3-53 Face Layout of PA-CS08-B (HMATI)
OPE
N-OPE
MB
FU0 (Note)
SW11
BLS1
BLA1BLA0
SW04
SW03
SW02
SW08
SW07
SW09
SW12
3210
FU1 (Note)
BLS0
Note: When extracting/inserting this card, care should be taken as to the FU0, FU1.<Extraction> MB key → ON Remove the FU0 and FU1. Extract this card.<Insertion> Mount this card without the FU0 and FU1. Plug in the FU0 and FU1.
MB key → OFF
1 2 3
1 2
3
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 278Revision 1.0
PA-CS08-BHotel Attendant Interface
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating
N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state
BLS0BLS1
Red Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy
BlinkBlinks when the corresponding circuit is busy
Note: The lamp also blinks when dial signals are being sent out.
BLA0BLA1
Red Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy
Blink Blinks when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 279
Revision 1.0
PA-CS08-BHotel Attendant Interface
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCHSWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
MB UP Circuit card make busy
DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel
SW02 (TAS0)SW03 (TAS1)
1
2
3
4
SW04 1 ON × Fixed
2 OFF × Fixed
3 ON × Fixed
4 OFF × Fixed
SW07 (TAS0)SW08 (TAS1) 1
2
3
4
SETTING OF TAS SIGNALLING SYSTEM
SWITCH TAS (A WIRE) TAS (B WIRE)
1 -48V G
2 CR G
3 G G
4 LOOP LOOP
SETTING OF TAS CURRENT LIMIT RESISTANCE
SW7-1/SW8-1
SW7-2/SW8-2
SW7-3/SW8-3
SW7-4/SW8-4
RESISTANCE
ONOFFONOFFONOFFONOFF
ONONOFFOFFONONOFFOFF
ONONONONOFFOFFOFFOFF
OFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFF
0 Ω200 Ω390 Ω590 Ω820 Ω1020 Ω1210 Ω1410 Ω
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 280Revision 1.0
PA-CS08-BHotel Attendant Interface
Note: When PB signal is sent from the Hotel ATT, set the SW 12-1~ 4 ON, and assign AHSY command, INDEX114, b7 = I.
SWITCHSWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
SW111
ON
OFF × Fixed
2ON
OFF × Fixed
3ON
OFF × Fixed
4ON
OFF × Fixed
SW121
ON ×
Fixed (all ON)
OFF
2ON ×OFF
3ON ×OFF
4ON ×OFF
SW90
ON No. 0 System is in make-busy request.
OFF × Normal setting
1ON No. 1 System is in make-busy request.
OFF × Normal setting
2 OFF × Not used
3 OFF × Not used
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 281
Revision 1.0
PA-CS08-BHotel Attendant Interface
6. External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card is as shown in Figure 3-54.
Figure 3-54 LT Connector Lead Accommodation
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4LT5
1915181417131612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
23222120
HM
AT
I
Group No.
Slot No.
PIM
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
LT5, 11 Connector
(LT Connector on the ATT TERM)
TAS 0A0TAS 1A0
TAS 0B0TAS 1B0
LT11
HM
AT
I
PIMMounting Module
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 282Revision 1.0
PA-CS08-BHotel Attendant Interface
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MBUP: Circuit card make busyDOWN: Circuit card make busy cancel
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW07
SW08
SW09 SW9-2, SW9-3: Not used
SW11
SW12
ON
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
No. 3No. 2No. 1No. 0
ON
OFF
(Piano Switch)
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 283
Revision 1.0
PA-CS33Attendant Interface
PA-CS33Attendant Interface
1. General Function
This circuit card is a Desk Console interface which supports the interface function for accommodating twosets of Desk Consoles, PB/DP sender function and Trunk Answer from any Station (TAS) function.
Figure 3-55 Location of PA-CS33 (ATI) Card in the System
MUX
MUX
MUX
TSW/INT/PLO
MUX
CPR
GT
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
LC/TRK ATI
DESKCONSOLE
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 284Revision 1.0
PA-CS33Attendant Interface
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-CS33 (ATI) can be mounted in either Slot 12 or 23 of the PIM.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown in Figure 3-56.
Figure 3-56 Face Layout of PA-CS33 (ATI)
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
ATI
ATI
Universal Slots Universal Slots
SW00
OPE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW17
SW16
SW11 SW14
SW10
SW12 SW15
SW13
PALMBLA1BLA0
SW01
BLS1BLS0
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 285
Revision 1.0
PA-CS33Attendant Interface
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Setting
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPEGreen Remains lit while circuit card is operating normally.
OFF Off when circuit card is not operating.
PALMRed Lights when the power feeding circuit failure has occurred.
OFF Off when the power feeding circuit operates normally.
BLA0BLA1
RedLights when the corresponding circuit is busy (At the same time, turns off PA lamp on the Desk Console).
Flash (60 IPM)
Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state.
OFFOff when the corresponding circuit is in idle (At the same time, turns on PA lamp on the Desk console).
BLS0BLS1
Red Lights when the corresponding sender circuit is in use.
Flash (60 IPM)
Flashes when the corresponding sender circuit is in Make-busy state or when select sig-nals are being transmitted.
OFF Off when the corresponding sender circuit is in idle.
SWITCH NAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW00UP Circuit card is Make-busy.
DOWN × Circuit card is cancel for Make-busy.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW01
0ON × Make-busy cancel for #0 Desk Console.
OFF Make-busy request for #0 Desk Console.
1ON × Make-busy cancel for #1 Desk Console.
OFF Make-busy request for #1 Desk Console.
2 OFF × Not used.
3 OFF × Not used.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 286Revision 1.0
PA-CS33Attendant Interface
SW10 (TAS#0)
SW13 (TAS#1)
1
SW10 and SW13 designate the current limit resistance for TAS#0 and TAS#1 respectively.
2
3
4 This switch designates the TAS signaling system in conjunction with SW 11/12 and SW14/15.
SW11/ SW12
(TAS#0)
SW14/ SW15
(TAS#1)
SW11/12 and SW14/15 designate the TAS#0 and TAS#1 signaling system (in conjunction with SW10-4 (TAS#0)/SW13-4 (TAS#1).
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW10-3/ SW13-3
SW10-2/ SW13-2
SW10-1/ SW13-1
STANDARD SETTING
RESISTANCE
ON ON ON 0 Ω
ON ON OFF 220 Ω
ON OFF ON 398 Ω
ON OFF OFF 618 Ω
OFF ON ON 800 Ω
OFF ON OFF 1020 Ω
OFF OFF ON 1198 Ω
OFF OFF OFF × 1418 Ω
SW12/SW15
SW11/SW14
SW10-4/ SW13-4
STANDARD SETTING
SIGNAL WHEN SEIZED
TAS 0A/ TAS 1A
TAS 0B/TAS 1B
ON ON ON CR G
OFF ON ON -48V G
OFF OFF OFF × LOOP LOOP
OFF OFF ON G G
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 287
Revision 1.0
PA-CS33Attendant Interface
Note: DESK CONSOLE starts up in Day or Night mode according to this setting after the circuit cardinitialization, regardless of the mode before the initialization.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO
SETTING STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
SW16
1
For Business system, set SW16-1 and SW16-7 to OFF. When the system has Hotel applica-tion, set SW16-1 and SW16-7 according to system data as shown below.
2ON Desk Console Expanded LCD Display available.
OFF Desk Console Expanded LCD Display not available.
3 SW16-3/4/5 designates the nation code as shown below.
4
5
6ON A-law PCM coding.
OFF × µ-law PCM coding.
7 Refer to SW16-1.
8 OFF × Not used (Fixed to OFF).
SW17
1ON Denial of PCM receiving while transmitting PB signals.
OFF × PCM receives irrespective of PB signals transmission.
2 ON × Fixed to ON.
3
Desk Console Key Pattern. Set SW17-3 and SW17-4 according to SYS 1, Index 6.
4
5~7 OFF × Fixed to OFF.
8Note
ON Start up in Night mode after circuit card initialization.
OFF × Start up in Day mode after circuit card initialization.
Desk ConsoleKey patternto be used
SW16-1 SW16-7SYS 1 INDEX 160
Bit 1 Bit 0
Hotel type ONON 1 1
OFF 0 1
Business type OFFON — 1
OFF — 0
SW16-5 SW16-4 SW16-3 COUNTRY
ON ON OFF NORTH AMERICA
ON OFF ON AUSTRALIA
Other combinations Not used
SW17-3 SW17-4SYS 1 INDEX 6
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
OFF OFF 0 0 0
ON OFF 0 0 1
OFF ON 0 1 0
ON ON 1 0 0
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 288Revision 1.0
PA-CS33Attendant Interface
6. External Interface
Location of the LT connector leads for the DESK CONSOLE interface is as shown in Figure 3-57.
Figure 3-57 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM)
26272829303132333435363738394041424344454647484950
1234567891011121314151617181920212223
BN4800 BN4801
BN4820 BN4821
BN4830 BN4831B0
B1
B3
A0
A2
A3
A1
B2
BN4810 BN4811
LT5, 11 ConnectorPIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 1115 19 23
01 03 05 07 09 1115 19 23
14 18 22 14 18 22
00 02 04 06 08 1013 17 21
00 02 04 06 08 1013 17 21
12 16 20 12 16 20
LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4LT5
Slot No.
Group No.
ATI
ATI
PIM
LT11LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10
#0 ADD ON
MODULE
#1 ADD ONMODULE
A0
B0
BN4800 - 48v
BN4801 - 48v
A1
B1BN4810 - 48v
BN4811 - 48v
#0 DESK
CONSOLE
#1 DESKCONSOLE
A2
B2
BN4820 - 48v
BN4821 - 48v
A3
B3BN4830 - 48v
BN4831 - 48v
Note: The lead for eachDESK CONSOLE isshown below.
Note: The lead for each ADDON CONSOLE isshown below.
2425
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 289
Revision 1.0
PA-CS33Attendant Interface
Figure 3-58 Connecting Route Diagram
Note: The power feeding wires (BN4820/BN4821/BN4830/BN4831/GND) are not required when the power issupplied to the DESK CONSOLE locally.
ATIB2
BN4820
BN4821
B3
BN4830
BN4831
B3
BN4830
BN4831
GND
GND
B2
BN4820
BN4821
GNDGND
PBX
Installation
Cable
A2
MDF IDF6-PIN MODULAR
ROSETTE
#0 DESKCONSOLE
6-PIN MODULARCABLE
#1 DESKCONSOLE
A2
A3A3
GND(PZ-M377)
(-48V)
(-48V)
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 290Revision 1.0
PA-CS33Attendant Interface
Figure 3-59 shows how to connect Desk Console.
Figure 3-59 Desk Console Connection
Power supply and the maximum distance between the ATI and Desk Console. The maximum distance betweenthe ATI circuit card and Desk Console is as shown below.
Source 0.5 φ Cable 0.65 φ Cable
PBX 1,148 ft. (350 m) 1,640 ft. (500 m)
Local Power Supply 3,937 ft. (1,200 m) 4,921 ft. (1,500 m)
Wire the cables to the Modular Block as shown below.
Bottom View
DESK CONSOLE
PAGE(8-core)
LINE(6-core)REC
(8-core)
6-core Modular Cable 6-core Modular Block IDF/MDF
DESK CONSOLE
Transformer SurgeProtection
DC/DCConvertor
GND
–48V/–24V
Desk ConsoleModular Jack 6-core Modular Cable
PINNo.2627
LEADNAME
PINNo.12
LEADNAME
32333435363738394041424344454647484950
789
10111213141516171819202122232425
BN4800
BN4820
BN4810
BN4830
B0
B3
BN4801
BN4821
BN4811
BN4831
A2
A3
PA-CS33 Pin Assignment
G
B1 A1
GND
- 48 V
A1
B1
GND
- 48 V
B2 A0Add-on for Console 0
Console 0
Console 1
Console 1
Add-on for
Note: GND wires should be connected to PZ-M77. (BASE-U)
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 291
Revision 1.0
PA-CS33Attendant Interface
If the distance exceeds the above, estimate it according to the calculation after Figure 3-60.
Figure 3-60 Distance between PBX and Modular Rosette of Desk Console
A
B
BN4830
BN4831
GND
GND
A3
B3
BN4830
BN4831
A2
B2
BN4820
BN4821
A
B
BN4820
BN4821
GND
GND
ATI
PBX
GND
(PZ-M377)
InstallationCable MDF IDF
(-48V)
(-48V)
6-pin Modularrosette
6-pin ModularCable
#0 DESKCONSOLE
#1 DESKCONSOLE
A B
m
C
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 292Revision 1.0
PA-CS33Attendant Interface
Calculation of the distance between the ATI circuit card and Modular RosetteThe distance M in the figure above is determined according to the Direct-Current resistance of powersupply cables (-48V and GND). Note that the maximum resistance is 26 Ω as shown in the followingformula:
m = a + b + c 26Ω
m: Maximum Direct-Current resistance between the ATI circuit card and Modular Rosettea: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of Ab: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of Bc: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of C
Example of Calculation
a, b, and c are calculated by the following formulae:
Note: You are not required to use cable lengths in meters in the following formulae. You may use cable lengths infeet, yards, or whatever units you prefer. However, the units of resistance you use must match the units oflength you use. For example, if you use distance in feet, you must also use DC resistance per foot.
Cable resistance of DC -48V cables Cable resistance on GND cablesu (Ω/m) × x (m) u (Ω/m) × x (m)
a = +21
No. of DC -48V cablesNo. of GND cables
Cable resistance of DC -48V cables Cable resistance on GND cablesv (Ω/m) × y (m) v (Ω/m) × y (m)
b = +22
No. of DC -48V cablesNo. of GND cables
Cable resistance of DC -48V cables Cable resistance on GND cablesw (Ω/m) × z (m) w (Ω/m) × z (m)
c = +22
No. of DC -48V cablesNo. of GND cables
u: DC resistance per meter in the range of A (Ω/m)
v: DC resistance per meter in the range of B (Ω/m)
w: DC resistance per meter in the range of C (Ω/m)
x: Cable length (m) in the range of A
y: Cable length (m) in the range of B
z: Cable length (m) in the range of C
<=
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 293
Revision 1.0
PA-CS33Attendant Interface
The location of the LT connector leads for the TAS interface is as shown in Figure 3-61.
Figure 3-61 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM)
PIM
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4LT5
1915181417131612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
23222120
AT
I
Group No.
Slot No.
PIM
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
LT5, 11 Connector
TAS0A
TAS1ATAS1B
TAS0B
LT11
AT
I
PIMMounting Module
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 294Revision 1.0
PA-CS33Attendant Interface
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
SW00
SW01
SW10 (TAS #0)
SW13 (TAS #1)
SW11 (TAS #0)
SW12 (TAS #0)
SW14 (TAS #1)
SW15 (TAS #1)
SW16
SW17
ON
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
ONOFF
ONOFF
ONOFF
ONOFF
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 295
Revision 1.0
PA-8LCBRLine Circuit
PA-8LCBRLine Circuit
1. General Function
The PA-8LCBR circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of eight analog voice terminals andthe system with a range of 1200 (0hm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card can send “Stutter DialTone”, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp(MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. In addition, polarity reverse function is provided foreach channel. This card can be used for Caller ID service.
Figure 3-62 Location of PA-8LCBR (8LC) Card in the System
PUBLIC C.O. Line
NETWORK
INT
COT
LC
Local I/O BusGTCPU
max. 1200 [Ω]Analog Terminal
• Loop Resistance : Max. 1200 [Ω](inclusive of terminal resistance)
• Reverse Function : x 8 circuits• Stutter Dial Tone / Message Waiting Lamp
(selectable)
SW
(PA-8LC BR)
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 296Revision 1.0
PA-8LCBRLine Circuit
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
PIMMounting Module
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 297
Revision 1.0
PA-8LCBRLine Circuit
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps and switches on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-63.
Figure 3-63 Face Layout of PA-8LCBR (8LC)
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATUS MEANING
OPE Green Steady LightingThe circuitry of the circuit card is operating nor-mally.
BL0
BL7
Green
Steady Lighting Line loop exists.
Flashing
1)Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal.
2)Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received, Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line.
3) Line is in make-busy state. Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.
SW11
SW12
SW13
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW01
SW10
OPE
SW00(MB)
BL7654
3210
~
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 298Revision 1.0
PA-8LCBRLine Circuit
5. Switch Settings
Switches on this circuit card have the following meanings.
Note 1: When Caller ID is in service, set SW16-1 to OFF (Separate mode).
Note 2: Valid when SW16-1 is set to ON (Common mode).
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW00 (MB)
UP Circuit card make busy
DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel
SW10
1 ON ×
Fixed2 OFF ×
3 OFF ×
4 OFF ×
SW111 OFF ×
Fixed2 OFF ×
SW121 OFF ×
Fixed2 OFF ×
SW131 OFF ×
Fixed2 OFF ×
SW14
1ON Momentary Open
OFF Polarity Reverse
2
ONMessage Waiting Lamp flashes(1-sec. ON, 1-sec. OFF)
OFFMessage Waiting Lamp lights or flashes(Selected and Controlled by software)
SW15
1 OFF × Fixed
2ON Stutter Dial Tone is available
OFF Stutter Dial Tone is not available
SW16
1Note 1
ON Ringer Timer mode: Common mode
OFF Ringer Timer mode: Separate mode
2Note 2
ON Pre-ringing is not available
OFF Pre-ringing is available
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 299
Revision 1.0
PA-8LCBRLine Circuit
Note: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) and 600 Ω are composed as follows.
SWITCH SETTING
SW01(BNW0 - 7)
Balancing Network Designation• Each element corre-sponds to circuits 0 - 7.
BNW: Compromise Impedance(EIA/TIA-464A)
For long distance
BNW: 600 ΩFor short distance
BNW2 (ON) BNW1 (OFF)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
350Ω 1000Ω
0.21 µ
600Ω
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 300Revision 1.0
PA-8LCBRLine Circuit
6. External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shownFigure 3-64.
Figure 3-64 LT Connector Leads Accommodation
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
PW
R
PW
R
Highway Block
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
Accommodated in 3
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
B0 A0B1 A1B2 A2B3 A3B4 A4B5 A5B6 A6B7 A7
B0 A0B1 A1B2 A2B3 A3B4 A4B5 A5B6 A6B7 A7
B0 A0B1 A1B2 A2B3 A3B4 A4B5 A5B6 A6B7 A7
21 3 2 1 3 21 3 1 22 3 1 23 1 3
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 301
Revision 1.0
PA-8LCBRLine Circuit
Figure 3-65 Connecting Route Diagram
NEAX2400 IPX
A0
MDF
Telephone
L1
L2B0Rosette
LC
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 302Revision 1.0
PA-8LCBRLine Circuit
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
SW00(MB)
SW10
SW01(BNW 0 - 7)
SW11 Fixed
SW12 Fixed
SW13 Fixed
SW14
SW15
SW16
ON
1 2 3 4 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 ON
1 2 ON
1 2 ON
1 2 ON
1 2 ON
1 2 ON
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 303
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBELine Circuit
PA-16LCBELine Circuit
1. General Function
This circuit card provides the interface for 16 station lines. This circuit card is provided with functions forsupervising each user's call origination, call answering, release, detection of switch hook flashing, relayingof DP/PB signals, transmission of ringing signals to the called side, and bothway transmissions of voiceband signals. For use of this circuit card, there are the following limitations.
(a) There are four kinds of balancing network, each of which is set up according to the line conditions involved.
(b) PAD is only for receiving side 5 dB (at the time of station to station call).
Figure 3-66 Location of PA-16LCBE (16LC) Card in the System
TSW
16LC
COT
(MAX. 16 Stations)
C.O. Line
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 304Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBELine Circuit
2. Mounting Location/Condition
• The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
PIMMounting Module
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 305
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBELine Circuit
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.
Figure 3-67 Face Layout of PA-16LCBE (16LC)
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is opening.
BL0
BL1S
Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.
FlashFlashes (60 IPM) to dial pulses at the time of an outgoing call or when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.
OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
OPE
MB
BL15
BL0
BNW8-15
BNW0-7
SW1
SW0
~
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 306Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBELine Circuit
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit card make busy.
DOWN × Circuit card make busy cancel.
SW0
1 OFF × Fixed
2 OFF × Fixed
3 OFF × Fixed
4 OFF × Fixed
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 307
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBELine Circuit
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
BNW0 ~ 7
1ON Balancing network of No. 0 Circuit ; For long distance.
OFF × Balancing network of No. 0 Circuit ; For short distance.
2ON Balancing network of No. 1 Circuit ; For long distance.
OFF × Balancing network of No. 1 Circuit ; For short distance.
3ON Balancing network of No. 2 Circuit ; For long distance.
OFF × Balancing network of No. 2 Circuit ; For short distance.
4ON Balancing network of No. 3 Circuit ; For long distance.
OFF × Balancing network of No. 3 Circuit ; For short distance.
5ON Balancing network of No. 4 Circuit ; For long distance.
OFF × Balancing network of No. 4 Circuit ; For short distance.
6ON Balancing network of No. 5 Circuit ; For long distance.
OFF × Balancing network of No. 5 Circuit ; For short distance.
7ON Balancing network of No. 6 Circuit ; For long distance.
OFF × Balancing network of No. 6 Circuit ; For short distance.
8ON Balancing network of No. 7 Circuit ; For long distance.
OFF × Balancing network of No. 7 Circuit ; For short distance.
Note: Normally, switches are all to be set to OFF.However, when the station line is long (PBX -Telephone Set), rearrange the switch setting re-ferring to the following table.
TERMINAL RESISTANCE IS NOT INCLUDED IN THE LINE RESISTANCE
BALANCINGNETWORK
LINERESISTANCE
SWITCH
Short Distance 0 ~ 100 Ω OFF
Long Distance More than 100 Ω ON
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 308Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBELine Circuit
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
BNW8 ~ 15
1ON Balancing network of No. 8 Circuit ; For long distance.
OFF × Balancing network of No. 8 Circuit ; For short distance.
2ON Balancing network of No. 9 Circuit ; For long distance.
OFF × Balancing network of No. 9 Circuit ; For short distance.
3ON Balancing network of No. 10 Circuit ; For long distance.
OFF × Balancing network of No. 10 Circuit ; For short distance.
4ON Balancing network of No. 11 Circuit ; For long distance.
OFF × Balancing network of No. 11 Circuit ; For short distance.
5ON Balancing network of No. 12 Circuit ; For long distance.
OFF × Balancing network of No. 12 Circuit ; For short distance.
6ON Balancing network of No. 13 Circuit ; For long distance.
OFF × Balancing network of No. 13 Circuit ; For short distance.
7ON Balancing network of No. 14 Circuit ; For long distance.
OFF × Balancing network of No. 14 Circuit ; For short distance.
8ON Balancing network of No. 15 Circuit ; For long distance.
OFF × Balancing network of No. 15 Circuit ; For short distance.
Note: Normally, switches are all to be set to OFF.However, when the station line is long (PBX -Telephone Set), rearrange the switch settingreferring to the following table.
TERMINAL RESISTANCE IS NOT INCLUDED IN THE LINE RESISTANCE
BALANCINGNETWORK
LINERESISTANCE
SWITCH
Short Distance 0 ~ 100 Ω OFF
Long Distance More than 100 Ω ON
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 309
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBELine Circuit
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW1
1ON Polarity Reversal as Disconnect Signal
OFF × Momentary Open as Disconnect Signal
2 OFF × Fixed
3
4
SW1-3 SW1-4 INTERRUPTED RINGER PATTERN
OFF(standard)
OFF(standard)
OFF ON
ON OFF
ON ON
0.4/0.2/0.4-ON/OFF/ON • Incoming call from C. O. line/station
0.4 0.4
0.2
2.0
• Rering
0.4 0.8
0.2
4.00.4
0.2
0.2/0.2/0.2/0.2-ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON • Incoming call from C. O. line/station
0.2 0.2
0.2
2.0
• Rering
0.2 0.2
0.2
4.00.4
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2 0.2
0.2 0.2
0.35/0.3/0.35-ON/OFF/ON • Incoming call from C. O. line/station
0.35 0.35
0.3
2.0
• Rering
0.35 0.7
0.3
4.00.35
0.3
0.2/0.4/0.2-ON/OFF/ON • Incoming call from C. O. line/station
0.2 0.2
0.4
2.2
• Rering
0.2 0.2
0.4
4.2
0.2 0.4
0.2 0.2
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 310Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBELine Circuit
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW1
5
6
7ON Stutter Dial Tone Available
OFF × Stutter Dial Tone Not Available
8ON Pre-signaling is not performed.
OFF × Pre-signaling is performed.
SW1-5 SW1-6SWITCH SETTING FOR MW
LAMP CONTROLLING
OFF OFF In the case of lighting (normal setting)
OFF ON In the case of 60 IPM flashing
ON OFFIn the case of lighting or flashing(As controlled by the software)
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 311
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBELine Circuit
6. External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown inFigure 3-68 below.
Figure 3-68 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2)
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B0B1
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
B2B3
Accommodated in 2
B4B5B6B7B8B9
B10B11B12B13B14B15
A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9
A10A11A12A13A14A15
B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9
B10B11B12B13B14B15
A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9
A10A11A12A13A14A15
1 2 1 2 1 21 2 1 2 1 2
PW
R
PW
R
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 312Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBELine Circuit
Figure 3-68 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2)
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B0B1
Accommodated in 3
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 ConnectorLT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
B2B3B4B5B6B7
A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7
B8B9
B10B11B12B13B14B15
A8A9
A10A11A12A13A14A15
3 3 3 3 3 3
PW
R
PW
R
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 313
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBELine Circuit
Figure 3-69 Connecting Route Diagram
NEAX2400 IPX
A0
MDF
Ordinary Telephone
L1
L2B0Rosette
LC
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 314Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBELine Circuit
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
SW0
SW1
BNW0-7
BNW8-15
MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel.
ON 1 2 3 4
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 315
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBJ-ALine Circuit
PA-16LCBJ-ALine Circuit
1. General Function
The PA-16LCBJ-A circuit card,which is exclusively used in a µ-law system, provides an interface betweena maximum of 16 analog terminals and the system with a range of 600 (Ohm) inclusive of terminal resis-tance.This card also can send “Stutter Dial Tone”, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminalwhich has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required.
Figure 3-70 Location of PA-16LCBJ-A (16LC) Card in the System
PUBLIC C.O. Line
NETWORK
INT
COT
LC
Local I/O BusGTCPU
max. 600 [Ω]Analog Terminal
• Loop Resistance : Max. 600 [Ω](inclusive of terminal resistance)
• Reverse Function : x 1 circuits• Stutter Dial Tone / Message Waiting Lamp
(selectable)• Encoding Law : µ-law.
SW
(PA-16LC BJ-A)
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 316Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBJ-ALine Circuit
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
PIMMounting Module
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 317
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBJ-ALine Circuit
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-71.
Figure 3-71 Face Layout of PA-16LCBJ-A (16LC)
SW13
SW12
SW11(BNW8-15)
SW10(BNW0-7)
OPE
SW00 (MB)
BL12-15
BL8-11
BL4-7
BL0-3
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 318Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBJ-ALine Circuit
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATUS MEANING
OPE Green Steady LightingThe circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally.
BL0
BL15Green
Steady Lighting Line loop exists.
Flashing
1)Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal.
2)Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received, Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line.
3)Line is in make-busy state.Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.
~
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 319
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBJ-ALine Circuit
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW00(MB)
UP Circuit card make busy.
DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel.
SW10(BNW0~7)
CIRCUIT NO. KIND OF BALANCING NETWORK
1ON
No. 0Compromise
OFF × 600 Ω
2ON
No. 1Compromise
OFF × 600 Ω
3ON
No. 2Compromise
OFF × 600 Ω
4ON
No. 3Compromise
OFF × 600 Ω
5ON
No. 4Compromise
OFF × 600 Ω
6ON
No. 5Compromise
OFF × 600 Ω
7ON
No. 6Compromise
OFF × 600 Ω
8ON
No. 7Compromise
OFF × 600 Ω
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 320Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBJ-ALine Circuit
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTING
MEANING
CIRCUIT NO. KIND OF BALANCING NETWORK
SW11(BNW8~15)
1ON
No. 8Compromise
OFF × 600 Ω
2ON
No. 9Compromise
OFF × 600 Ω
3ON
No. 10Compromise
OFF × 600 Ω
4ON
No. 11Compromise
OFF × 600 Ω
5ON
No. 12Compromise
OFF × 600 Ω
6ON
No. 13Compromise
OFF × 600 Ω
7ON
No. 14Compromise
OFF × 600 Ω
8ON
No. 15Compromise
OFF × 600 Ω
SW12
1ON Immediate is not available.
OFF Immediate is available.
2ON Stutter dial tone is available
OFF Message Waiting Lamp is available
SW13ON Momentary Open
OFF Polarity Reverse
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 321
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBJ-ALine Circuit
6. External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown inFigure 3-72.
Figure 3-72 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B0B1
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
B2B3
Accommodated in 2
B4B5B6B7B8B9
B10B11B12B13B14B15
A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9
A10A11A12A13A14A15
B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9
B10B11B12B13B14B15
A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9
A10A11A12A13A14A15
1 2 1 2 1 21 2 1 2 1 2
PW
R
PW
R
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 322Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBJ-ALine Circuit
Figure 3-72 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B0B1
Accommodated in 3
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 ConnectorLT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
B2B3B4B5B6B7
A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7
B8B9
B10B11B12B13B14B15
A8A9
A10A11A12A13A14A15
3 3 3 3 3 3
PW
R
PW
R
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 323
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBJ-ALine Circuit
Figure 3-73 Connecting Route Diagram
NEAX2400 IPX
A0
MDF
Ordinary Telephone
L1
L2B0Rosette
LC
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 324Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBJ-ALine Circuit
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT No.SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
SW00(MB)
UP : Circuit card make busy
SW10(BNW 0 - 7)
SW11(BNW 8 - 15)
SW12
SW13
ON
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ON
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ON
1 2 ON
OFF ON
(RVS) (OPEN)
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 325
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBJ-BLine Circuit
PA-16LCBJ-BLine Circuit
1. General Function
The PA-16LCBJ-B circuit card, which is exclusively used in a µ-law system, provides an interface betweena maximum of 16 analog terminals and the system with a range of 600 (0hm) inclusive of terminalresistance.
This card also can send “Stutter Dial Tone”, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal whichhas no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required.
Figure 3-74 Location of PA-16LCBJ-B (16LC) Card in the System
PUBLIC C.O. Line
NETWORK
INT
COT
LC
Local I/O BusGTCPU
max. 600 [Ω]Analog Terminal
• Loop Resistance : Max. 600 [Ω](inclusive of terminal resistance)
• Reverse Function : x 1 circuit• Stutter Dial Tone / Message Waiting Lamp• Encoding Law : µ-law
SW
(PA-16LC BJ-B)
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 326Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBJ-BLine Circuit
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card are shown below.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
PIMMounting Module
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 327
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBJ-BLine Circuit
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps and switches on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-75.
Figure 3-75 Face Layout of PA-16LCBJ-B (16LC)
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME
COLOR STATE MEANING
OPE Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally.
BL0
BL15Green
Steady Lighting Line loop exists.
Flashing
1)Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED keeps flashing in syn-chronizing with on/off of the ringing signal.
2)Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are be-ing received, Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line.
3)Line is in make-busy state.Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.
OPE
MB
BL15
SW10
141312
3210
111098
7654
SW11
SW13
SW15
SW16
~
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 328Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBJ-BLine Circuit
5. Switch Settings
Switches on the PA-16LC BJ-B card have the following meanings.
SWITCH NAMESWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARDSETTING
MEANING
SW00(MB) UP
Card make-busy(Inserted state)
DOWNCard make-busy cancel(Operating state)
SW131 OFF × Fixed to OFF
2ON Stutter dial tone is available
OFF × Stutter dial tone is not available
3 OFF × Fixed to OFF
4 OFF × Fixed to OFF
SW15
1 OFF × Fixed to OFF
2 OFF × Fixed to OFF
3
ONMessage waiting lamp flashes(1-sec. ON/1-sec. OFF)
OFF × Message waiting lamp lights or flashes(controlled by software)
4 OFF × Fixed to OFF
SW16 ON Momentary open
OFF × Polarity reverse
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
OFF(RVS)
ON(OPEN)
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 329
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBJ-BLine Circuit
Note: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) and 600 Ω are composed as follows.
SWITCH NAME SETTING
SW-10(BNW0 - 7) Balancing Network
Designation• Each element corresponds to circuits 0 - 7.
BNW: Compromise Impedance(EIA/TIA-464A)
for long distance
BNW: 600 Ω for short distance
SW-11(BNW8 - 15) Balancing Network
Designation• Each element corresponds to circuits 8 - 15.
BNW: Compromise Impedance(EIA/TIA-464A)
for long distance
BNW: 600 Ω for short distance
ON OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
compromise impedance (EIA/TIA-464A)
350Ω 1000Ω
0.21 µ
600Ω
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 330Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBJ-BLine Circuit
6. External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown inFigure 3-76.
Figure 3-76 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2)
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B0B1
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
B2B3
Accommodated in 2
B4B5B6B7B8B9
B10B11B12B13B14B15
A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9
A10A11A12A13A14A15
B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9
B10B11B12B13B14B15
A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9
A10A11A12A13A14A15
1 2 1 2 1 21 2 1 2 1 2
PW
R
PW
R
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 331
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBJ-BLine Circuit
Figure 3-76 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2)
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B0B1
Accommodated in 3
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 ConnectorLT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
B2B3B4B5B6B7
A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7
B8B9
B10B11B12B13B14B15
A8A9
A10A11A12A13A14A15
3 3 3 3 3 3
PW
R
PW
R
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 332Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBJ-BLine Circuit
Figure 3-77 Connecting Route Diagram
NEAX2400 IPX
A0
MDF
Telephone
L1
L2B0Rosette
LC
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 333
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBJ-BLine Circuit
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO.SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
SW00(MB)
SW13
SW15
SW16
SW10(BNW0-7)
SW11(BNW8-15)
ON
1 2 3 4 ON
1 2 3 4 ON
OFF ON
(RVS) (OPEN)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ON
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ON
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 334Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBWLine Circuit
PA-16LCBWLine Circuit
1. General Function
The PA-16LCBW circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 16 analog voice terminals andthe system with a range of 1200 inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send “Stutter DialTone”, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp(MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. In addition momentary open/reverse battery function isprovided for 16 channels on this card. This is a -48V card.
Figure 3-78 Location of PA-16LCBW (LC) within the System
max. 1200 [Ω]
COT
INT SW
GTI/O Local Bus
(PA-16LCBW)
C. O. line
Loop Resistance: Max. 1200 [Ω] (inclusive of terminal Resistance)Open Function: x 15 circuitsReverse / Open Function: x 1 circuit (selectable)Stutter Dial Tone/Message Waiting Lamp (selectable)Encoding Law: µ-law
•
••••
PUBLICNETWORK
Analog Terminal
CPU
LC
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 335
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBWLine Circuit
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-16LCBW (LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following universal slots.
Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-79.
Figure 3-79 Face Layout of PA-16LCBW (LC)
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
OPE
BL15
BL0
SW00 (MB)
SW10
SW16
SW11
SW14
SW17
SW18
SW15
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 336Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBWLine Circuit
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAMELAMP
COLORLAMP STATUS MEANING OF INDICATION
OPE Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally.
BL0
BL15
Green
Steady Lighting Line loop exists.
Flashing
1) Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal.
2) Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received, Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line.
3) Line is in make-busy state.Busy Lamp keeps flashing at 60 ipm.
-
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 337
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBWLine Circuit
5. Switch Settings
Switches on the PA-16LCBW card have the following meanings.
Note: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) and 600 Ω. (For North America, Other Country (µ Law))
SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING
SW00(MB) Circuit Card
Make-busy Key
ON Circuit card make-busy
OFFCircuit card make-busy cancel(Normal operating mode)
SW10(BNW0-7)
Balancing Network Designation
• Each element on this switch corresponds to circuit #0-#7.
ON
North America, Other Country (µ Law)BNW : Compromise Impedance
(EIA/TIA-464B) (Note) for long distance.
OFFNorth America, Other Country (µ Law)
BNW : 600 Ω (Note) for short distance
ON OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
OFF
350 1000
0.21µ
Compromise Impedance(EIA/TIA-464B)
600
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 338Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBWLine Circuit
SWITCHSWITCH
No.FUNCTION
SWITCH SETTING
MEANING
SW11(BNW8-15)
Balancing Network Designation• Each element on this
switch corresponds to circuit #8-#15.
(This same as previous page)
SW14 1 OFF Fixed to OFF
2 ON Fixed to ON
3 OFF Fixed to OFF
4 OFF Fixed to OFF
SW15 1 OFF Fixed to OFF
2ON Stutter Dial Tone Available
OFF Stutter Dial Tone not Available
3 OFF Fixed to OFF
4 OFF Fixed to OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
OFF
1 2 3 4ON
OFF
1 2 3 4ON
OFF
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 339
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBWLine Circuit
SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING
SW16 1 OFF Fixed to OFF
2 OFF Fixed to OFF
3 OFF Fixed to OFF
4 OFF Fixed to OFF
SW17 1 OFF Fixed to OFF
2 OFF Fixed to OFF
3Message Waiting Lamp
ONMessage Waiting LampFlashing (Controlled by Firmware)
OFFMessage Waiting Lamp lit orFlashing (Selected and Controlled by Software)
4 OFF Fixed to OFF
SW18 Polarity reverse or Momentary Open(circuit #15 Only )
ON Momentary open
OFF Polarity reverse
1 2 3 4ON
OFF
1 2 3 4ON
OFF
OFF
Slide switch(RVS) (OPEN)
ON
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 340Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBWLine Circuit
6. External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-80.
Figure 3-80 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)
See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-81).
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
PIM
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B0B1
A0
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
A1A2A3
B2B3
Accommodated in 2
B4B5
A4A5A6A7
B6B7B8B9
A8A9
A10A11
B10B11B12B13
A12A13A14A15
B14B15
B0B1
A0A1A2A3
B2B3B4B5
A4A5A6A7
B6B7B8B9
A8A9
A10A11
B10B11B12B13
A12A13A14A15
B14B15
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
Highway Block
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 341
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBWLine Circuit
Figure 3-80 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
PIM
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B0B1
A0
Accommodated in 3
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
A1A2A3
B2B3B4B5
A4A5A6A7
B6B7
B8B9
A8A9
A10A11
B10B11B12B13
A12A13A14A15
B14B15
3 3 3 3 3 3
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
Highway Block
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 342Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBWLine Circuit
Figure 3-81 Connecting Route Diagram
A
B
L1
L2
PBXMDF
Jack Analog Terminal
LC
Maximum 1200 [Ω] (inclusive of terminal resistance)
Installation Cable
LT Connector
Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-16 LCBW (LC) is as follows.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 343
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBWLine Circuit
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
SW00(MB)
SW10(BNW0-7)
SW11(BNW8-15)
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
SW18
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
1 2 3 4 ON
ON1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 ON
1 2 3 4 ON
OFF
(RVS) (OPEN)
ON
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 344Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBYLine Circuit
PA-16LCBYLine Circuit
1. General Function
The PA-16LCBY circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 16 analog voice terminals andthe system with a range of 1200 (Ohm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send “StutterDial Tone”, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp(MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. In addition polarity reverse function is provided for 16channels on this card. The card can be used for Caller ID service. This is a -48V card.
Note: The PA-16LCBY card requires Series 7400 or later software.
Figure 3-82 Location of PA-16LCBY(LC) Circuit card within the System
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-16LCBY(LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following universal slots.
max. 1200 [Ω]
Analog Terminal
COT
RSTLC
TSW/INT
(PA-8RSTY)
CPU GT
Local I/O Bus
(PA-16LCBY)
C. O. LINE
• Loop Resistance : Max 1200[Ω] (inclusive of terminal resistance)• Reverse Function : x 16 circuits• Stutter Dial Tone/Message Waiting Lamp (selectable)• Encoding Law : µ-law
PUBLICNETWORK
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 345
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBYLine Circuit
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches on this card is shown in Figure 3-83.
Figure 3-83 Face Layout of PA-16LCBY(LC) Card
OPE
BL15
BL0
SW00 (MB)
SW10(BNW0-7)
SW11(BNW8-15)
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
SW19
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 346Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBYLine Circuit
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
Switches on the PA-16LCBY (LC) card have the following meanings.
LAMP NAMELAMP
COLOR LAMP STATUS MEANING OF INDICATION
OPE Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally.
BL0
BL15
Green
Steady Lighting Line loop exists.
Flashing
1) Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal.
2) Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received, Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line.
3) Line is in make-busy state.Busy Lamp keeps flashing at 60 ipm.
SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING
SW00(MB) Circuit Card
Make-busy Key
OFF Circuit card make-busy cancel
ON Circuit card make-busy
SW10(BNW0-7)
Balancing Network Designation
• Each element on this switch corresponds to circuit #0-#7.
When this switch has been set, see SW14.
ON
North America, Other Country (µ Law)BNW : Compromise Impedance
(EIA/TIA-464B) (Note ) for long distance
OFFNorth America, Other Country (µ Law) BNW : 600 Ω (Note ) for short distance
~
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
OFF
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 347
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBYLine Circuit
SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING
SW11(BNW8-15)
Balancing Network Designation• Each element on this
switch corresponds to circuit #8-#15.
[the same as previous page]
SW14 1 OFF Fixed to OFF
2 ON Fixed to ON
3 OFF Fixed to OFF
4 OFF Fixed to OFF
SW15
1
North AmericaBrazilChinaOther Country
OFF Fixed to OFF
PAD (Australia Only)
ONNEAX 2400 PADPAD ON/OFF = 9dB/0dB
OFFICS-PBX PADPAD ON/OFF = 9dB/6dB
2ON Stutter Dial Tone Available
OFF Stutter Dial Tone not Available
3 OFF Fixed to OFF
4 OFF Fixed to OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
OFF
1 2 3 4ON
OFF
1 2 3 4ON
OFF
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 348Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBYLine Circuit
SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING
SW16 1 OFF Fixed to OFF
2 OFF Fixed to OFF
3 OFF Fixed to OFF
4 OFF Fixed to OFF
SW17 1 OFF Fixed to OFF
2 OFF Fixed to OFF
3Message Waiting Lamp
ONMessage Waiting LampFlashing (Controlled by Firmware)
OFFMessage Waiting Lamp lit orFlashing (Selected and Controlled by Software)
4 OFF Fixed to OFF
SW19 1 OFF Fixed to OFF
2 OFF Fixed to OFF
3 ON Fixed to ON
4 OFF Fixed to OFF
1 2 3 4ON
OFF
1 2 3 4ON
OFF
1 2 3 4ON
OFF
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 349
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBYLine Circuit
Note: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) and 600Ω.(For North America, Other Country (µ Law))
ON OFF
350 1000
0.21µ
Compromise Impedance(EIA/TIA-464B)
600
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 350Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBYLine Circuit
6. External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-84.
Figure 3-84 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
PIM
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B0B1
A0
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
A1A2A3
B2B3
Accommodated in 2
B4B5
A4A5A6A7
B6B7B8B9
A8A9
A10A11
B10B11B12B13
A12A13A14A15
B14B15
B0B1
A0A1A2A3
B2B3B4B5
A4A5A6A7
B6B7B8B9
A8A9
A10A11
B10B11B12B13
A12A13A14A15
B14B15
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
Highway Block
PIMMounting Module
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 351
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBYLine Circuit
Figure 3-84 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
PIM
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B0B1
A0
Accommodated in 3
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
A1A2A3
B2B3B4B5
A4A5A6A7
B6B7
B8B9
A8A9
A10A11
B10B11B12B13
A12A13A14A15
B14B15
3 3 3 3 3 3
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
Highway Block
PIMMounting Module
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 352Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBYLine Circuit
Figure 3-85 Connecting Route Diagram
A
B
L1
L2
PBXMDF
Jack Analog Terminal
LC
Maximum 1200 [Ω] (inclusive of terminal resistance)
Installation Cable
LT Connector
Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-16 LCBY (LC) is as follows.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 353
Revision 1.0
PA-16LCBYLine Circuit
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
SW00(MB)
Note: Normal operating mode is down.
SW10(BNW0-7)
SW11(BNW8-15)
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
SW19
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
1 2 3 4 ON
ON1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 ON
1 2 3 4 ON
1 2 3 4 ON
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 354Revision 1.0
PA-16ELCJElectric Line Current
PA-16ELCJElectric Line Current
1. General Function
The PA-16ELCJ (ELC) circuit card provides an interface between the Dterm and the IPX. Depending on theswitch settings, this card works in the following two modes.
• 16 ELC mode: A maximum of 16 sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (voice communicationsonly)
• 8 DLC mode: A maximum of eight sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (simultaneous voiceand data communications)
Figure 3-86 Location of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card in the System
There are two different kinds of firmware EPROMs are located on the PA-16ELCJ (ELC) circuit card. SP-3295 16ELCJ PROG-B provides the full performance interface for Dterm Series E, and SP-3270 16ELCJPROG-A provides Dterm Series III interface. The following table shows the D term performance dependingon each firmware EPROM.
Table 3-3 Performance
FIRMWARE Dterm SERIES E Dterm SERIES III
SP-329516ELC JPROG-B
• 24 digits wide of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
• Month and year (last two digits) also displayed following the time and date.
• Software keys are available and the software keys are con-trolled by the system. Thus, key function data can be changed by office data.
• 16 digits wide of LCD.
• Month and year are not displayed.
• Software key is not available.
SP-327016ELC JPROG-A
• 16 digits wide of LCD.
• Month and year are not displayed.
• Software keys are available. However, key function is fixed (Off-hook Ringing, Mute, Microphone, Headset).
• 16 digits wide of LCD.
• Month and year are not displayed.
• Software key is not available.
Dterm #0
DTE
Data Adapter
Dterm #7
DTE
Data Adapter
Dterm #0
Dterm #15
IMX IMX
16 ELC MODE 8 DLC MODE
ELCELC
IPXIPX
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 355
Revision 1.0
PA-16ELCJElectric Line Current
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-16ELCJ (ELC) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-87.
Figure 3-87 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Mounting Module PIM
PALM
SW00 (MB)
BL15
OPE
BL0
SW01
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 356Revision 1.0
PA-16ELCJElectric Line Current
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
Note: When the PALM lamp lights red, observe the following instructions.
i) Identify the location where any in-house wires have a short circuit in all lines which belong to thePA-16ELCJ card whose PALM is on.
ii) Repair the short-circuited wires of the associated Dterm.
iii) Disconnect the Dterm from the rosette, then leave it disconnected for at least one minute.
iv) Connect the Dterm again.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPEGreen Remains lit while on-line operations are normal.
OFF Off when on-line operations are abnormal.
PALMRed Lights red when power supply circuit(s) is abnormal. Note
OFF Off when all the power supply circuits are normal.
BL0
BL15
Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.
FlashFlashes when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state or station data has not been assigned.
OFF Off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
-
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 357
Revision 1.0
PA-16ELCJElectric Line Current
5. Switch Settings
Switches on the PA-16ELCJ card have the following meanings.
SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING
SW00 (MB)
Circuit Card Make-busy key
Circuit card Make-busy Cancel.
Circuit card Make-busy.
SW01
1
See Table 3-4 below.
— Always ON (fixed).
7ELC/DLC mode Designation
16ELC mode.
8DLC mode.
Table 3-4 Relationship between SW01-1 and SW01-7
ON OFF
ON• 16 sets of Dterms per card.
• Voice Communication only.
• 8 sets of Dterms per card.
• Data Adapter is used.
OFF• 16 sets of Dterms per card.
• Analog Port Adapter is used, but not at the same time.
• 8 sets of Dterms per card.
• Analog Port Adapter is used (Both Dterm and Analog terminal can be used at the same time).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 ON2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
2
-
6
8
-
1 ON2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
OFF
SW01-7
SW01-1
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 358Revision 1.0
PA-16ELCJElectric Line Current
6. External Interface
Depending on the applied mode (16ELC/8 DLC mode), external interface leads appear on the LTconnectors as follows.
• 6ELC mode
Figure 3-88 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (1/2)
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
PIM
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B0B1
A0
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
A1A2A3
B2B3
Accommodated in 2
B4B5
A4A5A6A7
B6B7B8B9
A8A9
A10A11
B10B11B12B13
A12A13A14A15
B14B15
B0B1
A0A1A2A3
B2B3B4B5
A4A5A6A7
B6B7B8B9
A8A9
A10A11
B10B11B12B13
A12A13A14A15
B14B15
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIMMounting Module
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 359
Revision 1.0
PA-16ELCJElectric Line Current
• 16ELC mode
Figure 3-88 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (2/2)
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
PIM
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B0B1
A0
Accommodated in 3
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
A1A2A3
B2B3B4B5
A4A5A6A7
B6B7
B8B9
A8A9
A10A11
B10B11B12B13
A12A13A14A15
B14B15
3 3 3 3 3 3
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIMMounting Module
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 360Revision 1.0
PA-16ELCJElectric Line Current
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
SW00(MB)
SW01
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 361
Revision 1.0
PA-16ELCJ-BElectronic Line Circuit
PA-16ELCJ-BElectronic Line Circuit
1. General Function
The PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) circuit card provides an interface between Dterm and IPX. Depending upon theswitch settings, this card works in the following two modes.
• 16 ELC mode: A maximum of 16 sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (voice communicationsonly)
• 8 DLC mode: A maximum of eight sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (simultaneous voiceand data communications)
Figure 3-89 Location of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card within the System
Table 3-5 Performance
Dterm SERIES E Dterm SERIES III
• 24 digits wide of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
• Month and year is displayed following the time and date.
• Software keys are available and the software keys are controlled by the system. Thus, key function data can be changed by office data.
• 16 digits wide of LCD.
• Month and year are not displayed.
• Software key is not available.
Dterm #0
DTE
Data Adapter
Dterm #7
DTE
Data Adapter
Dterm #0
Dterm #15
IPX IPX
16 ELC MODE 8 DLC MODE
ELCELC
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 362Revision 1.0
PA-16ELCJ-BElectronic Line Circuit
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-90.
Figure 3-90 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PIMMounting Module
PALM
SW00 (MB)
BL15
OPE
SW10 SW11
BL0
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 363
Revision 1.0
PA-16ELCJ-BElectronic Line Circuit
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
Note: When the PALM lamp lights red, observe the following instructions.
i) Identify the location where any in-house wires have a short circuit to all lines belonging to thePA-16ELCJ-B card whose PALM is on.
ii) Repair the short-circuited wires of the associated Dterm.
iii) Disconnect the Dterm from the rosette, then leave it disconnected for at least one minute.
iv) Connect the Dterm again.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPEGreen Remains lit while on-line operations are normal.
OFF Off when on-line operations are abnormal.
PALMRed Lights red when power supply circuit(s) is abnormal. Note
OFF Off when all the power supply circuits are normal.
BL0
BL15
Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.
FlashFlashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or station data has not been assigned.
OFF Off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
-
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 364Revision 1.0
PA-16ELCJ-BElectronic Line Circuit
5. Switch Settings
Switches on the PA-16ELCJ-B card have the following meanings.
SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING
SW00 (MB)
Circuit Card Make-busy key
Circuit Card Make-busy Cancel.
Circuit Card Make-busy.
SW10
1LP-PMInterface mode setting
When firmware SP-3419 is used, and your system uses software Series 7300 Release 7 or earlier.Expanded Multiple Line Operation-Dterm is not available.
When firmware SP-3514 is used, and your system uses software Series 7400 Release 8 or later.Expanded Multiple Line Operation-Dterm is available.
2 — Not used.
3-4ELC/DLCmode setting
This circuit card is operated in 16 ELC mode.
This circuit card is operated in 8 DLC mode.
Do not set another combination.
5Analog PortAdapter setting
Analog Port Adapter is available.
Analog Port Adapter is not available.
6-8 — Fixed to “OFF”.
SW11
1-8 — Fixed to all “OFF”.
Details are shown in the next
table.
1 ON2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
1 ON2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
1 ON2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
OFF
1 ON2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
1 ON2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
1 ON2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
1 ON2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 365
Revision 1.0
PA-16ELCJ-BElectronic Line Circuit
SW10-3: OFF, SW10-4: OFF SW10-3: OFF, SW10-4: ON
SW10-5: OFF• 16 set of Dterms per card.
• Voice Communication only.
• 8 set of Dterms per card.
• Data Adapter is used.
SW10-5: ON• 16 set of Dterms per card.
• Analog Port Adapter is used (Either Dterm or Analog terminal can be used at the same time).
• 8 set of Dterms per card.
• Analog Port Adapter is used (Both Dterm and Analog terminal can be used at the same time).
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 366Revision 1.0
PA-16ELCJ-BElectronic Line Circuit
6. External Interface
Depending upon the applied mode (16ELC/8 DLC mode), external interface leads appear on the LTconnectors as follows.
• 16ELC mode
Figure 3-91 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (1/2)
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B0 B1
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
B2B3
Accommodated in 2
B4B5B6B7B8B9
B10B11B12B13B14B15
A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9
A10A11A12A13A14A15
B0 B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9
B10B11B12B13B14B15
A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9
A10A11A12A13A14A15
1 2 1 2 1 21 2 1 2 1 2
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 367
Revision 1.0
PA-16ELCJ-BElectronic Line Circuit
Figure 3-91 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (2/2)
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B0B1
Accommodated in 3
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 ConnectorLT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
B2B3B4B5B6B7
A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7
B8B9
B10B11B12B13B14B15
A8A9
A10A11A12A13A14A15
3 3 3 3 3 3
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 368Revision 1.0
PA-16ELCJ-BElectronic Line Circuit
• 8DLC mode
Figure 3-92 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (8DLC Mode)
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
Accommodated in 3
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
B0 A0B1 A1B2 A2B3 A3B4 A4B5 A5B6 A6B7 A7
B0 A0B1 A1B2 A2B3 A3B4 A4B5 A5B6 A6B7 A7
B0 A0B1 A1B2 A2B3 A3B4 A4B5 A5B6 A6B7 A7
21 3 2 1 3 21 3 1 22 3 1 23 1 3
PIMMounting Module
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 369
Revision 1.0
PA-16ELCJ-BElectronic Line Circuit
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
SW00(MB)
SW10
SW11
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 370Revision 1.0
PA-FCHAFusion Call Control Handler
PA-FCHAFusion Call Control Handler
1. General Function
This circuit card is a protocol converter to carry the fusion-link-data from/to the other node. The Fusion-Link-Data is received/transferred from/to the CPR via HUB (PA-M96) across the TCP/IP interface. Oncethe FCH has received the fusion-link-data from the CPR, the HDLC CONT part of the FCH converts it tothe High Level Data Link Controller (HDLC) format, then drops and inserts (D/I) onto a particular channel(or channels) of the ITU-T G.703 digital interface.
Figure 3-93 Location of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card in the System
BWB
CPU
LP-PMINT
ETHER NETCONT
HDLCCONT
D/ICONT
DTICONT
DTI
HUB
(PA-M96)
LANI(PZ-PC19)
CPU
CPR
TO/FROM THE OTHER FUSION NODE
RJ-45
FRONT CABLE
Note
FCH
Note: This connector is used when multiple numbers of FCH cards are cascaded.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 371
Revision 1.0
PA-FCHAFusion Call Control Handler
2. Mounting Location/ Condition
The FCH can be mounted in a universal slot of the PIM.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-94.
Figure 3-94 Face Layout of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PIMMounting Module PIM
PIM
Universal SlotsUniversal Slots
MB
OPE
EST3EST2EST1EST0PWALM
LYR
LB
LOAD
MNT
10-BASE-T
MODE
DTI
FCH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW14
SW13
SW12
SW11
SW10
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 372Revision 1.0
PA-FCHAFusion Call Control Handler
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
LYR
Green Remains lit while the Fusion link is established.
Flash Flashes when the Fusion link test result is fair. (60IPM)
OFF Remains off when either the Fusion link is not established or the Fusion link test result is not fair.
LBGreen Remains lit while 10-BASE-T port is ready to use.
OFF Remains off when 10-BASE-T port is not ready.
LOAD
Green Remains lit while this circuit card is ready to broadcast data packets.(Forwarding Status)
Flash(60 IPM)
Remains lit while this circuit card is ready to broadcast data packets.(Blocking Status)
Flash(120 IPM)
Remains lit while this circuit card is stand-by to broadcast data packets.(Learning Status)
OFFRemains off when this circuit card is stand-by to broadcast data packets.(Null Status)
EST3 Green Remains lit while sending data.
EST2 Green Remains lit when receiving pair cable polarity is normal.
EST1 Green Remains lit while receiving data.
EST0 Green Remains lit while the link is established.
PWALM Red Remains lit when power supply failure (from the BWB) has occurred.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 373
Revision 1.0
PA-FCHAFusion Call Control Handler
5. Switch setting
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
Note: The following operations are required prior to extracting the card.
(1.) Turn on the MNT3 switch.(2.) Flip the MB switch.
When the D/I DTI (1.5M) is connected with the card front cable.
Note: T203 timer designates the maximum idle time which does not transmit any data frames. As a basic rule, theshorter T203 timer value, the earlier link failure detection will be obtained.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGDESCRIPTION
MBNote
UP Circuit card Make-busy.
DOWN × Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
MNT
0 OFF × Not used.
1 OFF × Not used.
2 OFF × Not used.
3Note
ON Make-busy-request.
OFF × Cancel the Make-busy-request.
SWITCH NAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGDESCRIPTION
MODE
0 - 7 Not used.
8 × Standard setting.(When the DTI is connected with the card front cable.)
9Fusion link test mode.(When the DTI is connected with the card front cable.)
A - F Not used.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGDESCRIPTION
SW10
1Note
ON T203 timer value is variable.
OFF × T203 timer value is fixed at 10 seconds.
2~8 OFF × Not used.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 374Revision 1.0
PA-FCHAFusion Call Control Handler
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGDESCRIPTION
SW11Note 1
1ON
This SW designates the D/I channel of the Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n)
Set the corresponding SW(s) to “ON” for D/I, “OFF” fordenial.
OFF
2ON
OFF
3ON
OFF
4ON
OFF
5ON
OFF
6ON
OFF
7ON
OFF
8ON
OFF
SW11 D/I channel of T1
SW11-1 CH 0
SW11-2 CH 1
SW11-3 CH2
SW11-4 CH 3
SW11-5 CH 4
SW11-6 CH 5
SW11-7 CH 6
SW11-8 CH 7
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 375
Revision 1.0
PA-FCHAFusion Call Control Handler
Note 1: When “n” is bigger than 1, the Time Slot Sequence Integrity (TSSI) must be guaranteed at the network.When “n” is one or more, the corresponding D channels as “n” must be designated by SW11-SW12.
SW12Note 1
1ON This SW designates the D/I channel of the
Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n)
Set the corresponding SW(s) to “ON” for D/I, “OFF” for denial.
OFF
2ON
OFF
3ON
OFF
4ON
OFF
5ON
OFF
6ON
OFF
7ON
OFF
8
ON
OFF
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGDESCRIPTION
SW12 D/I channel of T1
SW12-1 CH 8
SW12-2 CH 9
SW12-3 CH 10
SW12-4 CH 11
SW12-5 CH 12
SW12-6 CH 13
SW12-7 CH 14
SW12-8 CH 15
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 376Revision 1.0
PA-FCHAFusion Call Control Handler
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGDESCRIPTION
SW13
1ON
This SW designates the D/I channel of the Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n)
Set the corresponding SW(s) to “ON” for D/I, “OFF” for denial.
OFF
2ON
OFF
3ON
OFF
4ON
OFF
5ON
OFF
6ON
OFF
7ON
OFF
8ON
OFF
SW14
1ON × Positive logic for the D/I CONT
OFF Negative logic for the D/I CONT
2Note 2
ON ×The fusion data link speed inserted onto the T1 interface.
OFF
3Note 2
ON ×
OFF
4Note 3
ONLink Access Protocol D-channel (LAPD) signal link performs as the “network.”
OFF LAPD signal link performs as the “user.”
SW13 D/I channel of T1
SW13-1 CH 16
SW13-2 CH 17
SW13-3 CH 18
SW13-4 CH 19
SW13-5 CH 20
SW13-6 CH 21
SW13-7 CH 22
SW13-8 CH 23
SW14-2 SW14-3 SPEED
ON ON 64 Kbps × n
ON OFF 56 Kbps × n
OFF ON 48 Kbps × n
OFF OFF Not used
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 377
Revision 1.0
PA-FCHAFusion Call Control Handler
Note 2: Data speed 64 kbps is used for the T1 or E1 interface.
Data speed 56 kbps is used for the T1 interface with bit stealing.Data speed 48 kbps is used for the T1 interface with both bit stealing and the Zero CodeSuppression (or Bit 7 Stuffing).
Note 3: When a node is set “network,” the distant node over the fusion link should be set “user,” and vice versa.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 378Revision 1.0
PA-FCHAFusion Call Control Handler
6. External Interface
The cable connections among the FCH, HUB, 24DTR are shown below.
Figure 3-95 FCH/HUB/DTI Connection
24DTRFCH
10AL (10) FLT CA
10 BASE-Tstraight cable
DTI
FCH CN2
HUB
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 379
Revision 1.0
PA-FCHAFusion Call Control Handler
See Figure 3-96 when multiple numbers of FCH circuit cards are connected to a 24DTR as a cascade con-nection. The FCH can be combined with CCH/DCH on a cascade connection.
One DTI card can have a maximum of five (5) Handler circuits cascaded within the FCH card, the CCHcard, and/or DCH card. Since the FCH card contains one Handler circuit per card, a maximum of five (5)FCH cards can be cascaded to a DTI card.
As an example, the following (a), (b) and (c) can coexist on a cascade connection.
(a) FCH card (One (1) Handler circuit card per card)
(b) CCH card (Two (2) Handler circuits per card)
(c) DCH card (Two (2) Handler circuits per card)
Also, you must consider the cascading cable length. (Note)
Figure 3-96 FCH Cascade Connection
Note: A maximum cable distance between DTI and the last cascaded FCH (or CCH/DCH) is 50 cm (1’ 7.6 ”).
24DTR FCH FCH FCH
Max. 5 handling circuits of FCH/CCH/DCH Note
To the next FCH/CCH/DCH
CN2
DTI
FCH
DTI
FCH
DTI
FCH
To HUB
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 380Revision 1.0
PA-FCHAFusion Call Control Handler
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MB
MNT
MODE
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13
SW14
ON
ON
OFF
8
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4ON
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 381
Revision 1.0
PA-24LCBVLine Circuit
PA-24LCBVLine Circuit
1. General Function
The PA-24LCBV circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 24-analog terminals and thesystem with a range of 600 (Ohm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send “Stutter DialTone,” which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp(MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required.
Figure 3-97 Location of PA-24LCBV (LC) Card in the System
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-24LCBV(LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following shaded slots.
max. 600 [Ω]
Analog Terminal
COT
LC
INT SW
CPU GT
I/O Local Bus
(PA-24LCBV)
C. O. LINE
• Loop Resistance : Max 600[Ω] (inclusive of terminal resistance)• Reverse Function : x 1 circuit• Stutter Dial Tone• Message Waiting Lamp• Encoding Law : µ-law
PUBLICNETWORK
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PIMMounting Module
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 382Revision 1.0
PA-24LCBVLine Circuit
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches on this card is shown in Figure 3-98.
Figure 3-98 Face Layout of PA-24LCBV (LC) Card
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this card are shown below.
LED NAME COLOR LED STATUS DESCRIPTION
OPE1 Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of circuit #0-#7 is operating normally.
OPE2 Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of circuit #8-#23 is operating normally.
BL0
BL23Green
Steady Lighting Line loop exists.
Flashing
1. Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal.
2. Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line.
3. Line is in Make-busy state.
4. Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.
OPE2OPE1
BL23
BL0
SW00 (MB)
BL2322212019181716151413121110
98
76543210
CN
SW18
SW10(BNW0-7)
SW11(BNW8-15)
SW12(BNW16-23)
SW17SW13
SW14
SW15
SW16
~
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 383
Revision 1.0
PA-24LCBVLine Circuit
5. Switch Settings
Switches on the PA-24LCBV (LC) card have the following meanings.
SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING
SW00(MB)
Circuit Card Make-busy Key
OFF Circuit card Make-busy cancel
ON Circuit card Make-busy
SW10(BNW0-7)
Balancing Network Designation
• Each element on this switch corresponds to circuit #0-#7.
ON
North America, Other Country (A/µ Law)BNW: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) (Note 1) for long distance.
OFFNorth America, Other Country (A/µ Law)BNW : 600 Ω (Note 1) for short distance
SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING
SW11(BNW8-15)
Balancing Network Designation
• Each element on this switch corresponds to circuit #8-#15.
The same as previous table.
SW12(BMW16-23)
Balancing Network Designation
• Each element on this switch corresponds to circuit #16-#23.
The same as previous table.
SW13
Selection of the User
SW13-1
SW13-2
SW13-3
SW13-4
North America
ON OFF OFF OFF
SW141 OFF Fixed to OFF
2StutterDial Tone
ON Stutter Dial tone Available
OFF Stutter Dial tone not Available
3 OFF Fixed to OFF
4 OFF Fixed to OFF
ON
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
OFF
1 2 3 4ON
OFF
1 2 3 4ON
OFF
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 384Revision 1.0
PA-24LCBVLine Circuit
Note 1: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) and 600 Ω are as follows.
SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING
SW15 1 OFF Fixed to OFF
2 OFF Fixed to OFF
3 OFF Fixed to OFF
4 OFF Fixed to OFF
SW16
1 OFF Fixed to OFF
2 OFF Fixed to OFF
3Message Waiting Lamp
ONMessage Waiting LampFlashing (Controlled by Firmware)
OFFMessage Waiting Lamp lit orFlashing (Selected and Controlled by Software)
4 OFF Fixed to OFF
SW17
1 OFF Fixed to OFF
2 OFF Fixed to OFF
3 OFF Fixed to OFF
4 OFF Fixed to OFF
5 OFF Fixed to OFF
6 OFF Fixed to OFF
7 OFF Fixed to OFF
8 OFF Fixed to OFF
SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING
SW18
Polarity reverse or Momentary Open
ON Momentary open
OFF Polarity reverse
ON OFF
1 2 3 4ON
OFF
1 2 3 4ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
OFF
OFF
Slide switch(RVS) (OPEN)
ON
350 1000
0.21
Compromise Impedance(EIA/TIA-464A)
600
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 385
Revision 1.0
PA-24LCBVLine Circuit
6. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
SW00(MB)
Note: Normal operating mode is down.
SW10(BNW0-7)
SW11(BNW8-15)
SW12(BNW16-23)
SW13
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
SW18
ON
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1ON
2 3 4
1ON
2 3 4
1ON
2 3 4
1ON
2 3 4
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
OFF
(RVS) (OPEN)
ON
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 386Revision 1.0
PA-24LCBVLine Circuit
7. External Interface
Location of the LT connector leads and LC connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-99.
(a) PIMWhen this circuit card is mounted in PIM, necessary leads appear on the LT connectors as follows.
Figure 3-99 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (1/2)
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B8B9
Accommodated in 1 Accommodated in 2
LT 5, 11 ConnectorLT 4, 10 Connector
B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23
A16A17A18A19A20A21A22A23
A8A9
A10A11A12A13A14A15
B8B9
B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23
A16A17A18A19A20A21A22A23
A8A9
A10A11A12A13A14A15
1 2 1 2
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 387
Revision 1.0
PA-24LCBVLine Circuit
Figure 3-99 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (2/2)
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B8B9
Accommodated in 3
LT 5, 11 ConnectorLT 4, 10 Connector
B10B11B12B13B14B15
A8A9
A10A11A12A13A14A15
B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23
A16A17A18A19A20A21A22A23
3 3
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 388Revision 1.0
PA-24LCBVLine Circuit
(b) LC Connector Leads
Figure 3-100 LC Connector Lead Location (LC Cable)
1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
7A
8A
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
7A
8A
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
7A
8A
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
LC CABLE
LC Connector (1)CONN1
Champ ConnectorLT
LC Connector (2)CONN2
LC Connector (3)CONN3
PKG1
PKG2
PKG3
PKG1
PKG2
PKG3
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 389
Revision 1.0
PA-24LCBVLine Circuit
8. Connecting Route Diagram
Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24LCBV(LC) is as follows.
A and B leads for channels #0 - #7 appear from the LC Connector located on the front edge of the card.
Figure 3-101 Connecting Route Diagram
MDF
L1
L2
L1
L2
L1
L2
L1
L2
Jack
Jack
Jack
Jack
AnalogTerminal
AnalogTerminal
AnalogTerminal
AnalogTerminal
A7
B7
A0
B0
A23
B23
A8
B8
PBX
LT Connector
InstallationCable
Maximum 600 [Ω] (inclusive of terminal resistance)
Maximum 600 [Ω] (inclusive of terminal resistance)
Installation Cable
LT Connector
LC Cable
PA-24LCBV
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 390Revision 1.0
PA-24LCBVLine Circuit
9. LC Cable Connection
Figure 3-102 Outer View of LC Cable
Earth Cable
3m (9.8 feet)
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 391
Revision 1.0
PA-24LCBVLine Circuit
Figure 3-103 Cable Running for LC Cable (Example)
FRONT
REAR
LC Cable
LC CableLC Cable
LT Cable
PA-24LCBV
Earth Plate
Earth Cable
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 392Revision 1.0
PA-M69Power Failure Transfer
PA-M69Power Failure Transfer
1. General Function
This circuit card executes a C.O. line to the telephone or the release of a C.O. line due to a power supplyfailure, system down, software order, etc. This circuit card is also provided with the change circuit of 12circuits.
Figure 3-104 Location of PA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU) within the System
TELMDF
TEL(AO, BO)
MDF
LC(AI, BI)
LC TSW COT MDF
TRK(TI, RI)
NCU
MDF
CO
(TO, RO)
(NITE KEY)
Position within the System
ATTCON
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 393
Revision 1.0
PA-M69Power Failure Transfer
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
PIMMounting Module
PA
-M69
PA
-M69
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1918 20 21 22 23
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 394Revision 1.0
PA-M69Power Failure Transfer
3. Face Layout of Lamp, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamp, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-105.
Figure 3-105 Face Layout of PA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU)
4. Lamp Indication
The contents of lamp indication of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit even when PFT is being activated on any one of the 12 circuits.
OPE
MB
NCU1
NCU0SW0
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 395
Revision 1.0
PA-M69Power Failure Transfer
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NAMESWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARDSETTING
MEANING
MBUP Circuit card make busy
DOWN × Circuit card make busy cancel
SW0
1 ON × Fixed
2 OFF × Fixed
3 OFF × Fixed
4 OFF × Fixed
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 396Revision 1.0
PA-M69Power Failure Transfer
6. External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card, accommodation of the NCU connector onthe front side of the circuit card, and connecting route diagram are shown in Figure 3-106.
Figure 3-106 LT Connector Leads Accommodation
PIMMounting Module
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
26272829303132333435363738394041
12345678910111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
KY1KY3
KY0
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 6 Connector
KY2KY4KY6
KY5KY7
1 1
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0Highway Block
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 397
Revision 1.0
PA-M69Power Failure Transfer
Figure 3-107 NCU Connector Accommodation
NCU Connector Accommodation
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
NCU0
BO00 BI00 TO00 TI00 BO01 BI01 TO01 TI01 BO02 BI02 TO02 TI02 BO03 BI03 TO03 TI03 BO04 BI04 TO04 TI04 BO05 BI05 TO05 TI05
AO00 AI00 RO00 RI00 AO01 AI01 RO01 RI01 AO02 AI02 RO02 RI02 AO03 AI03 RO03 RI03 AO04 AI04 RO04 RI04 AO05 AI05 RO05 RI05
CHAMP Connector
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK
No. 0 No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 5
Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
NCU1
BO06 BI06 TO06 TI06 BO07 BI07 TO07 TI07 BO08 BI08 TO08 TI08 BO09 BI09 TO09 TI09 BO10 BI10 TO10 TI10 BO11 BI11 TO11 TI11
AO06 AI06 RO06 RI06 AO07 AI07 RO07 RI07 AO08 AI08 RO08 RI08 AO09 AI09 RO09 RI09 AO10 AI10 RO10 RI10 AO11 AI11 RO11 RI11
CHAMP Connector
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK
No. 6 No. 7 No. 8 No. 9 No. 10 No. 11
Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 398Revision 1.0
PA-M69Power Failure Transfer
Figure 3-108 Connecting Route Diagram
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIMSW0
MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel
NEAX2400 IPXMDF
KY7
Front Connector NCU
KY0
KY7
KY0
LC
COT
A
B
A
B
AB
AB
External Key Box
C.O. Line
AO00BO00
AI00
BI00
RO00
TO00RI00
TI00
Station
PFT
ON 1 2 3 4
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 399
Revision 1.0
PA-M96HUB
PA-M96HUB
1. General Function
This circuit card provides the repeater function which is based on ANSI/IEEE 802.3. Eight (8) of the10BASE-T ports are located on a HUB card.
As seen from the functional connection diagram below, the HUB card is located between the CPR (LANI)and the FCH card. The HUB card distributes the Fusion link data onto FCH cards.
Figure 3-109 Location of PA-M96 (HUB) Card in the System
CPU LANI(PZ-PC19)
CPR #0
CPU LANI(PZ-PC19)
CPR #1
TO/FROM
THE OTHER FUSION
NODE
TO/FROM
THE OTHER FUSION
NODE
DTI
DTI
FCH
FCH
HUB
(PA-M96)
HUB
(PA-M96)
10BASE-T cross cable is used
for cascade connection
10BASE-T straight cable
Note: This figure shows the fusion link with full redundancy (N+1) configuration.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 400Revision 1.0
PA-M96HUB
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-M96 (HUB) card can be mounted in any universal slot of PIM0 as shown below.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-110.
Figure 3-110 Face Layout of PA-M96 (HUB) Card
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PIMMounting Module
PIM0
Universal Slots Universal Slots
MB
OPE
CRS7
CRS0SENS
TP7-X
TP6-X
TP5-X
TP4-X
TP3-X
TP2-X
TP1-X
TP0-X
xxxxxxxx
ST7
ST0
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 401
Revision 1.0
PA-M96HUB
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
Note 1: This lamp is used to indicate the status of the TPn-X port. Therefore, the circuit card operates normallyregardless of the cable polarity.
Note 2: This circuit card can detect data packet collisions at a TPn-X port when it would be a collision of 2048 bit-times (2.048 ms) or when the packet collides 32 times consecutively. The port is then locked-out until thecollision is over.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.
CRS0~CRS7 Green Lights when the circuit card detects the carrier signal form the TPn-X port.
ST0~ST7 Green
The meanings of the ST0~ST7 lamps vary depending on the SEL switch settings as shown in the table below.
SEL SWITCH MEANINGS
0Lights when the receiving pair cable polarity of the TPn-X port is reversed. (n = 0~7) Note 1
2Lights when the 10 BASE-T (RJ-45) cable is attached to the TPn-X port, and the TCP/IP link has been established. The lamp may light regardless of the receiving pair cable polarity. (n = 0~7)
3Lights when the TPn-X port is normal.Remains off when collisions have occurred at the TPn-X port.(n = 0~7) Note 2
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 402Revision 1.0
PA-M96HUB
5. Switch Setting
Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGDESCRIPTION
MBUP Circuit card Make-busy.
DOWN × Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
SENSE
0 Polarity indication on the STn lamps for TPn-X ports (n = 0~7).
1 Not used.
2 × TPn-X ports operate as a repeater HUB. (n = 0~7).
3Data-Packet-Collision indication on the STn lamps for TPn-X ports (n = 0~7).
4 - F Not used.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 403
Revision 1.0
PA-M96HUB
6. External Interface
Figure 3-111 FCH/HUB/DTI/LANI Connection
24DTR
CN2
FCH
FCH
PZ-PC19 (LANI)
10 BASE-T straight Cable
10 BASE-T straight Cable
HUB
10AL (10) FLT CA
DTI
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 404Revision 1.0
PA-M96HUB
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MB
SEL
ON
2
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 405
Revision 1.0
PA-M103HUB
PA-M103HUB
1. General Function
This circuit card is a class II HUB card based on IEEE802.3 (10BASE-T)/IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX),which is located between 100M Ether card (PZ-PC22/PZ-PC23) and FCCH card that establishes Fusionlink to the system.This circuit card provides the repeater function, and 12 ports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX are accommodatedon one HUB card. The state of each port is indicated on the LED.This card is used in IPX-UMG system.
Figure 3-112 Location of PA-M103 (HUB) Card in the System
LAN CPU
LP#0
LAN CPU
CMP#0
LAN
LAN
CPU
SP#0
10BASE-T
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX(P-BUS)
100BASE-TX(P-BUS)
HUB
HUB
HUB
FCCH DTI
LANCPU
LP#1
LANCPU
CMP#1
LAN
LAN
CPU
SP#1
10BASE-T
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX(P-BUS)
100BASE-TX(P-BUS)
HUB
HUB
FCCHDTI
To other Fusion Node
NIC
MAT
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 406Revision 1.0
PA-M103HUB
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-M103 (HUB) card can be mounted in any universal slot of PIM as shown below.
3. Face Layout of Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-113.
Figure 3-113 Face layout of PA-M103 (HUB) Card
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Universal Slots Universal Slots
Note: Related to the length of Ether cable, it is recommended that this card ought to be mounted on the PIMwithin IMG0/4/8/12 (LPR accommodated IMGs).
TPB
TPA
TP9
TP8
TP7
TP6
TP5
TP4
TP3
TP2
TP1
TP0
L3LA L9L8 L7L6L2L1 L0
L5 L4L3
OPEPWALMTXRX
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 407
Revision 1.0
PA-M103HUB
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
No switch settings are required.
LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation
PWALM Red Lights when the OBP (On Board Power) output voltage blownout
L0-L9, LA, LB Green Link has been established
TXRX Green Data packet sending/receiving
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 408Revision 1.0
PA-M103HUB
6. External Interface
Figure 3-114 External Interface for PA-M103 (HUB) Card
7. Switch Setting Sheet
No switch settings are required.
PZ-PC22(LANI)
HUB
100 BASE-TX Straight Cable
(PA-M103)
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 409
Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTKRegister Sender Trunk
PA-8RSTKRegister Sender Trunk
1. General Function
This circuit card is an 8-circuit register sender trunk card which transmits and sends selective signals (DPsignals, PB signals, MF signals).
Figure 3-115 Location of PA-8RSTK (8RST) within the System
ATT
LC
COT
TLT
TSW
ATI
Station
C.O. Line
Tie LineRST
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 410Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTKRegister Sender Trunk
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
PIMMounting Module
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 411
Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTKRegister Sender Trunk
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-116.
Figure 3-116 Face Layout of PA-8RSTK (8RST)
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.
BLR0
BLR7
Red Lights when the corresponding circuit has received the selective signals.
Flash Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.
OFF Remains off while the corresponding circuit is idle.
BLS0
BLS7
Red Lights when the corresponding circuit has sent the selective signals.
Flash Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.
OFF Remains off while the corresponding circuit is idle.
OPE
N-OPE
MB
BLS7
BLS4
MBS7
MBS4BLR7
BLR4MBR7
MBR4BLS3
BLS0
MBS3
MBS0BLR3
BLR0
MBR3
MBR0
SW0
SW1
~~
~~
~~
~~
~~
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 412Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTKRegister Sender Trunk
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit card make busy.
DOWN × Circuit card make busy cancel.
MBR0~3
0ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
1ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
2ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
3ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
MBR4~7
4ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
5ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
6ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 413
Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTKRegister Sender Trunk
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBR4~7 7ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
MBS0~3
0ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
1ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
2ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
3ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
MBS4~7
4ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
5ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
6ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
7ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 414Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTKRegister Sender Trunk
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW0
1ON
OFF
2ON
OFF
3ON
OFF
4ON
OFF
5ON
OFF
6ON
OFF
7 OFF × Threshold value is not selected (Fixed to OFF).
8 ON × Fixed.
SELECTION OF PBR THRESHOLD VALUESW0-1 SW0-2 SW0-3 PBR THRESHOLD VALUE
ON ON ON -21.7 dBm0
OFF ON ON -23.7 dBm0
ON OFF ON -25.7 dBm0
OFF OFF ON -27.7 dBm0
ON ON OFF -28.7 dBm0
OFF ON OFF -31.7 dBm0
ON OFF OFF -33.7 dBm0
OFF OFF OFF -35.7 dBm0
SELECTION OF MFR THRESHOLD VALUESW0-4 SW0-5 SW0-6 MFR THRESHOLD VALUE
ON ON ON -21 dBm0
OFF ON ON -23 dBm0
ON OFF ON -25 dBm0
OFF OFF ON -27 dBm0
ON ON OFF -28 dBm0
OFF ON OFF -31 dBm0
ON OFF OFF -33 dBm0
OFF OFF OFF -35 dBm0
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 415
Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTKRegister Sender Trunk
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW1
1ON MFR Receive Specification; AT&T
OFF MFR Receive Specification; CCITT No. 5
2
ONPBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal ShutDown Protect Timer)SHORT (Shorter than 10 ms.)
OFFPBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal ShutDown Protect Timer)LONG (Shorter than 20 ms.)
3 OFF × Fixed
4ON Register Selection; REG0, 1, 4, 5 of MFR.
OFF Register Selection; REG0, 1, 4, 5 of PBR.
5ON Register Selection; REG2, 3, 6, 7 of MFR.
OFF Register Selection; REG2, 3, 6, 7 of PBR.
6ON × DPR Receive Specification; General Spec.
OFF DPR Receive Specification; Australian Spec.
7 OFF × No setting (Fixed to OFF)
8 OFF × Fixed
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 416Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTKRegister Sender Trunk
6. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
MBR0-3
MBR4-7
MBS0-3
MBS4-7
SW0
SW1
MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel
ON
3210
ON
3210
ON
3210
ON
3210
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 417
Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTMRegister Sender Trunk
PA-8RSTMRegister Sender Trunk
1. General Function
This circuit card is an 8-circuit register sender trunk card that transmits and sends selective signals (DP sig-nals, PB signals, MF signals).
Figure 3-117 Location of the PA-8RSTM (8RST) Card in the System
ATT
LC
COT
TLT
TSW
ATI
Station
C.O. Line
Tie LineRST
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 418Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTMRegister Sender Trunk
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations for this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors for this circuit card is shown below.
Figure 3-118 Face Layout of PA-8RSTM (8RST)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
Mounting Module PIM
OPE
MB
BLS7
BLS4
MBS7
MBS4BLR7
BLR4MBR7
MBR4BLS3
BLS0
MBS3
MBS0BLR3
BLR0
MBR3
MBR0
SW11
~~
~~
~~
~~
SW10
SW04
SW03
SW02
SW01
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 419
Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTMRegister Sender Trunk
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings for various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
BLR0
BLR7
Red Lights when the corresponding circuit has received the selective signals.
Flash Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state.
OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
BLS0
BLS7
Red Lights when the corresponding circuit has sent the selective signals.
Flash Flashes (60 IPM) when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state.
OFF Remains off while the corresponding circuit is idle.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit card Make-busy.
DOWN × Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
MBR0~3(SW01)
0ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
1ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
2ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
3ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
MBR4~7(SW03)
4ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
5ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
6ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
~~
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 420Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTMRegister Sender Trunk
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBR4~7(SW03)
7ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
MBS0~3(SW02)
0ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
1ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
2ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
3ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
MBS4~7(SW04)
4ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
5ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
6ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
7ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF × Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 421
Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTMRegister Sender Trunk
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW10
1ON ×
OFF
2ON ×
OFF
3
ON
OFF ×
4ON
OFF ×
5ON
OFF ×
6
ON ×
OFF
7 OFF × Threshold value is not selected (Fixed to OFF).
8 ON × Fixed.
SELECTION OF PBR THRESHOLD VALUE
SW10-1 SW10-2 SW10-3 PBR THRESHOLD VALUE
ON ON ON -21 dBm0
OFF ON ON -23 dBm0
ON OFF ON -25 dBm0
OFF OFF ON -27 dBm0
ON ON OFF -29 dBm0 (standard setting)
OFF ON OFF -31 dBm0
ON OFF OFF -33 dBm0
OFF OFF OFF -35 dBm0
SELECTION OF MFR THRESHOLD VALUE
SW10-4 SW10-5 SW10-6MFR THRESHOLD
VALUE
ON ON ON -17 dBm0
OFF ON ON -19 dBm0
ON OFF ON -21 dBm0
OFF OFF ON -23 dBm0 (standard setting)
ON ON OFF -25 dBm0
OFF ON OFF -27 dBm0
ON OFF OFF -29 dBm0
OFF OFF OFF -31 dBm0
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 422Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTMRegister Sender Trunk
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW11
1ON MFR Receive Specification; AT&T
OFF MFR Receive Specification; ITU-T No. 5
2
ONPBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal ShutDown Protect Timer)SHORT (Shorter than 10 ms.)
OFFPBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal ShutDown Protect Timer)LONG (Shorter than 20 ms.)
3 OFF × Fixed
4ON Register Selection; REG 0, 1, 2, 3 of MFR.
OFF Register Selection; REG 0, 1, 2, 3 of PBR.
5ON Register Selection; REG 4, 5, 6, 7 of MFR.
OFF Register Selection; REG 4, 5, 6, 7 of PBR.
6ON × DPR Receive Specification; General Spec.
OFF DPR Receive Specification; Australian Spec.
7 OFF × No setting (Fixed to OFF)
8 OFF × Fixed
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 423
Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTMRegister Sender Trunk
6. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
MBR0-3(SW01)
MBR4-7(SW03)
MBS0-3(SW02)
MBS4-7(SW04)
SW10
SW11
MB DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel
ON
3210
ON
3210
ON
3210
ON
3210
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 424Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTYRegister Sender Trunk
PA-8RSTYRegister Sender Trunk
1. General Function
The PA-8RSTY circuit card is equipped with eight circuits of Registers and Senders. More specifically, thiscard contains Dial Pulse Register (DPR), Push Button Receiver (PBR) for receiving digits from extensionsand/or the associated incoming trunks and Dial Pulse Sender (DPS), PB Signal Sender (PBS) for sendingdigits to a distant switching system. In addition, this card has “Register Sender” function, by which inter-digit pause can be changed and PB signals may be converted to DP signals and vice versa withoutintervention of the CPU. The card can be used for caller ID service.
Note: The PA-8RSTY card requires Series 7400 or later software.
Figure 3-119 Location of PA-8RSTY (8RST) within the System
GTCPU
TSWINT INT
PB linePBR
DPR
DPS
PBS
LC
I/O Local Bus
DP Telephone
Caller ID signals
NETWORK
PA-8RSTY
OFF HOOK(LC for CallingNumber Delivery)
PBR:PBS:DPR:DPS:
Push Button ReceiverPB Signal SenderDial Pulse RegisterDial Pulse Sender
PB Signal
DP Signal
OGT
This figure shows “Register Sender” function as an example.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 425
Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTYRegister Sender Trunk
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-8RSTY (RST) card can be mounted any universal slots as shown below.
Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-120.
Note: Layout of Lamps and switches differ from other RST cards.
Figure 3-120 Face Layout of PA-8RSTY (8RST)
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
00
00
01
01
02
02
03 04
03 04
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
SP
ISWM
DUMMY
FANU
CMP
PH
-PC
43 (EM
A)
PZ
-GT
13(IS
AG
T)
PZ
-GT
13(IS
AG
T)
PZ
-PC
23(LA
NI)
PZ
-PC
19(LA
NI)
PZ
-PC
19(LA
NI)
PZ
-PC
23(LA
NI)
PZ
-PC
23(LA
NI)
PZ
-PC
23(LA
NI)
PH
-DK
10 (DS
PC
)
PH
-IO24 (IO
C)
PW
RS
W0 (P
H-P
W14)
PW
RS
W1 (P
H-P
W14)
HS
W00 (P
U-S
W01) (R
ES
)
HS
W11 (P
U-S
W01) (R
ES
)
HS
W01 (P
U-S
W01)
HS
W10 (P
U-S
W01)
TS
W00 (P
U-S
W00-A
)
TS
W01 (P
U-S
W00-A
)
TS
W02 (P
U-S
W00-A
)
TS
W03 (P
U-S
W00-A
)
TS
W10 (P
U-S
W00-A
)
TS
W11 (P
U-S
W00-A
)
TS
W12 (P
U-S
W00-A
)
TS
W13 (P
U-S
W00-A
)
IOG
T0 (P
H-G
T10)
IOG
T1 (P
H-G
T10)
PLO
0 (PH
-CK
16-A/17-A
)
PLO
1 (PH
-CK
16-A/17-A
)
PH
-IO24 (IO
C) N
ote
00 01 02 03 04
PH
-PC
43 (EM
A)
PZ
-GT
13(IS
AG
T)
PZ
-GT
13(IS
AG
T)
PZ
-M565
(ISA
GT
A)
PZ
-M565
(ISA
GT
A)
PZ
-PC
22(LA
NI)
PZ
-ME
44(M
EM
)P
Z-M
E44
(ME
M)
PZ
-PC
22(LA
NI)
PZ
-PC
22(LA
NI)
PZ
-PC
22(LA
NI)
PH
-M22 (M
MC
)
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 426Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTYRegister Sender Trunk
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
BLR0
BLR7
Green Lights when the corresponding circuit has received the selective signals.
Flash Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.
OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
BLS0
BLS7
Green Lights when the corresponding circuit has sent the selective signals.
Flash Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.
OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
--
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 427
Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTYRegister Sender Trunk
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MB(SW00)
UP Circuit card make busy
DOWN × Circuit card make busy cancel
SW01(MBR0-7) 0
ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit
OFF × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
1ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit
OFF × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
2ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit
OFF × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
3ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit
OFF × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
4ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit
OFF × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
5ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit
OFF × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
6ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit
OFF × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
7ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit
OFF × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
SW02(MBS0-7) 0
ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit
OFF × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
1ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit
OFF × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
2ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit
OFF × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
3ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit
OFF × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
4ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit
OFF × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
5ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit
OFF × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
6ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit
OFF × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
7ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit
OFF × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 428Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTYRegister Sender Trunk
SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING
SW10
1
3
DTMF Signal ReceiverThreshold Value [Standard Setting]
4OFF Fixed to OFF
SW11
1
3
MFR Signal ReceiverThreshold Value [Standard Setting]
4OFF Fixed to OFF
1 23 4
-1 23 4 ON
OFF
Selection of PBR Threshold Value
SW10-1
SW10-2
SW10-3
DTMF Threshold Value
ONOFFONOFFONOFFONOFF
ONONOFFOFFONONOFFOFF
ONONONONOFFOFFOFFOFF
-21.0 dBm0-23.0 dBm0-25.0 dBm0-27.0 dBm0-29.0 dBm0-31.0 dBm0-33.0 dBm0-35.0 dBm0
1 23 4
-
1 23 4 ON
OFF
Selection of MFR Threshold Value
SW11-1
SW11-2
SW11-3
MFR Threshold Value
ONOFFONOFFONOFFONOFF
ONONOFFOFFONONOFFOFF
ONONONONOFFOFFOFFOFF
-17.0 dBm0-19.0 dBm0-21.0 dBm0-23.0 dBm0-25.0 dBm0-27.0 dBm0-29.0 dBm0-31.0 dBm0
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 429
Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTYRegister Sender Trunk
SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING
SW12
1
Designation of MFR Specification •
AT & T specification
•ITU-T No. 5 specification
2
DTMF SignalCut-off Guard Timer •
SHORT (less than 10 ms)
[Standard Setting]
•
LONG (less than 20 ms)
3
Register Selection(MFR/PBR) •
REG #0, #1, #2, #3 function as MFR.
•REG #0, #1, #2, #3 function as PBR.
4
Register Selection(MFR/PBR) •
REG #4, #5, #6, #7 function as MFR.
•REG #4, #5, #6, #7 function as PBR.
12 34
1 234
12 34
1 23 4
1 23 4
1 234
12 34
1 234
1 234
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 430Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTYRegister Sender Trunk
SWITCH SWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
SW131
ON MF Transmission Level:-9dBm
OFF MF Transmission Level:-5dBm
2 OFF × Fixed to OFF
3 OFF × Fixed to OFF
4 OFF × Fixed to OFF
SW14 1 OFF × Fixed to OFF
2 OFF × Fixed to OFF
3 OFF × Fixed to OFF
4 OFF × Fixed to OFF
SW15 1 OFF × Fixed to OFF
2 OFF × Fixed to OFF
3 OFF × Fixed to OFF
4 OFF × Fixed to OFF
SW16 1 ON × Fixed to ON
2 OFF × Fixed to OFF
3 OFF × Fixed to OFF
4 OFF × Fixed to OFF
SW17 1 OFF × Fixed to OFF
2 OFF × Fixed to OFF
3 OFF × Fixed to OFF
4 OFF × Fixed to OFF
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 431
Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTYRegister Sender Trunk
6. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO.SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
SW00(MB)
Circuit card make busy cancelStandard Setting : Down
SW01(MBR0-7)
SW02(MBS0-7)
SW10
SW11
ON
7654
ON
321
8
7654
ON
321
8
1ON
2 3 4
1ON
2 3 4
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 432Revision 1.0
PA-8RSTYRegister Sender Trunk
PIMSW12
SW13
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
MODULE SLOT NO.SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
1ON
2 3 4
1ON
2 3 4
1ON
2 3 4
1ON
2 3 4
1ON
2 3 4
1ON
2 3 4
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 433
Revision 1.0
PA-SDTASDH/SONET Digital Trunk
PA-SDTASDH/SONET Digital Trunk
1. General Function
The PA-SDTA circuit card provides a maximum of 28 interface (1.5 Mbps) used with the fiber optic cable.This card has also the MUX function and is connected directly to the TSW card. This card is used with thePA-SDTB card.
Figure 3-121 Location of PA-SDTA (SDT) Card in the System
F u s i o n
Node-A
Fiber Optic Cable
Fiber Optic Cable
For Dual Configuration
Connection Link (Data Link)
Connection Trunk (Speech Path)
Internal LAN
FCH
SDTB
Node-B
Internal LAN
SDTB
FCH
+
Fusion Link with FCCH
Fusion Link without FCCH
F u s i o n
Node-A
Internal LAN
Node-B
) SDT: SDH/SONET Digital Trunk FCH: Fusion Call Control Handler*
Fiber Optic Cable
Fiber Optic Cable
For Dual Configuration
Connection Trunk (Speech Path)SDTB
SDTB
SDTA
SDTA
SDTA
SDTA
SDTA
SDTA
SDTA
SDTA
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 434Revision 1.0
PA-SDTASDH/SONET Digital Trunk
2. Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card is mounted in a universal slot next to (either left or right side of) PA-SDTB. When thiscard is provided in a dual configuration, mount this card on both sides of PA-SDTB.
Mounting conditions are shown below.
• Only the power is supplied from Back Wiring Board (BWB).
• This card is connected to the PA-SDTB card using the following front cables.
• For single configuration: SDT CABLEB <S>
• For dual configuration: SDT CABLEA <D>
• Fiber optic cables are connected to this card.
• Time slots used for this circuit card are determined by the cable connection between the PA-SDTB andTSW.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Universal Slots Universal Slots
PIMMounting Module
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 435
Revision 1.0
PA-SDTASDH/SONET Digital Trunk
Example: When the PA-SDTA card is mounted in the 1-IMG systemIn Figure 3-122, time slots of Module Group 01 are used. AUNT data is required even if PIM2/PIM3 is not actually mounted.
Figure 3-122 PA-SDTA Card Mounted in the 1 IMG System
( TS of PIM3 is used for SDT. )
( TS of PIM2 is used for SDT. )
PH
-PC
30(M
UX
)P
H-S
W10
(TS
W)
MUX3
MUX2
MUX1
MUXPH
-PC
30(M
UX
)P
H-S
W10
(TS
W)
MUX3
MUX2
MUX1
MUX
PA
-SD
TB
(SD
TB
)
MUX1A
MUX0A
MUX0B
MUX1B
PA
-SD
TA
(SD
TA
)
PIM3(Not actuallymounted)
PIM2(Not actuallymounted)
PIM1
PIM0
LPM
I/O
PCM
I/O
PCM
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 436Revision 1.0
PA-SDTASDH/SONET Digital Trunk
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout for lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-123.
Figure 3-123 Face Layout of PA-SDTA (SDT)
MB
PCM
SC
P-SW
I/O
SW11 SW12
OPE
ACT
PALMOPTSYNCLPB
12
34
56
78
12
34
56
78
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 437
Revision 1.0
PA-SDTASDH/SONET Digital Trunk
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPEGreen Remains lit while this circuit card is operating normally.
Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state.
PALM Red Lights when the OBP in this circuit card is abnormal.
OPT Red Lights when the optical input signals are cut off.
SYNC Red Lights when receiving 52 Mbps clock comes off synchronization.
LPB Green Lights when Loop-back is designated.
ACTGreen Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.
Off Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 438Revision 1.0
PA-SDTASDH/SONET Digital Trunk
5. Switch Settings
Switch settings on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit card Make-busy
DOWN × Circuit card Make-busy cancel
SW11
1 OFF × Fixed
2 ON × Fixed
3 ON × Fixed
4 OFF × Fixed
5 OFF × Not used
6ON PAD function is effective.
OFF × PAD function is not effective.
7ON Setting of A-law
OFF × Setting of µ-law
8ON × OPT#0 Act (This card is used for System 0)
OFF OPT#1 Act (This card is used for System 1)
SW12 1-8 OFF × Not used
P-SW
1ON Designation of OLLPB (OPT Local Loop-back)
OFF × Designation of OLLPB cancel
2ON Designation of ORLPB (OPT Remote Loop-back)
OFF × Designation of ORLPB cancel.
3 OFF × Not used
4ON Make-busy request
OFF × Make-busy request cancel
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 439
Revision 1.0
PA-SDTASDH/SONET Digital Trunk
6. External Interface
• Cable Connection
Figure 3-124 Cable Connection between PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB
PA-SDTB
PA-SDTA
Fiber optic cable
Note1SDT CABLEB <S>
Note 1: When the PA-SDTA card is provided in a dual configuration, SDT CABLEA (D) is used.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 440Revision 1.0
PA-SDTASDH/SONET Digital Trunk
• When the PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB card is mounted in the 1-IMG system
As shown in Figure 3-125, time slots of Module Group 01 are used. AUNT data is required even if PIM2/PIM3 is not actually mounted.
Figure 3-125 Example of Cable Connection for 1-IMG System
( TS of PIM3 is used for SDT. )
( TS of PIM2 is used for SDT. )
PH
-PC
30(M
UX
)P
H-S
W10
(TS
W)
MUX3
MUX2
MUX1
MUXPH
-PC
30(M
UX
)P
H-S
W10
(TS
W)
MUX3
MUX2
MUX1
MUX
PA
-SD
TB
(SD
TB
)
MUX1A
MUX0A
MUX0B
MUX1B
PA
-SD
TA
(SD
TA
)
PIM3(Not actuallymounted)
PIM2(Not actuallymounted)
PIM1
PIM0
MT24 TSW CA-140
LPM
I/O
PCM
I/O
PCM
Note
Note: When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in PIM0, MT24 TSW CA-90 is used.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 441
Revision 1.0
PA-SDTASDH/SONET Digital Trunk
• When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in the 4-IMG system
(a) When to use the 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x cable
When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in the 4-IMG system, the 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x cable is used for connection between the PA-SDTB and TSW. The type of cable varies depend-ing on the mounting location of the PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB card(s).
Table 3-6 Type of 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x Cable
IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3
PIM3 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-J
PIM2 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-I
PIM1 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-E 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H
PIM0 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-D 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 442Revision 1.0
PA-SDTASDH/SONET Digital Trunk
(b) Relationship between the cable connection and the time slot
Trunk data for SDT is assigned to an odd-number Module Group. The module group is determined by the connection of the 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x cable as shown in the table below.
Note 1: MUX1x on PA-SDTB and MUX1xx on BWB of TSWM are used when the system is a dual configuration.
Note 2: When half of the time slots are used in a module group, time slots for PIM2 must be used. However, theremaining time slots (for PIM3) cannot be used for other circuit cards.
Table 3-7 Relationship between Cable Connection and Time Slot
MODULE GROUP
Assigned for SDT
TIME SLOTS Assigned for
SDT
CABLE CONNECTIONS
REMARKSFROM (Connectors on
PA-SDTB)
TO(Connectors onBWB of TSWM)
MG01
PIM2 of IMG0MUX0A MUX002 In this case, PIM2 and PIM3
of IMG0 are not actually mounted; However, AUNT data for PIM2/PIM3 is required.
MUX1A MUX102
PIM3 of IMG0MUX0B MUX003
MUX1B MUX103
MG03
PIM2 of IMG1MUX0A MUX012 In this case, PIM2 and PIM3
of IMG1 are not actually mounted; However, AUNT data for PIM2/PIM3 is required.
MUX1A MUX112
PIM3 of IMG1MUX0B MUX013
MUX1B MUX113
MG05
PIM2 of IMG2MUX0A MUX022 In this case, PIM2 and PIM3
of IMG2 are not actually mounted; However, AUNT data for PIM2/PIM3 is required.
MUX1A MUX122
PIM3 of IMG2MUX0B MUX023
MUX1B MUX123
MG07
PIM2 of IMG3MUX0A MUX032 In this case, PIM2 and PIM3
of IMG3 are not actually mounted; However, AUNT data for PIM2/PIM3 is required.
MUX1A MUX132
PIM3 of IMG3MUX0B MUX033
MUX1B MUX133
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 443
Revision 1.0
PA-SDTASDH/SONET Digital Trunk
Example: When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB circuit cards are mounted in PIM3 of IMG0, and MG07 (PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG3) is assigned for the SDT interface, the type of cable and connector locations are as shown in the following figure. The mounting location of PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB circuit card has no relationship to the time slots assigned for the SDT interface so the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB circuit cards can be mounted in any PIM.
Figure 3-126 Example of Cable Connection for 4-IMG System
PA
-SD
TB
PIM 3 Time slots assignedfor SDT (MG07).PIM2 and PIM3 ofIMG3 are not actuallymounted.
34PH MT24 TSW CA-H(Refer to Table 3-3.)
To MUX133
To MUX033
To MUX132
To MUX032
PIM 2
PIM 1
PIM 0
Dummy
IMG3
PIM 3
PIM 2
PIM 1
PIM 0
Dummy
IMG2
PIM 3
PIM 2
PIM 1
PIM 0
TSWM
IMG1
PIM 3
PIM 2
PIM 1
PIM 0
LPM
IMG0
PIM3
BWB of TSWM
MUX0AMUX1AMUX0BMUX1B
Connect the cables according to the time slots assigned for SDT.(Refer to Table 3-8 and Figure 3-133.)
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 444Revision 1.0
PA-SDTASDH/SONET Digital Trunk
Figure 3-127 Location of MUXxxx Connectors for SDT
MU
X003
MU
X002
MU
X013
MU
X012
MU
X023
MU
X022
MU
X033
MU
X032
MU
X103
MU
X102
MU
X113
MU
X112
MU
X123
MU
X122
MU
X133
MU
X132
MUXxxx Connectors for SDT
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 445
Revision 1.0
PA-SDTASDH/SONET Digital Trunk
(c) Length of Fiber Optic Cable
The maximum length of the fiber optic cable is approximately 15 kilometers (9.3 miles). Figure 3-128 shows the level diagram of the fiber optic interface.
Figure 3-128 Level Diagram
Level margin in the case of 15 kilometers (9.3 miles) is as shown in the following table.
Note: Maximum cable length varies depending on the type of cable and the number of connection points.
Table 3-8 Level Margin
CONDITION LEVEL MARGIN
Worst case 4.0 dB
Best case 11.0 dB
0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 12.00 14.00 16.00 18.00 20.00 (km)
0.00
-5.00
-10.00
-15.00
-20.00
-25.00
-30.00
-35.00Minimum Receiver Sensitivity : -31.00 dBm
Maximum Receiver Sensitivity : -8.00 dBm
: Best Case
: Worst Case: Maximum Receiver Sensitivity : Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
Cable Length1.20 2.40 3.70 4.40 6.20 7.40 8.60 9.90 11.00 12.00 (miles)
Rec
eive
r S
ensi
tivity
(dB
m)
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 446Revision 1.0
PA-SDTASDH/SONET Digital Trunk
• Accommodation for the LT connector leads of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-129.
Figure 3-129 LT Connector Lead Accommodation
26272829303132333435363738394041
12345678910111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector
Accommodated in 3
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 1
LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector
POUT B POUT A
POUT B POUT A
POUT B POUT A
21 3 2 1 3 21 3 1 22 3 1 23 1 3
Note: The output of POUT A/B is 1,544 MHz.
PIMMounting Module
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 447
Revision 1.0
PA-SDTASDH/SONET Digital Trunk
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MB
SW11
SW12
P-SW
ON
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 ON5 6 7 8
1ON
2 3 4
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 448Revision 1.0
PA-SDTBSDH/SONET Digital Trunk
PA-SDTBSDH/SONET Digital Trunk
1. General Function
The PA-SDTA circuit card provides a maximum of 28 interface (1.5 Mbps) used with the fiber optic cable.This card also has the MUX function and is connected directly to the TSW card. This card is used with thePA-SDTA card.
Figure 3-130 Location of PA-SDTB (SDT) Card in the System
F u s i o n
Node-A
Fiber Optic Cable
Fiber Optic Cable
For Dual Configuration
Connection Link (Data Link)
Connection Trunk (Speech Path)
Internal LAN
FCH
SDTB
Node-B
Internal LAN
SDTB
FCH
+
Fusion Link with FCCH
Fusion Link without FCCH
F u s i o n
Node-A
Internal LAN
Node-B
) SDT: SDH/SONET Digital Trunk FCH: Fusion Call Control Handler*
Fiber Optic Cable
Fiber Optic Cable
For Dual Configuration
Connection Trunk (Speech Path)SDTB
SDTB
SDTA
SDTA
SDTA
SDTA
SDTA
SDTA
SDTA
SDTA
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 449
Revision 1.0
PA-SDTBSDH/SONET Digital Trunk
2. Mounting Location/Condition
This circuit card can be mounted in any universal slots.
Mounting conditions are shown below.
• Only the power is supplied from Back Wiring Board (BWB).
• This card is connected to the PA-SDTA card using the following front cables.
• For single configuration: SDT CABLEB <S>
• For dual configuration: SDT CABLEA <D>
• This card is connected to the TSW card.
• Time slots used for this circuit card are determined by the cable connection between the PA-SDTB andTSW.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PIMMounting Module
Universal Slots Universal Slots
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 450Revision 1.0
PA-SDTBSDH/SONET Digital Trunk
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in the figure in Figure 3-131.
Figure 3-131 Face Layout of PA-SDTB (SDT)
MB
PCM
MUX0A
MUX1A
MUX0B
MUX1B
I/O
OPE
2MALA2MALB32MALA32MALBACT0ACT1SYC0ASYC1ASYC0BSYC1B
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 451
Revision 1.0
PA-SDTBSDH/SONET Digital Trunk
4. Lamp Indications
Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below:
Note: A-side MUX means the card located in UNIT0/1 and B-side MUX means the card located in UNIT2/3.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPEGreen Remains lit when this circuit card is in operation.
Red Remains lit when this circuit card is in non-operation.
2MALA Red Lights when 2 M clock and FH from A-side MUX is abnormal.
2MALB Red Lights when 2 M clock and FH from B-side MUX is abnormal.
32MALA Red Lights when 32 M clock from A-side MUX is abnormal.
32MALB Red Lights when 32 M clock from B-side MUX is abnormal.
ACT0Green Remains lit when MUX#0 is operating normally.
Off Remains off when MUX#0 is in stand-by state.
ACT1Green Remains lit when MUX#1 is operating normally.
Off Remains off when MUX#1 is in stand-by state.
SYC0AGreen Lights when MUX#0 synchronization with TSW is established in A-side.
Off Goes off when the synchronization is not established.
SYC1AGreen Lights when MUX#1 synchronization with TSW is established in A-side.
Off Goes off when the synchronization is not established.
SYC0BGreen Lights when MUX#0 synchronization with TSW is established in B-side.
Off Goes off when the synchronization is not established.
SYC1BGreen Lights when MUX#1 synchronization with TSW is established in B-side.
Off Goes off when the synchronization is not established.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 452Revision 1.0
PA-SDTBSDH/SONET Digital Trunk
5. Switch Settings
Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below:
6. External Interface
Refer to the PA-SDTA circuit card.
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit card Make-busy
DOWN × Circuit card Make-busy cancel
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE
MB
ON
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 453
Revision 1.0
PA-2CCHACommon Channel Handler
PA-2CCHACommon Channel Handler
1. General Function
Equipped with two circuits of Common Channel Handlers (CCHs), the PA-2CCH A circuit card providestwo signaling links for a digital/analog Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (CCIS) system, which canbe selected by key settings on this card. If a digital CCIS system, this card is connected to a Digital TrunkInterface (DTI) card with a flat cable to exchange common channel signals as illustrated below. To supportan analog CCIS system, this card also has an RS-232c interface for Modem(s).
Figure 3-132 Location of PA-2CCHA (CCH) within the System
CPU System Clock
INT SW INT
2-wire
2-wire
PLO
Clock Extraction(For a PLO-SECONDARY switch)
CCH
DTI
Common Channel Signaling Link (x2)
I/O Local Bus
Flat Cable
CPU
INT SW INT
Analog Tie Line
CCH
TLT
Common Channel Signaling Link (x2)
I/O Local Bus
CLK
MODEM
Digital CCIS
Analog CCIS (with MODEM)
CCISNETWORK
CCISNETWORK
: Common Channel Signaling Link
: Speech Path (PCM Signal)
: Clock Signal
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 454Revision 1.0
PA-2CCHACommon Channel Handler
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-2CCHA (CCH) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below. The DTI and CCHcard, however, cannot coexist in the same Highway Block.
The PA-2CCHA (CCH) card can be mounted in the following universal slots shown below. Note that thiscard cannot be mounted in slot 04.
Note: When this card is mounted in slot No.4, the LENS data for the first circuit of the CCH card must be assignedas “000 000”, which is rejected by the ATRK command.
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
No
te
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 455
Revision 1.0
PA-2CCHACommon Channel Handler
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-133.
Figure 3-133 Face Layout of PA-2CCHA (CCH)
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.
DOPE0DOPE1
Red Lights when the common channel signalling link is set up.
Flash Flashes when CCH is started up.
OPE
N-OPE
MB
DOPE0DOPE1
SW01
SW02
SW14
SW13
SW12
SW11SW10
TRKTo "CN2" connectoron CCT/DTI
DCH/CCHTo "TRK" connectoron other DCH/CCH
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 456Revision 1.0
PA-2CCHACommon Channel Handler
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCHNAME
SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD
SETTING MEANING
MB ON Circuit card make busy
OFF × Circuit card make busy cancel
SW010
ON No. 0 Circuit make busy request
OFF × No. 0 Circuit make busy request cancel
1ON No. 1 Circuit make busy request
OFF × No. 1 Circuit make busy request cancel
2 OFF × Not used
3 OFF × Not used
SW020
ON Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is performed.
OFF × Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is not performed.
1ON Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is performed.
OFF × Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is not performed.
2ON Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is performed.
OFF Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is not performed.
3ON Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is performed.
OFF Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is not performed.
SW10
1
2
3
SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/INSERT IN NO.0 CIRCUIT
SW10-1 SW10-2 SW10-3 TRANSFER SPEED
ON ON ON 64 kbps
OFF ON ON 32 kbps (Forward)
ON OFF ON 16 kbps (Forward)
OFF OFF ON 8 kbps (Forward)
ON ON OFF 64 kbps
OFF ON OFF 32 kbps (Backward)
ON OFF OFF 16 kbps (Backward)
OFF OFF OFF 8 kbps (Backward)
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 457
Revision 1.0
PA-2CCHACommon Channel Handler
Note: When SW10-4 is set ON, SW10-1, SW10-2 and 10-3 should be set ON.When SW10-8 is set ON, SW10-5, 10-6 and 10-7 should be set ON.
SWITCHNAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW10
4ON Modem is used in No. 0 Circuit
OFF Modem is not used in No. 0 Circuit
5
6
7
8ON Modem is used in No. 1 Circuit.
OFF Modem is not used in No. 1 Circuit.
SW11 (MODE0)
0 × Standard setting
SW12 (MODE1)
0 × Standard setting
SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/INSERT IN NO.1 CIRCUIT
SW10-5 SW10-6 SW10-7 TRANSFER SPEED
ON ON ON 64 kbps
OFF ON ON 32 kbps (Forward)
ON OFF ON 16 kbps (Forward)
OFF OFF ON 8 kbps (Forward)
ON ON OFF 64 kbps
OFF ON OFF 32 kbps (Backward)
ON OFF OFF 16 kbps (Backward)
OFF OFF OFF 8 kbps (Backward)
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 458Revision 1.0
PA-2CCHACommon Channel Handler
SWITCHNAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW13(for No. 0Circuit)
SW14(for No. 1Circuit)
1
2
3
4
5
6ON Mode setting; No. 7 PCR (Preventive Cyclic Retransmission method)
OFF Mode setting; No. 7 CCIS
7
8
SETTING OF TIME SLOT NUMBER OF DROP/INSERT
SW13-1/SW14-1
SW13-2/SW14-2
SW13-3/SW14-3
SW13-4/SW14-4
SW13-5/SW14-5 TIME SLOT NO.
OFFONOFFONOFFONOFFONOFFONOFFONOFFONOFFONOFFONOFFONOFFONOFFONOFFONOFFONOFFONOFFON
OFFOFFONONOFFOFFONONOFFOFFONONOFFOFFONONOFFOFFONONOFFOFFONONOFFOFFONONOFFOFFONON
OFFOFFOFFOFFONONONONOFFOFFOFFOFFONONONONOFFOFFOFFOFFONONONONOFFOFFOFFOFFONONONON
OFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFONONONONONONONONOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFONONONONONONONON
OFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFONONONONONONONONONONONONONONONON
CH0CH1CH2CH3CH4CH5CH6CH7CH8CH9
CH10CH11CH12CH13CH14CH15CH16CH17CH18CH19CH20CH21CH22CH23CH24CH25CH26CH27CH28CH29CH30CH31
SETTING OF SPEED OF MODE
SW13-7/SW14-7
SW13-8/SW14-8 SPEED
OFF OFF 2400 bps
OFF ON 4800 bps
ON OFF 9600 bps
ON ON Inhibit
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 459
Revision 1.0
PA-2CCHACommon Channel Handler
6. External Interface
In analog CCIS, necessary leads for Modems appear on LT connectors as follows.
See also Connecting Route Diagram for Digital/Analog CCIS.
Figure 3-134 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
Accommodated in 2
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
SG 0RT 0RS 0
RD 0ER 0ST2 0
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
SD 0RD 1ER 1ST2 1SD 1
SCKA 0TDA 0RDA 0
SCKA 1TDA 1RDA 1
SG 1RT 1RS 1
SCKB 0TDB 0RDB 0
SCKB 1TDB 1RDB 1
SG 0RT 0RS 0
SG 1RT 1RS 1
RD 0ER 0ST2 0SD 0RD 1ER 1ST2 1SD 1
SCKA 0TDA 0RDA 0
SCKA 1TDA 1RDA 1
SCKB 0TDB 0RDB 0
SCKB 1TDB 1RDB 1
2 21 21 21 21 211
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 460Revision 1.0
PA-2CCHACommon Channel Handler
Figure 3-134 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)
PIMMounting Module
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
26272829303132333435363738394041
12345678910111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
SG 0RT 0RS 0
RD 0ER 0ST2 0
Accommodated in 3
LT 1, 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector
SD 0RD 1ER 1ST2 1SD 1
SCKA 0TDA 0RDA 0
SCKA 1TDA 1RDA 1
SG 1RT 1RS 1
SCKB 0TDB 0RDB 0
SCKB 1TDB 1RDB 1
3 3 3 3 3 3
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 461
Revision 1.0
PA-2CCHACommon Channel Handler
Figure 3-135 Connecting Route Diagram (Digital CCIS)
DTITA
TB
TA
TB
PBXMDF
RA RA
RB RB
POUTA
POUTB To PLO
TR
KD
CH
/C
CH
TR
KD
CH
/C
CH
TR
KD
CH
/C
CH
TR
KD
CH
/C
CH
CN
2
CCHNote
DTI
Note: A maximum of 7CCH cardscan be connected to a DTI card.
CCH Multiple Connection
CCH
CCH
CCH
PCMCARRIER
EQUIPMENT
TR
KD
CH
/C
CH
CN
2
DTICCH
FRONT VIEW
OUT
IN
• Digital CCIS
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 462Revision 1.0
PA-2CCHACommon Channel Handler
Figure 3-136 Connecting Route Diagram (Analog CCIS)
RD
SG
RD
SG
PBX
MDF
ER ER
RT RT
ST2
RS
MODEM
ST2
RS
SD SD
15-m (50-foot) cable limit
<Available MODEM>• synchronous• 2400, 4800, 9600 bps• 4-wire• Full Duplex
CCH
• Analog CCIS (with MODEM)
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 463
Revision 1.0
PA-2CCHACommon Channel Handler
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCHNAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
SW01 SW01-2 and 3: Not used
SW02
SW10
SW11 Standard Setting
SW12 Standard Setting
SW13
SW14
MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel
ON
3210
ON
3210
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 464Revision 1.0
PA-24CCTACommon Channel Trunk
PA-24CCTACommon Channel Trunk
1. General Function
The PA-24CCTA (24CCT) circuit card provides an interface between 24 digital trunks and the system at1.5 M bit/s. Being equipped with a Common Channel Handler (CCH), which can be allocated to a desiredchannel among the existing 24 channels by key setting and programming, this card can be used as an inter-face for a Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (CCIS) system. A built-in resonance circuit can be usedfor the purpose of extracting clock signals when the PBX functions as a PLO-secondary switch. To obtainappropriate speech level, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which typical PAD patterns have beenalready written. A desired PAD value can be easily selected by key setting and programming.
Figure 3-137 Location of PA-24CCTA (24CCT) within the System
I/O Local Bus
CPU
System Clock
INT TSW INT
Common Channel Signaling Link
PLO
1.544 MHz Clock Extraction(For PLO-secondary switch)
CCH
Built-in Common Channel Handler (x1)
T
R
24CCT
: Common Channel Signaling Link
: Speech Path (PCM Signal)
: Clock Signal
CCISNETWORK
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 465
Revision 1.0
PA-24CCTACommon Channel Trunk
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-24CCTA (24CCT) card can be mounted in the following universal slots as shown below.
This card is mounted in the following shaded slots.
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Universal Slots Universal Slots
Note: This card cannot be mounted in Slot 05.
No
te
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 466Revision 1.0
PA-24CCTACommon Channel Trunk
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connector on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-138. Note thatthere are two types of PA-24 CCTA cards which differ in their face layouts.
Figure 3-138 Face Layout of PA-24CCTA (24CCT)
3210
SW6G
SW5DSW4D
SW6C
SW39
SW58
SW25
SW11B
SW138
SW13B
MODE
OPEN-OPE
MB
PCMBERAISDOPE
LB
FRMRMT
LYR
BL23
BL00
CN2To "TRK" Connectoron CCH/DCH
3210
SW18
SW19
SW15 SW14
SW13
OPEN-OPE
MB
PCMBERAISDOPE
LB
FRMRMT
LYR
BL23
BL00
CN2To "TRK" Connectoron CCH/DCH
SW17 SW00
SW01
SW02
SW12
SW11
SW10
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 467
Revision 1.0
PA-24CCTACommon Channel Trunk
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in Table 3-9.
Table 3-9 PA-24CCTA (24CCT) Lamp Indication Reference
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.
N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.
PCM Red Lights when an input signal is down (PCM LOSS).
FRM Red Lights when a frame alignment loss is detected.
BER RedLights when frequent bit errors occur in the case of 12-multi frame and when a CRC error occurs frequently in the case of 24-multiframe.
RMT Red Lights on receipt of remote alarm indication.
AIS Yellow Lights on receipt of Alarm Information Signal (AIS).
D-OPE Green Remains lit while Common Channel Handler (CCH) block is active.
LYR Green Remains lit while CCIS signal link is set up.
LB Green Remains lit while the CCIS signal is being looped back.
BL00
BL23
Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.
FlashFlashes while DP signals are being sent out or received (Flashes to dial pulses) or corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60IPM)
OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
-
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 468Revision 1.0
PA-24CCTACommon Channel Trunk
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
Figure 3-139 Available Locations for Loopback Testing
SWITCHSWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARDSETTING
MEANING
SW00/MBUP Circuit card make busy
DOWN × Circuit card make busy cancel
SW01/13B
0ON
OFF ×
1ON
OFF ×
2ON
OFF ×
3ON
OFF ×Note: For more information on loopback, see below.
SW01/SW13BInternal
Loopback
CCH Control
MBR
CCHLoopback0 3
ON ON — — ×OFF ON — × —
ON OFF × — —
OFF OFF — — —
SW01/SW13B ExternalLoopback
PayloadLoopback
All CircuitMBR1 2
ON ON — — ×OFF ON — × —
ON OFF × — —
OFF OFF — — —
Sw
itch
TS
W Interface
PA
D
Speech P
athC
ontrol Block
Fram
er
Line Interface
NETWORK
External Loopback(Line Loopback)
Payload Loopback
Internal Loopback
PA-24CCTA
R
T
As illustrated below, loopback testing can be performed at three locations on this card.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 469
Revision 1.0
PA-24CCTACommon Channel Trunk
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW02/MODE
Transmission Guard Timer Setting (sec.)
0 × 4 (sec.)
1 5 (sec.)
2 6 (sec.)
3 7 (sec.)
4 8 (sec.)
5 9 (sec.)
6 10 (sec.)
7 11 (sec.)
8 12 (sec.)
9 13 (sec.)
A 14 (sec.)
B 15 (sec.)
C 16 (sec.)
D 17 (sec.)
E 18 (sec.)
F 19 (sec.)
SW10/4D1
ON Logic of Signal Channel A (Receive): Negative
OFF × Logic of Signal Channel A (Receive): Positive
2ON Logic of Signal Channel A (Send): Negative
OFF × Logic of Signal Channel A (Send): Positive
3ON RMT Alarm Sending: Not to be sent out
OFF RMT Alarm Sending: To be sent out
4ON Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: Not to be controlled
OFF Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: To be controlled
5ON Data Link Control: MOS
OFF Data Link Control: BOS
6ON Multiframe Selection: 12-Multiframe
OFF Multiframe Selection: 24-Multiframe
7ON Coding Type: AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)
OFF Coding Type: B8ZS (Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution)
8ON Fixed to ON. When this switch is set to ON, Alarm Processing
is selected for North America specification.OFF
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 470Revision 1.0
PA-24CCTACommon Channel Trunk
SW11/39
1ON PAD Control
OFF ×
2ON ×
OFF
3ON × Data PAD Control
OFF
4ON ×
OFF
5ON × T Signal Control
OFF
6ON
OFF ×
7ON × R Signal Control
OFF
8ON
OFF ×
SW12/581
ON Equalizer Setting
OFF
2ON
OFF
3ON
OFF
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW11/39-1 SW11/39-2 PAD Control
ON ON Bothway
OFF ON Receive only (Send 0dB)
ON OFF Send only (Receive 0dB)
OFF OFF Fixed to ARTD command
SW11/39-3 SW11/39-4 Data PAD Value
ON ON 64 Kbps
OFF ON 56 Kbps
ON OFF 48 Kbps
OFF OFF 64 Kbps INV
SW11/39-5 SW11/39-6 T Signal Control
ON ON ABCD
OFF ON ABAB
ON OFF Bit Steal Inhibited
OFF OFF AAAA
SW11/39-7 SW11/39-8 T Signal Control
ON ON ABCD
OFF ON ABAB
ON OFF Bit Steal Inhibited
OFF OFF AAAA
SW12/58-1 SW12/58-2 SW12/58-3 Distance (feet)
ON ON ON 0 ~ 40 m
ON ON OFF 40 ~ 80 m
ON OFF ON 80 ~ 120 m
ON OFF OFF 120 ~ 160 m
OFF ON ON 160 ~ 200 m
Other Combinations Impossible
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 471
Revision 1.0
PA-24CCTACommon Channel Trunk
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO. SETTING STANDARD
SETTING MEANING
SW12/58
4
ON PAD Pattern Selection
Note: When setting this key, refer to Digital PAD Setting Table.
OFF ×
5
ON ×
OFF
6
ON ×
OFF
7
ON × Alarm Sending when this circuit card is in N-OPE state.
OFF
8
ON ×
OFF
SW13/6C 1 ON
— Fixed to all ON (Not used)
2 ON
3 ON
4 ON
5 ON
6 ON
7 ON
8ON × Netfusing : Not used
OFF Netfusing : Used
SW14/5D
1ON
Digital PAD ROM Selection: Special Specification (PROM Spec.)
OFF × Digital PAD ROM Selection: Standard Specification (MASK ROM Spec.)
2ON × LAYER2 Signal Logic: Positive
OFF LAYER2 Signal Logic: Negative
3ON
In the event of a line fault, the upper CPU is:Not to be notified
OFF × In the event of a line fault, the upper CPU is:To be notified
4ON Zero Suppress: Not to be suppressed
OFF Zero Suppress: To be suppressed
SW12/58-4 SW12/58-5 SW12/58-6 PAD Pattern
OFF ON ON PAD Pattern 1
OFF ON OFF PAD Pattern 2
ON OFF ON A→µ Loss (Bothway)
ON OFF OFF A→µ Loss (Receive)
OFF OFF ON µ→A Loss (Bothway)
OFF OFF OFF µ→A Loss (Receive)
Other Combinations Impossible
SW12/58-7 SW12/58-8 MODE
ON ON Alarm is not sent out
ON OFF
OFF ON All “1”
OFF OFF RMT Alarm
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 472Revision 1.0
PA-24CCTACommon Channel Trunk
SW15/251
ON × Impedance Setting: 100 ΩOFF Impedance Setting: 110 Ω
2ON Setting of Transmission Transformer Middle Point: Ground
OFF × Setting of Transmission Transformer Middle Point: Open
3ON Setting of Receiving Transformer Middle Point: Ground
OFF × Setting of Receiving Transformer Middle Point: Open
4ON Idle Code Sending: To be sent out
OFF × Idle Code Sending: Not to be sent out
SW17/6G
1ON Common Channel Signal Transfer Speed Selection
OFF
2ON
OFF
3ON
OFF
4
ONSignal Channel Designation
OFF
5
ON
OFF
6
ON
OFF
7
ON
OFF
8
ON
OFF
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO. SETTING STANDARD
SETTING MEANING
SW17/6G-1 SW17/6G-2 SW17/6G-3 PAD Pattern
ON ON ON 64 Kbps
OFF ON ON 32 Kbps (Forward)
ON OFF ON 16 Kbps (Forward)
OFF OFF ON 8 Kbps (Forward)
ON ON OFF 64 Kbps
OFF ON OFF 32 Kbps (Backward)
ON OFF OFF 16 Kbps (Backward)
OFF OFF OFF 8 Kbps (Backward)
Signal Channel
SW17/6G4 5 6 7 8
0 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
1 ON OFF OFF ON OFF
2 OFF ON OFF ON OFF
3 ON ON OFF ON OFF
4 OFF OFF ON ON OFF
5 ON OFF ON ON OFF
6 OFF ON ON ON OFF
7 ON ON ON ON OFF
8 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
9 ON OFF OFF OFF ON
10 OFF ON OFF OFF ON
11 ON ON OFF OFF ON
12 OFF OFF ON OFF ON
13 ON OFF ON OFF ON
14 OFF ON ON OFF ON
15 ON ON ON OFF ON
16 OFF OFF OFF ON ON
17 ON OFF OFF ON ON
18 OFF ON OFF ON ON
19 ON ON OFF ON ON
20 OFF OFF ON ON ON
21 ON OFF ON ON ON
22 OFF ON ON ON ON
23 ON ON ON ON ON
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 473
Revision 1.0
PA-24CCTACommon Channel Trunk
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO. SETTING STANDARD
SETTING MEANING
SW18/11B 1 ON
Fixed to all ON2 ON
3 ON
4 ON
5
ON Selection of CCH: Built-in CCH
OFFSelection of CCH: External CCH(To be used together with PA-2CCHA card)
6ON
Selection of Common Channel Signal SpeedOFF
7ON
OFF
8ON
OFF
SW19/1381
ON COP Alarm: Inhibited
OFF COP Alarm: Allowed
2ON Operating Mode Setting
OFF
3
ON
OFF
4 ON — Fixed to ON
SW18/11BTransfer Speed
6 7 8
OFF ON ON 56Kbps
ON OFF ON As per SW17/6G-1 - 3
ON ON OFF 48Kbps
Other Combinations Impossible
SW19/138Operating Mode
2 3
OFF OFF When No.7 CCIS is set
ON OFF When No.7 CCIS PCR is set
OtherCombinations
Not used
Note: PCR (Preventive Cyclic Retransmission method)
Note
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 474Revision 1.0
PA-24CCTACommon Channel Trunk
Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24CCTA
As mentioned in General Function, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PADpatterns have been already written. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be doneby key setting of the SW 12/58 (elements 4, 5, 6) on this card, and programming of the PAD data by the ARTDcommand - PAD. The selected PAD pattern and the programmed ARTD PAD data correspond as listed below.
Note: - represents “GAIN” in this table.
Table 3-10 Digital PAD Setting Table
PAD DATAARTD
PAD Pattern (selected by key setting)
PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2A→µ Loss(Bothway)
A→µ Loss(Receive)
µ→A Loss(Bothway)
µ→A Loss(Receive)
SEND RECIEVE SEND RECIEVE SEND RECIEVE SEND RECIEVE SEND RECIEVE SEND RECIEVE
1 2 [dB] 2 [dB]-3 [dB]Note
3 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB]
2 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 3 [dB] 3 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB]
3 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 12 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 12 [dB]
4 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 3 [dB] 9 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 8 [dB]
5 Key settings of SW11/39-3,4 correspond to PAD values. (Regardless of PAD Patterns)
7 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] Through Through Through Through Through Through Through Through
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 475
Revision 1.0
PA-24CCTACommon Channel Trunk
6. External Interface
Figure 3-140 LT Connector Lead Accommodation
See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-141).
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
E
RB
E
Accommodated in 1LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector
RAPOUTA
TA
POUTB
TB
E
RBPOUTB
TB
Accommodated in 2 Accommodated in 3
E
RAPOUTA
TA
E
RBPOUTB
TB
E
RAPOUTA
TA
1 2 3 2 1 3 1 2 3 2 1 3
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 476Revision 1.0
PA-24CCTACommon Channel Trunk
Figure 3-141 Connecting Route Diagram
TA
TB
RA
RB
POUTA
POUTB
TA
RA
RB
TB
DIU1A
DIU1BPLO
PBXMDF
1.5 MHz Clock Extraction Note 1
Installation Cable
24CCTCCIS
NETWORK
Note 2
OUT
IN
Note 1: This cable connection is required when clock signals must be extracted from the network side.
Note 2: As an example, DIU1A and DIU1B leads are used in this diagram. For more information about theseleads, see Chapter 2 in this manual.
Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24CCTA (24CCT) circuit card is as follows.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 477
Revision 1.0
PA-24CCTACommon Channel Trunk
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO.SWITCHNAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM SW00/MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel
SW01/13B
SW02(MODE)
Standard Setting
SW10/4D
24-multiframe CCT Standard
12-multiframe CCT Standard
SW11/39
SW12/58
SW13/6C • Fixed to all ON.
3210
ON
1ON
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1ON
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1ON
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1ON
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1ON
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1ON
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 478Revision 1.0
PA-24CCTACommon Channel Trunk
MODULE SLOT NO.SWITCHNAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
SW14/5D
• 24-multiframe CCT Standard
• 12-multiframe CCT Standard
SW15/25
SW17/6G
SW18/11B
SW19/138
1ON
2 3 4
1 2 3 4ON
1ON
2 3 4
1 2 3 4ON
1ON
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1ON
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1ON
2 3 4
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 479
Revision 1.0
PA-2DCHAD-Channel Handler
PA-2DCHAD-Channel Handler
1. General Function
This circuit card controls D channels of ISDN Line. This circuit card provides 2-circuit D-channel Handler(DCH).
Figure 3-142 Location of PA-2DCHA (2DCH) within the System
ILC
TSW
DLC
LC
24DTI
DCH
PLO
DSUISDN Terminal
Dterm
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 480Revision 1.0
PA-2DCHAD-Channel Handler
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
• This circuit card must be mounted in a slot on the left side of the slot in which DTI card is mounted.
• This circuit card cannot be mounted in Slot 04 of PIM0.
Mounting Module PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 481
Revision 1.0
PA-2DCHAD-Channel Handler
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-143.
Figure 3-143 Face Layout of PA-2DCHA (2DCH)
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.
DOPE0
DOPE1
Green Lights when the common channel signaling link is set up.
Flash Flashes when DCH is started up.
OPEN-OPE
MB
DOPE0DOPE1
SW14
SW13
SW12
SW10 SW11 SW01
SW02
~
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 482Revision 1.0
PA-2DCHAD-Channel Handler
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit card make busy
DOWN × Circuit card make busy cancel
SW01
0ON No. 0 Circuit make busy request
OFF × No. 0 Circuit make busy request cancel
1ON No. 1 Circuit make busy request
OFF × No. 1 Circuit make busy request cancel
2 OFF × Not used
3 OFF × Not used
SW02
0ON Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is performed.
OFF × Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is not performed.
1ON Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is performed.
OFF × Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is not performed.
2ON Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is performed.
OFF Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is not performed.
3ON Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is performed.
OFF Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is not performed.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 483
Revision 1.0
PA-2DCHAD-Channel Handler
Note: When SW10-4 is set ON, SW10-1, 10-2 and 10-3 should be set ON.When SW10-8 is set ON, SW10-5, 10-6 and 10-7 should be set ON.
SW10
1
2
3
4ON Modem is used in No. 0 Circuit
OFF Modem is not used in No. 0 Circuit.
5
6
7
8ON Modem is used in No. 1 Circuit.
OFF Modem is not used in No. 1 Circuit.
SW11(MODE0)
1 AT & T Bell
5 AT & T Communication
SW12(MODE1)
1 AT & T Bell
5 AT & T Communication
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/INSERT IN NO. 0 CIRCUIT
SW10-1 SW10-2 SW10-3 TRANSFER SPEED
ON ON ON 64 kbps
OFF ON ON 32 kbps (Forward)
ON OFF ON 16 kbps (Forward)
OFF OFF ON 8 kbps (Forward)
ON ON OFF 64 kbps
OFF ON OFF 32 kbps (Backward)
ON OFF OFF 16 kbps (Backward)
OFF OFF OFF 8 kbps (Backward)
SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/INSERT IN NO. 1 CIRCUIT
SW10-5 SW10-6 SW10-7 TRANSFER SPEED
ON ON ON 64 kbps
OFF ON ON 32 kbps (Forward)
ON OFF ON 16 kbps (Forward)
OFF OFF ON 8 kbps (Forward)
ON ON OFF 64 kbps
OFF ON OFF 32 kbps (Backward)
ON OFF OFF 16 kbps (Backward)
OFF OFF OFF 8 kbps (Backward)
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 484Revision 1.0
PA-2DCHAD-Channel Handler
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW13(for No. 0 Circuit)
SW14(for No. 1 Circuit)
1
2
3
4
5
6ON D Channel Mode Selection; Network Side
OFF D Channel Mode Selection; User Side
7
8
SETTING OF TIME SLOT NUMBER OF DROP/INSERT
SW13-1/ SW14-1
SW13-2/ SW14-2
SW13-3SW14-3
SW13-4/ SW14-4
SW13-5/ SW14-5
TIME SLOT NO.
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF CH0ON OFF OFF OFF OFF CH1OFF ON OFF OFF OFF CH2ON ON OFF OFF OFF CH3OFF OFF ON OFF OFF CH4ON OFF ON OFF OFF CH5OFF ON ON OFF OFF CH6ON ON ON OFF OFF CH7OFF OFF OFF ON OFF CH8ON OFF OFF ON OFF CH9OFF ON OFF ON OFF CH10ON ON OFF ON OFF CH11OFF OFF ON ON OFF CH12ON OFF ON ON OFF CH13OFF ON ON ON OFF CH14ON ON ON ON OFF CH15OFF OFF OFF OFF ON CH16ON OFF OFF OFF ON CH17OFF ON OFF OFF ON CH18ON ON OFF OFF ON CH19OFF OFF ON OFF ON CH20ON OFF ON OFF ON CH21OFF ON ON OFF ON CH22ON ON ON OFF ON CH23OFF OFF OFF ON ON CH24ON OFF OFF ON ON CH25OFF ON OFF ON ON CH26ON ON OFF ON ON CH27OFF OFF ON ON ON CH28ON OFF ON ON ON CH29OFF ON ON ON ON CH30ON ON ON ON ON CH31
SETTING OF SPEED MODE
SW13-7/SW14-7 SW13-8/SW14-8 SPEED
OFF OFF 2400 bps
OFF ON 4800 bps
ON OFF 9600 bps
ON ON Inhibit
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 485
Revision 1.0
PA-2DCHAD-Channel Handler
6. External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown inFigure 3-144.
Figure 3-144 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2)
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 2
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
SG 0 ER 0RD 0
RT 0 ST2 0RS 0 SD 0
RD 1SG 1 ER 1RT 1 ST2 1RS 1 SD 1
SG 0 ER 0RD 0
RT 0 ST2 0RS 0 SD 0
RD 1SG 1 ER 1RT 1 ST2 1RS 1 SD 1
SCKB 0 SCKA 0TDB 0 TDA 0RDB 0 RDA 0
SCKB 1 SCKA 1TDB 1 TDA 1RDB 1 RDA 1
SCKB 0 SCKA 0TDB 0 TDA 0RDB 0 RDA 0
SCKB 1 SCKA 1TDB 1 TDA 1RDB 1 RDA 1
21 2 1 21 1 22 1 21
PW
R
PW
R
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 486Revision 1.0
PA-2DCHAD-Channel Handler
Figure 3-144 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2)
PIMMounting Module
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 3
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
SG 0 ER 0RD 0
RT 0 ST2 0RS 0 SD 0
RD 1SG 1 ER 1RT 1 ST2 1RS 1 SD 1
SCLB 0 SCKA 0TDB 0 TDA 0RDB 0 RDA 0
SCLB 1 SCKA 1TDB 1 TDA 1RDB 1 RDA 1
3 3 3 3 3 3
PW
R
PW
R
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 487
Revision 1.0
PA-2DCHAD-Channel Handler
Figure 3-145 Connecting Route Diagram (1/2)
NEAX2400 IPXMDF
DSU
DCH
DTI
Front Cable connection
DCH DTI/CCT
TRKCN2
Front
• When modem is not used
Note: For cross connections between DTI and D-channel common channel signalling line, refer to the expla-nations of 24DTI circuit card.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 488Revision 1.0
PA-2DCHAD-Channel Handler
Figure 3-145 Connecting Route Diagram (2/2)
NEAX2400 IPXMDF
MODEMDCH
• When modem is used
SGRD
ERRTST2RSSD
SGRD
ERRTST2RSSD
• Cable length is maximum 15 meters (50 feet). • The modem to be used is a synchronous modem of 2400, 4800, or 9600 bps, and the communication method is limited to 4-wire full duplex communications.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 489
Revision 1.0
PA-2DCHAD-Channel Handler
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
SW01 SW01-2, 3 : Not used
SW02
SW10
SW111 : AT & T Bell5 : AT & T Communication
SW121 : AT & T Bell 5 : AT & T Communication
SW13
SW14
MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel
3210
ON
3210
ON
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 490Revision 1.0
PA-ILCGISDN Terminal Line Circuit
PA-ILCGISDN Terminal Line Circuit
1. General Function
This circuit card, which is for ISDN, is used in conjunction with PA-24DTR/PA-24PRTB-A to provideH11 terminal (1.536 Mbps) with D-channel signal. ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface) terminal (64 Kbps),incidentally, cannot be connected to this circuit card.
Figure 3-146 Location of PA-ILCG (ILC) Card within the System
PA-24DTR/PA-24PRTB-A
H11Terminal/TerminalAdapter
ILC
TSW
PRT
PRT
ISDNNETWORK
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 491
Revision 1.0
PA-ILCGISDN Terminal Line Circuit
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-ILCG (ILC) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots.
Mounting conditions for this circuit card are as follows:
1. This circuit card cannot be mounted in the slot 05, 07, 09, 10, 11, 12, 16, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23.
2. Mount this circuit card so that its leads and the leads of any other analog line/trunk circuit card maynot come out to the same LT cable.
3. This circuit card is not used in even-number module group (MG), unit (U)=0 and group (G)=0.
4. When registering this circuit card in the shaded slots, user must assign B-channels to odd-numbergroup (G) and D-channel to even-number group(G).
5. Do not mount other line/trunk card in just right side of the slot where a PA-ILCG card is mounted.
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
B-ch
B-ch
D-ch
D-ch
B-ch
D-ch
B-ch
B-ch
B-ch
D-ch
D-ch
D-ch
Mounting Condition
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 492Revision 1.0
PA-ILCGISDN Terminal Line Circuit
3. Face Layout of Lamps and Switches
The face layout of lamps and switches is shown in Figure 3-147.
Figure 3-147 Face Layout of PA-ILCG (ILC)
OPE
N-OPE
MB KEY
MODE 0
MODE 1
SW061 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PKT
PWR4LYR4BL41BL42
SW051 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW041 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW011 2 3 4
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 493
Revision 1.0
PA-ILCGISDN Terminal Line Circuit
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below:
Table 3-11 PA-ILCG Lamp Indications Reference
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.
N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.
BL42Green Lights green when B2-channel is being accessed and in operation.
Flash (60IPM) The corresponding channel is in a make-busy state.
OFF The corresponding channel is idle.
BL41Green Lights green when B1-channel is being accessed and in operation.
Flash (60IPM) The corresponding channel is in a make-busy state.
OFF The corresponding channel is idle.
LYR4
Green Remains lit while Layer 2 of the corresponding channel is active.
Flash (120IPM) Flashes while Layer 1 synchronization of the corresponding channel is established.
OFF Layer 1 and/or Layer 2 have not been established.
PWR4 Red Lights red when overvoltage protection function for the corresponding circuit is activat-ed; the corresponding line is short-circuited.
PKTGreen Lights green when D channel Packet is in operation.
OFF Remains off when D channel Packet is not in operation.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 494Revision 1.0
PA-ILCGISDN Terminal Line Circuit
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCHNAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit card make-busy
DOWN Circuit card make-busy cancel
SW01
1 ON × Fixed to ON
2 ON × Fixed to ON
3 ON × Not used (Fixed to ON)
4 ON × Not used (Fixed to ON)
SW04
1 ON × Not used (Fixed to ON)
2 ON × Not used (Fixed to ON)
3 ON × Not used (Fixed to ON)
4 ON × Not used (Fixed to ON)
5 ON × Fixed to ON (Wiring Mode)
6 ON × Not used (Fixed to ON)
7 ON × Not used (Fixed to ON)
8 ON × Not used (Fixed to ON)
SW05
1ON
OFF ×
2ON
OFF ×
3ON
OFF
4ON
OFF
5 OFF × Not used (Fixed to ON)
6 OFF × Not used (Fixed to ON)
7ON D-channel Packet Service: Available
OFF D-channel Packet Service: Not available
8 ON × Not used (Fixed to ON)
SW05-1 SW05-2 Receiving Pad Sending Pad
OFF OFF 0 dB 0 dB
OFF ON 0 dB 2 dB
ON OFF 0 dB 5 dB
ON ON 0 dB 8 dB
PAD Value Selection
SW05-3 SW05-4 Length of Call Reference Value
OFF OFF Basic Rate Interface 1, Primary Rate
OFF ON Basic Rate Interface 1, Primary Rate
ON OFF Basic Rate Interface 2, Primary Rate
ON ON Basic Rate Interface 2, Primary Rate
Length of Call Reference Value Selection
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 495
Revision 1.0
PA-ILCGISDN Terminal Line Circuit
Note: The terms Point-to-Point (P-P) used in this table have no relation to the actual wiring configuration.
SW06
1 ON × Not used (Fixed to ON)
2 ON × Not used (Fixed to ON)
3 ON × Not used (Fixed to ON)
4 ON × Not used (Fixed to ON)
5 ON × Data link mode for Layer 2: Point-to-Point (P-P)(Fixed to ON) Note
6 ON × Not used (Fixed to ON)
7 ON × Not used (Fixed to ON)
8 ON × Not used (Fixed to ON)
MODE 00 × Fixed to 0
1~F Not used
MODE 1
0~5 Not used
6 × Fixed to 6
7~F Not used
SWITCHNAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 496Revision 1.0
PA-ILCGISDN Terminal Line Circuit
6. External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-148.
Figure 3-148 LT Connector Lead Accommodation
See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-149).
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
LT 3, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
RB
Accommodated in 1LT 0, 2, 6 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
LT 1, 7 Connector
RATATB
RBTB
Accommodated in 2 Accommodated in 3
RATA
RBTB
RATA
1 3 2 1 23
PIMMounting Module
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 497
Revision 1.0
PA-ILCGISDN Terminal Line Circuit
Figure 3-149 Connecting Route Diagram
RA
RB
TA
TB
TA
RA
RB
TB
24DTR/24PRTB-A
PBXMDF
ILC
ModularRosette
ModularRosette
ISDNTerminal
H11 Terminal/Terminal Adapter
MJ-8SR
MJ-8S
RA
RB
TA
TB
TA
RA
RB
TB
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 498Revision 1.0
PA-ILCGISDN Terminal Line Circuit
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCHNAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MB
SW01
SW04
SW05
SW06
MODE 0
MODE 1
ON
1 2 3 4ON
1ON
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1ON
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1ON
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 499
Revision 1.0
PA-4ILCHISDN Line Circuit
PA-4ILCHISDN Line Circuit
1. General Function
The PA-4ILCH is a line circuit card which accommodates ISDN Terminal via NT1. The main features ofthis circuit card are shown below:
• A maximum of four Basic Rate Interface (BRI) terminals can be accommodated.
• This card and NT1 are connected using 2-wire U Interface.
• Sealing current (Maximum 15mA) can be supplied for keeping cables from rusting.
Figure 3-150 Location of PA-4ILCH (4ILC) within the System
TSW
I.430
PLO
NT1
ANSI T1.601
PA-4ILCH
TE
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 500Revision 1.0
PA-4ILCHISDN Line Circuit
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-4ILCH (4ILC) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
PIMMounting Module
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 501
Revision 1.0
PA-4ILCHISDN Line Circuit
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of each lamp, switch and connector on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-151.
Figure 3-151 Face Layout of PA-4ILCH (4ILC)
BER3LYR3
BL32BL31
BER2LYR2BL21BL22
BER1
BL12
LYR1BL11
BER0
BL02
LYR0BL01
OPE
MB
MODE
NOPE
MBRL3L2L1L0
LPBL3L2L1L0
MONITOR (Not used)
SW21
SW12
SW11
SW20
SW10
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 502Revision 1.0
PA-4ILCHISDN Line Circuit
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indication on this circuit card are shown below.
Note: Establishment of synchronization on U Reference Point may require 30 seconds or more.
LAMP NAME COLOR MEANING
OPE Green Lights when the card is in normal operation.
NOPE Red Lights when the card is in make-busy state.
BLn2n=0~3
Green Lights when B2 channel of line #n is communicating.
Flashing Flashes during make-busy state (60 IPM).
Off During idle state.
BLn1n=0~3
Green Lights when B1 channel of the line #n is communicating.
Flashing Flashes during make-busy state (60 IPM).
Off During idle state.
LYRnn=0~3
Green Lights when layer 2 link of the line #n is established.
Flashing
Flashes when synchronization is established on Layer 1 of S Reference Point (60 IPM). Note
Flashes when synchronization is established on Layer 1 of U Reference Point (120 IPM). Note
Off Synchronization is not established on either Layer 1 or Layer 2.
BERnn=0~3
Red Two or more CRC errors occur per second and the condition lasts for 10 seconds.
Off One or no CRC error occurs per second.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 503
Revision 1.0
PA-4ILCHISDN Line Circuit
5. Switch Settings
Switches on this card have the following meanings.
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MBUP Circuit card make busy
DOWN × Circuit card make busy cancel
MBR
0ON Line 0 make busy request
OFF × Line 0 make busy request cancel
1ON Line 1 make busy request
OFF × Line 1 make busy request cancel
2ON Line 2 make busy request
OFF × Line 2 make busy request cancel
3ON Line 3 make busy request
OFF × Line 3 make busy request cancel
LPB
0ON Loop back is set on NT1 for line 0.
OFF × Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 0.
1ON Loop back is set on NT1 for line 1.
OFF × Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 1.
2ON Loop back is set on NT1 for line 2.
OFF × Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 2.
3ON Loop back is set on NT1 for line 3.
OFF × Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 3.
MODE
0-2 Not used
3 × Fixed
4-F Not used
SW10
1 ON × Fixed
2ON × D-channel Packet Service Available
OFF D-channel Packet Service Not Available
3 ON × Fixed
4 ON × Fixed
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 504Revision 1.0
PA-4ILCHISDN Line Circuit
Note: PAD control is shown below.
SW11
1 ON × Fixed
2 ON × Fixed
3 ON × Fixed
4 ON × Fixed
5 ON × Fixed
6 ON × Fixed
7 ON × Fixed
8ON Sealing Current is not supplied.
OFF × Sealing Current is supplied.
SW12
1 ~ 3
4 ON × Fixed
5 ON × Fixed
6 ON × Fixed
7 ON × Fixed
8 ON × Fixed
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
PAD Control (TSW Side PAD Value) NoteSW1 SW2 SW3 TSW Side PAD Value
OFF OFF OFF Not used
ON OFF OFF PAD2=0dB, PAD1=-5dB
OFF ON OFF PAD2=0dB, PAD1=-3dB
ON ON OFF PAD2=0dB, PAD1=0dB
OFF OFF ON Not used
ON OFF ONPAD2=0dB, PAD1=5dB(Standard Setting)
OFF ON ON PAD2=0dB, PAD1=3dB
ON ON ON PAD2=0dB, PAD1=0dB
PAD1
PAD2
Line SideTSW Side
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 505
Revision 1.0
PA-4ILCHISDN Line Circuit
Note 1: The terms Point-to-Point (P-P) and Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP) used in this table have no relation to theactual wiring configuration.
Note 2: This switch must be set according to the specification of the ISDN terminal.
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW20
Note 1Note 2
1
ONData link mode for Layer 2 of line 0:Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP)
OFFData link mode for Layer 2 of line 0:Point-to-Point (P-P)
2
ONData link mode for Layer 2 of line 1:Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP)
OFFData link mode for Layer 2 of line 1:Point-to-Point (P-P)
3
ONData link mode for Layer 2 of line 2:Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP)
OFFData link mode for Layer 2 of line 2Point-to-Point (P-P)
4
ONData link mode for Layer 2 of line 3:Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP)
OFFData link mode for Layer 2 of line 3:Point-to-Point (P-P)
SW21
Note 2
1
ON On line 0, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis.
OFF On line 0, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated.
2
ON On line 1, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis.
OFF On line 1, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated.
3
ON On line 2, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis.
OFF On line 2, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated.
4
ON On line 3, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis.
OFF On line 3, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated.
5 ON × Fixed
6 ON × Fixed
7 ON × Fixed
8 ON × Fixed
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 506Revision 1.0
PA-4ILCHISDN Line Circuit
6. External Interface
Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown inFigure 3-152.
Figure 3-152 LT Connector Leads Accommodation
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
PW
R
PW
R
Highway Block
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 2
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
Accommodated in 3
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
B0 A0B1 A1B2 A2B3 A3
B0 A0B1 A1B2 A2B3 A3
B0 A0B1 A1B2 A2B3 A3
21 3 2 1 3 21 3 1 22 3 1 23 1 3
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 507
Revision 1.0
PA-4ILCHISDN Line Circuit
Figure 3-153 Connecting Route Diagram
MDF
PIM
NT1A
BILC
A
B
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 508Revision 1.0
PA-4ILCHISDN Line Circuit
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO.SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
MBUP: Circuit card make busyDOWN: Circuit card make busy cancel
MBR
LPB
MODE
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW20
SW21
ON
OFF
ON
No. 3No. 2No. 1No. 0
OFF
ON
No. 3No. 2No. 1No. 0
3
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 509
Revision 1.0
PA-8ILCE-AISDN Terminal Line Circuit
PA-8ILCE-AISDN Terminal Line Circuit
1. General Function
The PA-8ILCE-A (ILC) circuit card provides an interface between the system and a maximum of eightISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface) terminals, allowing the system to use eight ISDN BRIs, which are madeup of two B channels at 64 kbps and one D channel at 16 kbps (2B+D × 8), on the same bus. In addition,this card supports D channel packet function. For this feature, however, available channels are sevenchannels, ranging from No. 0 to No. 6.
Figure 3-154 Location of PA-8ILCE-A (ILC) within the System
SW
PRT
PRT
ILC
ILC
(MAX. 8 terminals)
(MAX. 8 circuits) ISDNNETWORK
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 510Revision 1.0
PA-8ILCE-AISDN Terminal Line Circuit
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-8ILCE-A card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.
Note: The circuit card cannot be mounted in slot No. 04 of PIM0. This card cannot use Group0 (G=00) of Unit0(U=0) of even-number Module Group.
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 511
Revision 1.0
PA-8ILCE-AISDN Terminal Line Circuit
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on the circuit card is shown in Figure 3-155.
Figure 3-155 Face Layout of PA-8ILCE-A (ILC)
OPE
MBSW02 SW03 SW06
SW04 SW05
N-OPE
BL02
BL01
LYR0
PWR0
CH #7
CH #6
CH #5
CH #4
CH #3
CH #2
CH #1
CH #0
SW00 SW01MODE1
MODE0PKT
BL72
LYR7
BL62
LYR6
BL52
LYR5
BL42
LYR4
BL32
LYR3
BL22
LYR2
BL12
LYR1
BL02
LYR0
BL71
PWR7
BL61
PWR6
BL51
PWR5
BL41
PWR4
BL31
PWR3
BL21
PWR2
BL11
PWR1
BL01
PWR0
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 512Revision 1.0
PA-8ILCE-AISDN Terminal Line Circuit
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on the circuit card are shown in the table below.
Note: Depending on the type of the connected ISDN terminal, whose Layer2 is not always active, this lamp mayflash when the terminal is idle and lights green at the time of call set-up.
LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION
OPE Green Remains lit while the circuit card is operating.
N-OPE Red Remains lit while the circuit card is in make-busy state.
BL n1(n=0-7)
Green Lights green when B1 channel is being accessed and in operation.
Flash (60IPM) The corresponding channel is in make-busy state.
OFF The corresponding channel is idle.
BL n2(n=0-7)
Green Lights green when B2 channel is being accessed and in operation.
Flash (60IPM) The corresponding channel is in make-busy state.
OFF The corresponding channel is idle.
LYR n(n=0-7)
GreenRemains lit while Layer2 of the corresponding channel is active.Note
Flash (120IPM)Flashes while Layer1 synchronization of the corresponding channel is established.
OFF Layer1 and/or Layer2 have not been established.
PWR n(n=0-7)
RedLights red when overvoltage protection function for the corresponding circuit is activated; the corresponding line is short-circuited.
PKTGreen Lights green when D channel Packet is in operation.
OFF Remains off when D channel Packet is not in operation.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 513
Revision 1.0
PA-8ILCE-AISDN Terminal Line Circuit
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on the circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD
SETTING MEANING
MBON Make busy of the circuit card.
OFF × Normal setting
SW00
1 ON ×
Fixed to all ON.2 ON ×3 ON ×4 ON ×
SW01
1 ON ×
Fixed to all ON.2 ON ×3 ON ×4 ON ×
SW02
1 ON ×
Fixed to all ON.2 ON ×3 ON ×4 ON ×
SW03
1 ON ×
Fixed to all ON.2 ON ×3 ON ×4 ON ×
SW04Note
1ON Circuit #0: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection
OFF Circuit #0: Short Passive Connection
2ON Circuit #1: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection
OFF Circuit #1: Short Passive Connection
3ON Circuit #2: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection
OFF Circuit #2: Short Passive Connection
4ON Circuit #3: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection
OFF Circuit #3: Short Passive Connection
5ON Circuit #4: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection
OFF Circuit #4: Short Passive Connection
6ON Circuit #5: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection
OFF Circuit #5: Short Passive Connection
7ON Circuit #6: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection
OFF Circuit #6: Short Passive Connection
8ON Circuit #7: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection
OFF Circuit #7: Short Passive Connection
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 514Revision 1.0
PA-8ILCE-AISDN Terminal Line Circuit
OFF
• Short Passive Bus mode: This mode is also a point-to-multipoint mode, in which a maximum of eight terminals can beconnected anywhere on the bus. Note that the bus length is limited to 200 m in this case.
• Extended Passive Bus mode: This mode is a point-to-multipoint mode, in which up to eight terminals can be connected.Note that the terminals must be connected within 50 m from the end of the bus cables as shown below.
max 600 m
Modular Rossete
ILC TE
max 400m
Modular Rossete
TE TE
max 50m
max 200 m
Modular Rossete
ILC
TE TE
Modular Rossete
Modular Rossete
Terminals can be connected any location on the bus.
Note: Set the SW04 to determine the 4-wire bus mode referring to the following.
ILC
(in the case of 0.5φ [mm])
(in the case of 0 .5φ [mm])
(in the case of 0.5φ [mm])
(with terminatingresistor (100Ω))
(with terminatingresistor (100Ω))
(with terminatingresistor (100Ω))
ON
• Point-to-Point mode: In this mode one Terminal Equipment (TE) can be connected at the end of up to a maximum of 600m of cable as shown below.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 515
Revision 1.0
PA-8ILCE-AISDN Terminal Line Circuit
Note: Adjust each key according to the specification of each ISDN terminal.
SWITCH SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD
SETTING MEANING
SW05
1ON PAD Level Adjustment:
OFF ×
2ON
OFF ×
3 OFF × Fixed to OFF.
4 OFF × Fixed to OFF.
5 OFF × Not used
6 OFF × Not used
7ON Packet Access via D channel: In Service
OFF Packet Access via D channel: Out of Service
8 ON × Fixed to ON.
SW06Note
1ON Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #0): Point-to-Point
OFF Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #0): Point-to-Multipoint
2ON Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #1): Point-to-Point
OFF Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #1): Point-to-Multipoint
3ON Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #2): Point-to-Point
OFF Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #2): Point-to-Multipoint
4ON Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #3): Point-to-Point
OFF Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #3): Point-to-Multipoint
5ON Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #4): Point-to-Point
OFF Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #4): Point-to-Multipoint
6ON Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #5): Point-to-Point
OFF Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #5): Point-to-Multipoint
7ON Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #6): Point-to-Point
OFF Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #6): Point-to-Multipoint
8ON Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #7): Point-to-Point
OFF Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #7): Point-to-Multipoint
SW1 SW2 RECEIVE (dB) SEND (dB)
OFFOFFONON
OFFONOFFON
0000
0258
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 516Revision 1.0
PA-8ILCE-AISDN Terminal Line Circuit
SWITCHSWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARDSETTING
MEANING
MODE0
0 × Fixed to 0.
1
F
Not used
MODE1
0
5
Not used
6 × Fixed to 6.
7
F
Not used
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 517
Revision 1.0
PA-8ILCE-AISDN Terminal Line Circuit
6. External Interface
Figure 3-156 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)
See also Connecting Route Diagram. (Figure 3-157)
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
Accommodated in 2
1 2 1 2 1 21 2 1 2 1 2
RB0TB0RB1TB1RB2TB2RB3TB3RB4TB4RB5TB5RB6TB6RB7TB7
RA0TA0RA1TA1RA2TA2RA3TA3RA4TA4RA5TA5RA6TA6RA7TA7
RA0TA0RA1TA1RA2TA2RA3TA3RA4TA4RA5TA5RA6TA6RA7TA7
RB0TB0RB1TB1RB2TB2RB3TB3RB4TB4RB5TB5RB6TB6RB7TB7
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 518Revision 1.0
PA-8ILCE-AISDN Terminal Line Circuit
Figure 3-156 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 3
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
3 3 3 3 3 3
RA4TA4RA5TA5RA6TA6RA7TA7
RB4TB4RB5TB5RB6TB6RB7TB7
RA0TA0RA1TA1RA2TA2RA3TA3
RB0TB0RB1TB1RB2TB2RB3TB3
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 519
Revision 1.0
PA-8ILCE-AISDN Terminal Line Circuit
Figure 3-157 Connecting Route Diagram
RA
RB
TA
TB
TA
RA
RB
TB
MDF
ILC
ModularRossete
with terminatingresistor (100Ω)
TE
RA
RB
TA
TB
TA
RA
RB
TB
MDF
ILC
ModularRossete
TE TE
TA
RA
RB
TB
RA
TA
TA
RB
RA
TA
TA
RB
ModularRossete
with terminatingresistor (100Ω)
• Point-to-Point
• Point-to-Multipoint
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 520Revision 1.0
PA-8ILCE-AISDN Terminal Line Circuit
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULESLOT NO.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
MB
SW00
SW01
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW05
SW06
MODE0
MODE1
ON
1ON 2 3 4
1ON 2 3 4
1ON 2 3 4
1ON 2 3 4
1ON
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1ON
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1ON
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0
6
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 521
Revision 1.0
PA-4DATADigital Announcement Trunk
PA-4DATADigital Announcement Trunk
1. General Function
The PA-4DATA (DAT) circuit card is used as a Digital Announcement Trunk supporting service featuresrelated to announcement function such as Automated Attendant, Delay Announcement Attendant,Announcement Service (for Hotel System). Depending upon the switch setting, this circuit card works inone of the following three modes.
• 16-sec. mode (maximum 4 CHs/card)
• 32-sec. mode (maximum 2 CHs/card)
• 60-sec. mode (maximum 1 CH/card)
A message can be recorded from either a tape recorder or a telephone set (See the Reference). In addition,this circuit card can be used as an external music source.
Figure 3-158 Location of PA-4DATA (DAT) within the System
COT
COT
GTCPU
ATI INCOMING CALL
INCOMING CALL
PUBLICNETWORK
CALLING PARTY
CALLING PARTY
TSW
ATTCON(Busy)
(PRERECORDED MESSAGE)
We are sorry, the line is busy now. Please stay on the line for a while.
DAT
This diagram shows an example when this card is used for Delay Announcement Attendant.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 522Revision 1.0
PA-4DATADigital Announcement Trunk
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-4DATA (DAT) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.
Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 523
Revision 1.0
PA-4DATADigital Announcement Trunk
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-159.
Figure 3-159 Face Layout of PA-4DATA (DAT)
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.
BL4
BL7
GreenLights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is connected to a recording source.
FlashFlashes while message recording is in progress on the corresponding circuit (No. 0 through No. 3 circuit).
BL0
BL3
Red Lights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is busy.
FlashFlashes when the corresponding circuit (No. 0 though No. 3 circuits) is in make-busy state or has not been assigned in the system.
OPE
N-OPE
MB
BL7 (G)
BL4 (G)
(SW11)
(SW9)
BL3 (R)
BL0 (R)
23
01(SW10)
(SW8)
JACK
(SW12)SW5 SW7
SW6
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
MBRQ
MRCS
START
WR
--
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 524Revision 1.0
PA-4DATADigital Announcement Trunk
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
Note 4: Valid in the case of recording or playback from a telephone set.
SWITCHSWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARDSETTING
MEANING
MB (SW11)UP Circuit card make busy
DOWN × Circuit card make busy cancel
SW1 (for No. 0 Circuit)
SW2 (for No. 1 Circuit)
SW3 (for No. 2 Circuit)
SW4 (for No. 3 Circuit)
1
2
3
4
SW5
1
2
3Note 4
ON × Compression Law: µ-law
OFF Compression Law: A-law
4ON When using as an external music-on-hold source
OFF When using as announcement equipment only
Note 1: 16-sec. mode = 4 recording circuits32-sec. mode = 2 recording circuits60-sec. mode = 1 recording circuit
Note 2: For each circuit, SW1 - SW4 must be set inthe same way (Two different modes cannotbe mixed assigned.).
SETTING OF TIMER FOR EACH CIRCUIT
1 2 3 4 TIMER (MODE)
ONONOFF
ONONOFF
OFFONOFF
ONOFFOFF
16-sec. mode32-sec. mode60-sec. mode
Note 3: Set the Recording/Playback Timer in the same way as setby SW1-SW4.
SETTING OF ANNOUNCEMENT RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME
SW5-1 SW5-2 RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME
OFFONOFF
ONOFFOFF
16-sec. Recording/Playback32-sec. Recording/Playback60-sec. Recording/Playback
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 525
Revision 1.0
PA-4DATADigital Announcement Trunk
SWITCHSWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARDSETTING
MEANING
SW6
1ON Single playback by No. 0 Circuit Note 5
OFF Multiple playback by No. 0 Circuit
2ON Single playback by No. 1 Circuit Note 5
OFF Multiple playback by No. 1 Circuit
3ON Single playback by No. 2 Circuit Note 5
OFF Multiple playback by No. 2 Circuit
4ON Single playback by No. 3 Circuit Note 5
OFF Multiple playback by No. 3 Circuit
5 OFF × Fixed
6 OFF × Fixed
7 OFF × Not used
8ON Recording from a telephone set
OFF × Normal setting
Note 5: For Automated Attendant and Delay Announcement-Attendant, set single playback(ON).
SW7
1 OFF × Fixed
2 OFF × Fixed
3 OFF × Not used
4 OFF × Not used
START (SW8)UP
Setting for recording start from a tape recorder or for playback start.
DOWN × Normal setting
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 526Revision 1.0
PA-4DATADigital Announcement Trunk
Note 6: When this circuit card is using an external music-on-hold source, set 0, 4 or 6 by timer mode.
SWITCH SWITCHNO. SETTING STANDARD
SETTING MEANING
MRCS(SW9) Note 6
ESet to E while the circuit card is using as announcement equipment only.
0Designation of No. 0 Circuit.The timer is 16-sec. mode.
1Designation of No. 1 Circuit.The timer is 16-sec. mode.
2Designation of No. 2 Circuit.The timer is 16-sec. mode.
3Designation of No. 3 Circuit.The timer is 16-sec. mode.
4Designation of No. 0 and No. 1 Circuit.The timer is 32-sec. mode.
5Designation of No. 2 and No. 3 Circuit.The timer is 32-sec. mode.
6Designation of All Circuits.The timer is 60-sec. mode.
F Recording from a telephone set.
MBRQ(SW10)
0ON
No. 0 Circuit make busy requestNo. 0 Circuit is designated during a recording.
OFF × No. 0 Circuit make busy request cancel
1ON
No. 1 Circuit make busy requestNo. 1 Circuit is designated during a recording.
OFF × No. 1 Circuit make busy request cancel
2ON
No. 2 Circuit make busy requestNo. 2 Circuit is designated during a recording.
OFF × No. 2 Circuit make busy request cancel
3ON
No. 3 Circuit make busy requestNo. 3 Circuit is designated during a recording.
OFF × No. 3 Circuit make busy request cancel
WR(SW12)
UP Recording from a tape recorder (WRITE mode)
DOWN × Normal setting
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 527
Revision 1.0
PA-4DATADigital Announcement Trunk
6. External Interface
When this circuit card is used as an external music-on-hold source, the following leads (FM, E) appear fromthe LT connector.
Figure 3-160 LT Connector Lead Accommodation
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
1
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
Accommodated in 2
FM
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
Accommodated in 3
FM
FM
2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
E
E
E
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0Highway Block
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 528Revision 1.0
PA-4DATADigital Announcement Trunk
[Reference]
How to Record a Message
• Prior to your recording, set switches on the DAT card according to the following example.
• Connect a tape recorder to the DAT card with a cable.
• Turn On the MBRQ key to make busy a channel to be recorded.
(To record a message in the 60 sec. mode, all circuits must be placed into MB state.)
• Turn the WR key upwards.
(The corresponding BL lamp lights green indicating the tape recorder is connected to the circuit.)
• Turn the START key upwards.
(The corresponding BL lamp starts flashing.)
Table 3-12 Switch Settings on DAT (Example 60 sec. mode)
SWITCH SETTING DESCRIPTION
SW1
SW4Timer Value for Channel 0-3: 60 sec.
SW5
Circuit Card Timer: 60 sec.A-law/µ-law: µ-lawExternal Music Source/Announcement Equipment:Announcement Equipment
SW6Single/Repeated Playback:Repeated Playback
MRCSChannel Designation:60 sec. mode
OPE
N-OPE
MB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW6
1 2 3 4
SW5
1 2 3 4
SW7
1 2 3 4
SW1
1 2 3 4
SW2
1 2 3 4
SW3
1 2 3 4
SW4
BL7
BL0
MBRQ
MRCS
START
JACK
BATTERYPACK
WR
3210
~
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
12345678ON
6
DAT
Jack
Front
Earphone Jack (3.6 )φ
Tape Recorder
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 529
Revision 1.0
PA-4DATADigital Announcement Trunk
• Start the tape recorder and record your message in the designated channel.
- recording -
• The corresponding BL lamp (BL0 ~ BL7) lights steadily. (Recording ends.)
• Return the START, WR key to the previous position.
How to Play Back the Recorded Message
• Playback from a telephone set
• Set the related switches on the PA-4DATA (DAT) card.
• Seize a specific channel by “Individual Trunk Access.”
• Hear the recorded message.
• Playback from the phone jack on PA-4DATA (DAT) card
• Connect a earphone to the phone jack on the PA-4DATA (DAT) card.
• Select your desired channel (0-3) by the MRCS switch.
• Turn the START key upwards.
• Hear the recorded message.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 530Revision 1.0
PA-4DATADigital Announcement Trunk
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
START(SW8)
MRCS(SW9)
MBREQ(SW10)
WE(SW12)
MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4ON
ON
3210
ON
ON
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 531
Revision 1.0
PA-4DATBDigital Announcement Trunk
PA-4DATBDigital Announcement Trunk
1. General Function
The PA-4DATB (DAT) circuit card is used as a Digital Announcement Trunk supporting service featuresrelated to announcement function such as Automated Attendant, Delay Announcement Attendant,Announcement Service (for Hotel System). Depending upon the switch setting, this circuit card works inone of the following three modes.
• 64-sec. mode (maximum 4 CHs/card)
• 128-sec. mode (maximum 2 CHs/card)
• 240-sec. mode (maximum 1 CH/card)
A message can be recorded from either a tape recorder or a telephone set. (See the Reference).In addition, this circuit card can be used as an external music source.
Figure 3-161 Location of PA-4DATB (DAT) within the System
COT
COT
GTCPU
ATI INCOMING CALL
INCOMING CALL
PUBLICNETWORK
CALLING PARTY
CALLING PARTY
TSW
ATTCON(Busy)
(PRERECORDED MESSAGE)
We are sorry, the line is busy now. Please stay on the line for a while.
DAT
This diagram shows an example when this card is used for Delay Announcement Attendant.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 532Revision 1.0
PA-4DATBDigital Announcement Trunk
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-4DATB (DAT) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.
Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 533
Revision 1.0
PA-4DATBDigital Announcement Trunk
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-162.
Figure 3-162 Face Layout of PA-4DATB (DAT)
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.
BL4
BL7
GreenLights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is connected to a record-ing source.
FlashFlashes while message recording is in progress on the corresponding circuit (No. 0 through No. 3 circuit)
BL0
BL3
Red Lights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is busy.
FlashFlashes when the corresponding circuit (No. 0 though No. 3 circuits) is in make-busy state or has not been assigned in the system.
OPE
N-OPE
MB
BL7
BL0
23
01
JACK
WR
SW5 SW3
MBRQ
MRCS
START
SW6 SW1
SW7 SW2
SW4
JP0
--
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 534Revision 1.0
PA-4DATBDigital Announcement Trunk
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCHSWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARDSETTING
MEANING
MB UP Circuit card make busy
DOWN × Circuit card make busy cancel
MBRQ
1-4ON
Make busy request on a channel basis(Channel Designation for Recording/Playback)
OFF × Make busy request cancel on a channel basis
MRCS 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SW1
SW4
Each Switch corresponds to each channel ofDAT: channelSW1: channel #0SW2: channel #1SW3: channel #2SW4: channel #3
Setting of Recording Mode
SWITCH NO. Mode Channel
0
64-sec. mode
0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4128-sec. mode
0, 1
5 2, 3
6 240-sec. mode 0, 1, 2, 3
-
SETTING OF TIMER FOR EACH CIRCUIT
1 2 3 4 TIMER (MODE)
ONONOFF
ONONOFF
OFFONOFF
ONOFFOFF
64-sec. mode128-sec. mode240-sec. mode
ON ON ON ON Not available
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 535
Revision 1.0
PA-4DATBDigital Announcement Trunk
SWITCHSWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARDSETTING
MEANING
SW5
1
2
3ON × Compression Law: µ-law
OFF Compression Law: A-law
4ON To be used as external hold tone source
OFF To be used as announcement equipment
SW6
1ON Single playback of No. 0 channel Note 3
OFF Multiple playback of No. 0 channel Note 2
2ON Single playback of No. 1 channel Note 3
OFF Multiple playback of No. 1 channel Note 2
3ON Single playback of No. 2 channel Note 3
OFF Multiple playback of No. 2 channel Note 2
4ON Single playback of No. 3 channel Note 3
OFF Multiple playback of No.3 channel Note 2
5ON RAM Test data-clear
OFF × RAM Test data-store
6 OFF × Not used
7 OFF × Not used
8 OFF × Not used
Note 2: When this card is used as announcement equipment, SW6-1~ 6-4 should be set OFF.
Note 3: For Automated Attendant and Delay Announcement-Attendant, set single playback (ON).
Note 1: Setting of Recording/Playback Timer shouldcorrespond to that of SW1-SW4.
SETTING OF ANNOUNCEMENT RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME
SW5-1 SW5-2 RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME
OFFONOFF
ONOFFOFF
64-sec. Recording/Playback128-sec. Recording/Playback240-sec. Recording/Playback
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 536Revision 1.0
PA-4DATBDigital Announcement Trunk
SWITCHSWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARDSETTING
MEANING
SW71
ON Activation of RAM Test
OFF × Normal Setting
2ON Port Microprocessor is reset when MBR key is ON.
OFF × Port Microprocessor is not reset when MBR key is ON.
3 OFF × Not used
4 OFF × Not used
WR UP For Recording from the phone jack
DOWN × Normal setting
START UP When starting recording from the phone jack or playback.
DOWN × Normal setting
Table 3-13 Jumper Setting
SWITCHSWITCHSHAPE
SETTING DESCRIPTION
JP0 LEFT Compression Law: µ-law
RIGHT Compression Law: A-lawLEFT RIGHT
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 537
Revision 1.0
PA-4DATBDigital Announcement Trunk
6. External Interface
When this card is used as an external music-on-hold source, the following cable connection is required.
Figure 3-163 LT Connector Lead Accommodation
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
1
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
Accommodated in 2
FM
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
Accommodated in 3
FM
FM
2 3
E
E
E
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0Highway Block
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 538Revision 1.0
PA-4DATBDigital Announcement Trunk
[Reference]
• Prior to your recording, set switches on the DAT card according to the following example.
• Connect a tape recorder to the DAT card with a cable.
• Turn On the key to make busy a channel to be recorded.(To record a message in the 240 sec mode, all circuits must be placed into MB state.)
• Turn the key upwards.(The corresponding BL lamp lights green indicating the tape recorder has been connected to the circuit.)
• Turn the key upwards.(The corresponding BL lamp starts flashing.)
Table 3-14 SWITCH SETTINGS ON DAT (Example <240 sec. mode>)
SWITCH SETTING DESCRIPTION
SW1
SW4Timer Value for Channel 0-3 240 sec.
SW5
Circuit Card Timer: 240 sec.A-law/µ-law: µ-lawExternal Music Source/Announcement Equipment:Announcement Equipment
SW6Single/Repeated Playback:Repeated Playback
MRCSChannel Designation:240 sec. mode
JP0 A-law/µ-law: µ-law
HOW TO RECORD A MESSAGE
OPE
N-OPE
MB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW6
1 2 3 4
SW7
1 2 3 4
SW2
1 2 3 4
SW1
1 2 3 4
SW5
1 2 3 4
SW3
1 2 3 4
SW4
JP0
BL7
BL0
MBRQ
MRCS
START
JACK
WR
3210
BATTERYPACK
- 1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
12345678ON
6
LEFT
(DAT)
jack
Front
earphone jack (3.6 )φ
Tape Recorder
MBRQ
WR
START
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 539
Revision 1.0
PA-4DATBDigital Announcement Trunk
• Start the tape recorder and record your message in the designated channel.
- recording -
• The corresponding BL lamp (BL0 - BL7) lights steadily. (Recording ends.)
• Return the START, WR key to the previous position.
Playback from a telephone set
• Set the related switches on the PA-4DATB (DAT) card.
• Seize a specific channel by “Individual Trunk Access”.
• Hear the recorded message.
Playback from the phone jack on PA-4DATB (DAT) card
• Connect a earphone to the phone jack on the PA-4DATB (DAT) card.
• Select your desired channel (0-3) by the MRCS switch.
• Turn the START key upwards.
• Hear the recorded message.
HOW TO PLAY BACK THE RECORDED MESSAGE
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 540Revision 1.0
PA-4DATBDigital Announcement Trunk
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MB
START
WR
MBRQ
MRCS
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
JP0
ON
ON
ON
3
10
2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
RIGHTLEFT
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 541
Revision 1.0
PH-M16Line Test
PH-M16Line Test
1. General Function
This circuit card controlled by CPU is used for line test of a subscriber’s line. The circuit card supports tosend howler tone to external test equipment, besides the circuit card can detect or send various tones, andsend PB (DTMF) signal for automatic trunk test.
Note: A system cannot send Howler Tone during line test. The number of line available the line test/automatictrunk test at the same time is only one.
Figure 3-164 Location of PH-M16 (LTST) card within the System (1-IMG System)
TEL
TEL
PIMLPRA
TESTEQ
LTST GT CPU
MUX
TSW
LC
LC
EXTENDED I/O BUS
EXTENDED I/O BUS
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 542Revision 1.0
PH-M16Line Test
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The LTST circuit card can be accommodated in the shaded slots (00, 01, 02) as shown below.
Note: This circuit card is used for 1-IMG System.
00 01 02 03 04
PH
-M16
PH
-M16
PH
-M16
LPMMounting Module
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 543
Revision 1.0
PH-M16Line Test
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-165.
Figure 3-165 Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card
Note: CRIN is used to connect with CRIN test equipment.
MB
SW0
OPE/MB
CRIN
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 544Revision 1.0
PH-M16Line Test
4. Lamp Indications
The table below shows lamp indications on this circuit card.
5. Switch Settings
The following is a brief description of the switches on this circuit card. When a switch has a standardsetting, it is indicated with “X” in the table below.
LAMP NAME
COLOR DESCRIPTION
OPE/MBGreen This circuit card is operating.
Red This circuit card is make-busy.
SWITCHSWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARDSETTING
MEANING
MBUP Circuit card make-busy.
DOWN Circuit card make-busy cancel
SW0
1 ON × Setting of a condition of DT detection(440Hz+350Hz)
2 ON × Setting of a condition of RBT detection(440Hz+480Hz)
3ON Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (67msc.)
OFF × Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (133msec.)
4
ONSetting of M-wire control which is concerned with sending test tone to ODT(Set soft control or E-wire loop back)
OFFSetting of M-wire control which is concerned with sending test tone to ODT(Set soft control only)
5
6
7
8
BASIC INTERVAL TIMER
SW0
5 6 7 8 TIME
ON OFF OFF OFF 8µ
ON ON OFF OFF 16µ
ON ON ON OFF 32µ
ON ON ON ON 64µ
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 545
Revision 1.0
PH-M16Line Test
6. External Interface
Figure 3-166 LT Connector Lead Accommodation
26272829303132333435363738394041
12345678910111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
TMBELL0ABELL1A
TELALCA
THOWAONHKTCRATMATA
OUTATA1
EXMNMJ0AMN0AMJ1AMN1AINA
TEBELL0BBELL1B
TELBLCB
THOWBTHOWS
SE
ATBOUTBTB1
BELLEXMJMJ0BMN0BMJ1BMN1BINB
MISC CONNECTOR
00 01 02 03 04
MISC Connector Accommodation
Circuit Card Backboard Connector
Connector NameSlot Number
LPM
LPM Backboard
Circuit Card Backboard Connector
68PH EXMISC CABLE
MISC
MISC CONNECTOR(P
H-M
16)P
H-M
16P
H-M
16
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 546Revision 1.0
PH-M16Line Test
Figure 3-167 Connecting Route Diagram
BA
EMRARBTATB
TMTE
OUTAOUTBINAINBTA1TB1
LTST
ODT
LC
MDFPBX
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 547
Revision 1.0
PH-M16Line Test
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MB
SW0
ON(MB)
OFF
12 34 56 78ON
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 548Revision 1.0
PA-4AMPCAMP Pool Trunk
PA-4AMPCAMP Pool Trunk
1. General Function
This circuit card is bidirectional amplifier circuitry to be used for such a purpose as level guaranteeing ina public line—tie line connection. The circuit card is provided with four bidirectional amplifier circuits andcontrols gains to speech loss which may vary with the kind of line involved in the connection. Also, thiscircuit card is provided with the function to disable the AGC when modem signals such as FAX signalshave arrived.
Figure 3-168 Location of PA-4AMPC (4AMP) within the System
AGC
Fix AMP
C.O. Trunk
ECa
PA-4AMPC
Tie Line N.W Tie Line Trunk
TSW
ECa: ECb: AGC: FixAMP:
Echo Canceller which suppresses echo in the hybrid circuit of a C.O. trunk. Echo Canceller which suppresses echo in the tie-line side. Automatic Gain Control circuit (amplifies voice signals arriving from the public network.)
voice signals arriving from the tie-line network.)
Public N.W
ECb
PAD
Fixed Gain Amplifier Circuit (amplifiesvoice signals arriving from the public network)
Fixed Gain Amplifier Circuit (amplifies
PAD:
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 549
Revision 1.0
PA-4AMPCAMP Pool Trunk
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card are shown below.
Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2300
PIMMounting Module
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 550Revision 1.0
PA-4AMPCAMP Pool Trunk
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-169.
Figure 3-169 Face Layout of PA-4AMPC (4AMP)
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
OPE
MB
BL3
BL0
MB3
MB0
SW11
SW02
SW01
SW00
SW03
SW04
SW10 SW12
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
BL0 Green BL-lamp remains lit while the corresponding circuit is busy.
Flash BL-lamp flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.
BL3 OFF BL-lamp remains off when the corresponding circuit is in idle state.
~
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 551
Revision 1.0
PA-4AMPCAMP Pool Trunk
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH
SWITCHSETTING STANDARD
MEANINGNAME NO. SETTING
(MB)UP Circuit card make busy
DOWN × Circuit card make busy cancel
0ON The corresponding circuit is in make busy state.
OFF × Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled.
SW01
1ON The corresponding circuit is in make busy state.
OFF × Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled.
2ON The corresponding circuit is in make busy state.
OFF × Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled.
3ON The corresponding circuit is in make busy state.
OFF × Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled.
1 OFF × Fixed
2 OFF × Fixed
3 OFF × Fixed
Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line)ON side operate. (When this switch has been set to ON,
set SW10, SW11, and SW12 to right side.)4
SW02 Only ECa (Public Line) side operates.OFF × (When this switch has been set to OFF, set SW10, SW11,
and SW12 to left side.)
5 OFF × Fixed
6 OFF × Fixed
7 OFF × Fixed
8 OFF × Fixed
SW00
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 552Revision 1.0
PA-4AMPCAMP Pool Trunk
SWITCH SWITCHSETTING
STANDARDMEANING
NAME NO. SETTING
SW03
SW04 is set to all ON.
SW10Right (SIG) Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line) side operate.
Left (CAS) × Only ECa (Public Line) side operates.
SW11Right (SIG) Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line) side operate.
Left (CAS) × Only ECa (Public Line) side operates.
SW12Right (SIG) Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line) side operate.
Left (CAS) × Only ECa (Public Line) side operates.
SW03-1 SW03-2
ON ON 0 dB (Standard)SETTING OF FIXED GAIN OF FIX AMP
OFF ON 4 dBON OFF 8 dBOFF OFF 12 dB
SW03-3 SW03-4
ON ON [Signals ranging from -35dBm0 to -15dBm0 are adjusted to -15dBm0] (Standard)
SETTING OF GAIN OF BY AGC
0dBr
OFF ON [Signals ranging from -35dBm0 to -11dBm0 are adjusted to -11dBm0]
+4dBr
ON OFF [Signals ranging from -35dBm0 to -19dBm0 are adjusted to -19dBm0]
-4dBr
SW04
When this card does not work as AGC:
Amplification ofvoice from thepublic network
Amplificationof voice from the tie-line network
0 dB 4 dB 8 dB 12 dB
0 dB
SW03
SW04
SW03
SW04
SW03
SW04
SW03
SW04
4 dB
SW03
SW04
SW03
SW04
SW03
SW04
SW03
SW04
8 dB
SW03
SW04
SW03
SW04
SW03
SW04
SW03
SW04
12 dB
SW03
SW04
SW03
SW04
SW03
SW04
SW03
SW04
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON 1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
When this card works as AGC:
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 553
Revision 1.0
PA-4AMPCAMP Pool Trunk
6. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM SW01
SW02
SW00 (MB)
SW03
Circuit card make busy cancel
ON 1 2 3 4
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3210
SW04
SW11
SW12
DOWN
Make busy switch of the corresponding circuit (No. 0 ~ No. 3 circuits) ON : Make busy of each circuit OFF : Make busy cancel of each circuit
ON
Left Right
Left Right
Left Right
SW04ON 1 2 3 4
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 554Revision 1.0
PA-8TLTRTie Line Trunk
PA-8TLTRTie Line Trunk
1. General Function
The PA-8TLTR(TLT) circuit card provides eight trunks whose interface can be selected among thefollowing four types by key setting on a 4-channel basis.
• Loop Dialing (LD)
• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
• 2-wire E & M
• 4-wire E & M
In addition, programmable PADs, whose value can be adjusted by key setting, are equipped with a 4-wireE & M interface. Note that a cable, which is connected to the “ODT” connector on the front edge of thiscard, is necessary when circuits #4 through #7 are used as 2-wire/4-wire E & M trunks. A typical exampleof channel allocation is illustrated in Figure 3-170.
Figure 3-170 Location of PA-8TLTR (TLT) within the System
GTCPU
LC
LC
ODT #0
ODT #3
DID #0
DID #3
I/O Local Bus
Terminal
Terminal
SWINT INT PA-8TLTR MDF
2W/4WCarrier
Equipment
circuit #0
circuit #3
circuit #4
circuit #7
PRIVATENETWORK
PUBLICNETWORK
Note: This diagram shows an example when the PA-8TLTR is used as four 2W/4W E&M and four DID trunks.In this instance, a flat cable connection is not required.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 555
Revision 1.0
PA-8TLTRTie Line Trunk
2. Mounting Location / Condition
The PA-8TLTR (TLT) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.
Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 556Revision 1.0
PA-8TLTRTie Line Trunk
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-171.
Figure 3-171 Face Layout of PA-8TLTR (TLT) Card
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.
BL0
BL7
Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.
FlashFlashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or while DP signals are being received (flashes to the dial pulses)
OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
OPE
MBBL7
BL0SW0 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 MB7
MB0
ODT Note
Note: This connector is used when “E & M” is selected for circuits #4 through #7.
-
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 557
Revision 1.0
PA-8TLTRTie Line Trunk
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCHSWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
MB(SW00)
UP Circuit card make busy
DOWN × Circuit card make busy cancel
MB0 - 7(SW01) 0
ON Make busy of the No. 0 circuit
OFF × Make busy cancel of the No. 0 circuit
1ON Make busy of the No. 1 circuit
OFF × Make busy cancel of the No. 1 circuit
2ON Make busy of the No. 2 circuit
OFF × Make busy cancel of the No. 2 circuit
3ON Make busy of the No. 3 circuit
OFF × Make busy cancel of the No. 3 circuit
4ON Make busy of the No. 4 circuit
OFF × Make busy cancel of the No. 4 circuit
5ON Make busy of the No. 5 circuit
OFF × Make busy cancel of the No. 5 circuit
6ON Make busy of the No. 6 circuit
OFF × Make busy cancel of the No. 6 circuit
7ON Make busy of the No. 7 circuit
OFF × Make busy cancel of the No. 7 circuit
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 558Revision 1.0
PA-8TLTRTie Line Trunk
SWITCHSWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARDSETTING
MEANING
SW0(SW10)
1
2
3
4 OFF × Not used
5 OFF × Fixed
6 ON × Fixed
7 OFF × Fixed
8 OFF × Not used
SW1(SW15)
1ON
Programmable PAD P0 Value0.5 dB P0 value is determined as
a sum of selected PAD values of SW1 (elements 1-5). Note that this setting is valid for 4W E&M system.-Example-
In this case P0 value is12.5 dB.
OFF Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB
2ON Programmable PAD P0 Value 1 dB
OFF Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB
3ON Programmable PAD P0 Value 2 dB
OFF Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB
4ON Programmable PAD P0 Value 4 dB
OFF Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB
5ON Programmable PAD P0 Value 8 dB
OFF Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB
6 OFF Fixed
<Setting Range of Programmable PAD Values>
7 OFF Not used
8 OFF Not used
SW0-1 SW0-2 SW0-30-3 CIRCUITTRUNK KIND
4-7 CIRCUITTRUNK KIND
OFFONOFFON
OFFOFFONON
OFFOFFOFFOFF
LD/DIDEMTNot used2W/4W E&M
LD/DIDLD/DIDNot used2W/4W E&M
SW1-1: ON (0.5 dB)SW1-2: OFF ( 0 dB)SW1-3: OFF ( 0 dB)SW1-4: ON ( 4 dB)SW1-5: ON ( 8 dB)
PAD VALUE [dB]
SEND RECEIVE
Possible Setting Range
P0:0 - +15.50.5 step
P1:0 - +15.50.5 step
P2:0 - +7.50.5 step
P3:0 - +7.50.5 step
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 559
Revision 1.0
PA-8TLTRTie Line Trunk
SWITCHSWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARDSETTING
MEANING
SW2(SW20) 1
ON Programmable PAD P1 Value 0.5 dB P1 value is determined as a sum of selected PAD values of SW2 (elements 1-5). Note that this setting is valid for 4W E&M system.
- Example -
In this case P1 value is 12.5 dB.
OFF Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB
2ON Programmable PAD P1 Value 1 dB
OFF Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB
3ON Programmable PAD P1 Value 2 dB
OFF Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB
4ON Programmable PAD P1 Value 4 dB
OFF Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB
5ON Programmable PAD P1 Value 8 dB
OFF Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB
6 OFF × Fixed
7 OFF × Fixed
8 OFF × Fixed
SW2-1: ON (0.5 dB)SW2-2: OFF ( 0 dB)SW2-3: OFF ( 0 dB)SW2-4: ON ( 4 dB)SW2-5: ON ( 8 dB)
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 560Revision 1.0
PA-8TLTRTie Line Trunk
Note: For the setting range of Programmable PAD Values, see the “Setting Range of Programmable PADValues” shown for SW1.
SWITCHSWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARDSETTING
MEANING
SW3(SW25) 1
ON Programmable PAD P2 Value 0.5 dB
P2 Values is total of PAD Values Note(Valid when 4W E&M system)(Ex)SW3-1: OFFSW3-2: ONSW3-3: OFFSW3-4: OFFin this case P2 value is 1 dB.
P3 Values is total of PAD Values Note(Valid when 4W E&M system)(Ex)SW3-5: OFFSW3-6: ONSW3-7: OFFSW3-8: OFFin this case P3 value is 1 dB.
OFF Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB
2ON Programmable PAD P2 Value 1 dB
OFF Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB
3ON Programmable PAD P2 Value 2 dB
OFF Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB
4ON Programmable PAD P2 Value 4 dB
OFF Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB
5ON Programmable PAD P3 Value 0.5 dB
OFF Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB
6ON Programmable PAD P3 Value 1 dB
OFF Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB
7ON Programmable PAD P3 Value 2 dB
OFF Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB
8ON Programmable PAD P3 Value 4 dB
OFF Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 561
Revision 1.0
PA-8TLTRTie Line Trunk
SWITCHSWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARDSETTING
MEANING
SW4 (SW30 [No.0-3 Circuit]SW5 (SW40) [No. 4-7 Circuit]
(When Trunk Kind has been set as LD/DID)
1 ~ 4
Setting of Terminating Impedance and Balancing Network(Valid for LD/DID)
5 OFF × Fixed
6 OFF × Not used
7 OFF × Not used
8 OFF × Not used
SW4/5 Terminating Impedance
Balancing Network1 2 3 4
OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON OFF OFF OFF
2.16µ F
600Ω
350Ω1KΩ
0.21µ F(EIA/TIA -464A)
600Ω
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 562Revision 1.0
PA-8TLTRTie Line Trunk
SWITCHSWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
SW4 (SW30 [No.0-3 Circuit]SW5 (SW40) [No. 4-7 Circuit]
(When Trunk Kind has been set as 2W E&M)
1 ~ 4, 6
Setting of Terminating Impedance and Balancing Network(Valid for E&M)
5 OFF × Not used
6ON Speech Line: 2-wire
OFF Speech Line: 4-wire
7 OFF × Fixed
8
ONE&M Control
Idle: Ground Busy: Battery
OFFE&M Control
Idle: Open Busy: Ground
SW4/5 Terminating Imped-ance
Balancing Network1 2 3 4 6
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
ON OFF OFF OFF ON
2.16µ F
600Ω
350Ω1KΩ
0.21µ F(EIA/TIA -464A)
600Ω
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 563
Revision 1.0
PA-8TLTRTie Line Trunk
Reference : Table of Fixed PADs
:When SW2-8 is set to “ON”. (other than the case of )
:When SW2-8 is set to “OFF”. (i.e PAD for TS003 is provided; only for Australia)
ARTD COMMAND
PAD DATA
PAD VALUE [dB]
4W E&MLD/2W E&M
SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE
0 P0 P1 0 0 0 -6
1234
36
1216
361111
3660
36-6-6
6000
-6-6-6-6
5 P2 P3 0 0 0 -6
7 0 0 0 0 0 -6
APAD COMMAND
PAD DATA
PAD VALUE [dB]
4W E&MLD/2W E&M
SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE
1234
36
1216
361111
3660
36-6-6
6600
-6-6-6-6
5 P2 P3 0 0 0 -6
15 0 0 0 0 0 -6
1 2
1 2
1 2
2
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 564Revision 1.0
PA-8TLTRTie Line Trunk
6. External Interface
Accommodation of LT connector leads of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-172.
See also: Connecting Route Diagram (LD/DID ∞ 2W E&M)Connecting Route Diagram (4W E&M)2400 ODT CABLE Lead Accommodation2400 ODT CABLE-A Lead Accommodation
Figure 3-172 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B0 (TB0)B1 (TB1)
A0 (TA0)
Accommodated in 1
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
A1 (TA1)A2 (TA2)A3 (TA3)
B2 (TB2)B3 (TB3)
Accommodated in 2
B4 (TB4)B5 (TB5)
A4 (TA4)A5 (TA5)A6 (TA6)A7 (TA7)
B6 (TB6)B7 (TB7)
RB0RB1
RA0RA1RA2RA3
RB2RB3M0M1
E0E1E2E3
M2M3
B0 (TB0)B1 (TB1)
A0 (TA0)A1 (TA1)A2 (TA2)A3 (TA3)
B2 (TB2)B3 (TB3)B4 (TB4)B5 (TB5)
A4 (TA4)A5 (TA5)A6 (TA6)A7 (TA7)
B6 (TB6)B7 (TB7)
RB0RB1
RA0RA1RA2RA3
RB2RB3M0M1
E0E1E2E3
M2M3
1 2 1 2 1 21 2 1 2 1 2
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 565
Revision 1.0
PA-8TLTRTie Line Trunk
Figure 3-172 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
B0 (TB0)B1 (TB1)
A0 (TA0)
Accommodated in 3
LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector
A1 (TA1)A2 (TA2)A3 (TA3)
B2 (TB2)B3 (TB3)B4 (TB4)B5 (TB5)
A4 (TA4)A5 (TA5)A6 (TA6)A7 (TA7)
B6 (TB6)B7 (TB7)
RB0RB1
RA0RA1RA2RA3
RB2RB3M0M1
E0E1E2E3
M2M3
3 3 3 3 3 3
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 566Revision 1.0
PA-8TLTRTie Line Trunk
Figure 3-173 Connecting Route Diagram (LD/DID • 2W E&M)
PBX
A0
B0
A7
B7
A
B
A
B
NETWORK
LT Connector
Installation Cable
PA-8TLTR
• LD/DID
• 2W E&M
PBX
A0
B0
A
B
LT Connector
Installation Cable
PA-8TLTR
E0 E
M0 M
A3
B3
A
B
E3 E
M3 M
A4
B4
A
B
E4 E
M4 M
A7
B7
A
B
E7 E
M7 M
2-WIRECARRIER
EQUIPMENT
2-WIRECARRIER
EQUIPMENT
2-WIRECARRIER
EQUIPMENT
2-WIRECARRIER
EQUIPMENT
2400 ODT CABLE
This diagram shows connecting route diagram when the PA-8TLTR is used as a LD or DID trunk.
This diagram shows connecting route diagram when the PA-8TLTR is used as a 2-wire E&M trunk. In this instance, E&M leads for channels #4 - #7 appear from the "ODT" connector equipped on the front edge of this card.
ODT Connector
MDF
MDF
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 567
Revision 1.0
PA-8TLTRTie Line Trunk
Figure 3-174 Connecting Route Diagram (4W E&M)
• 4W E&M
PBX
A0(TA0)
B0(TB0)
TA
TB
LT Connector
Installation Cable
PA-8TLTR
RA0 RA
RB0 RB
4-WIRECARRIER
EQUIPMENT
4-WIRECARRIER
EQUIPMENT
4-WIRECARRIER
EQUIPMENT
2400 ODT CABLE
ODT connector
E0 E
M0 M
A4(TA4)
B4(TB4)
TA
TB
RA4 RA
RB4 RB
E4 E
M4 M
A7(TA7)
B7(TB7)
TA
TB
RA7 RA
RB7 RB
E7 E
M7 M
This diagram shows connecting route diagram when the PA-8TLTR is used as a 4-wire E&M trunk. In this instance, RA, RB, and E&M leads for channels #4 - #7 appear from the "ODT" connector equipped on the front edge of this card.
MDF
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 568Revision 1.0
PA-8TLTRTie Line Trunk
Figure 3-175 “2400 ODT CABLE” Lead Accommodation
26272829303132333435363738394041424344454647484950
12345678910111213141516171819202122232425
RA4E4
RA5E5
RA6E6
RA7E7
(AS0)(AS1)(AS2)(AS3)(AS4)(AS5)(AS6)(AS7)
(AL0)(AL1)(AL2)(AL3)(AL4)(AL5)(AL6)(AL7)
To "ODT" connector To MDF
Champ Connector (Female)"2400 ODT CABLE"
3m (10 feet)
channel #4
channel #5
channel #6
channel #7
Champ Connector
1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9A10A11A12A13A14A15A16A17A
1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B
RB4M4
RB5M5
RB6M6
RB7M7
(AL0)(AL1)(AL2)(AL3)(AL4)(AL5)(AL6)(AL7)
(AS0)(AS1)(AS2)(AS3)(AS4)(AS5)(AS6)(AS7)
channel #4
channel #5
channel #6
channel #7
ODT Connector
"2400 ODT CABLE"
• 2400 ODT CABLEThe "2400 ODT CABLE" has one ODT connector whose lead accommodation is shown below.
RA4E4
RA5E5
RA6E6
RA7E7
RB4M4
RB5M5
RB6M6
RB7M7
34
LT
Note: Leads in round brackets are not used for the time being.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 569
Revision 1.0
PA-8TLTRTie Line Trunk
Figure 3-176 “2400 ODT CABLE-A” Lead Accommodation
RB4M4
RB5M5
RB6M6
RB7M7
26272829303132333435363738394041424344454647484950
12345678910111213141516171819202122232425
RA4E4
RA5E5
RA6E6
RA7E7
(AS0)(AS1)(AS2)(AS3)(AS4)(AS5)(AS6)(AS7)
(AL0)(AL1)(AL2)(AL3)(AL4)(AL5)(AL6)(AL7)
channel #4
channel #5
channel #6
channel #7
Champ Connectors
RA4E4
RA5E5
RA6E6
RA7E7
1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9A10A11A12A13A14A15A16A17A
1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B
RB4M4
RB5M5
RB6M6
RB7M7
(AL0)(AL1)(AL2)(AL3)(AL4)(AL5)(AL6)(AL7)
(AS0)(AS1)(AS2)(AS3)(AS4)(AS5)(AS6)(AS7)
channel #4
channel #5
channel #6
channel #7
ODT Connectors
"2400 ODT CABLE-A"
26272829303132333435363738394041424344454647484950
12345678910111213141516171819202122232425
RA4E4
RA5E5
RA6E6
RA7E7
(AS0)(AS1)(AS2)(AS3)(AS4)(AS5)(AS6)(AS7)
(AL0)(AL1)(AL2)(AL3)(AL4)(AL5)(AL6)(AL7)
channel #4
channel #5
channel #6
channel #7
RA4E4
RA5E5
RA6E6
RA7E7
1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9A10A11A12A13A14A15A16A17A
1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B
RB4M4
RB5M5
RB6M6
RB7M7
(AL0)(AL1)(AL2)(AL3)(AL4)(AL5)(AL6)(AL7)
(AS0)(AS1)(AS2)(AS3)(AS4)(AS5)(AS6)(AS7)
channel #4
channel #5
channel #6
channel #7
RA4E4
RA5E5
RA6E6
RA7E7
1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9A10A11A12A13A14A15A16A17A
1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B
RB4M4
RB5M5
RB6M6
RB7M7
(AL0)(AL1)(AL2)(AL3)(AL4)(AL5)(AL6)(AL7)
(AS0)(AS1)(AS2)(AS3)(AS4)(AS5)(AS6)(AS7)
channel #4
channel #5
channel #6
channel #7
RB4M4
RB5M5
RB6M6
RB7M7
RA4E4
RA5E5
RA6E6
RA7E7
(DE) (DE)
channel #4
channel #5
channel #6
channel #7
(AS0)(AS1)(AS2)(AS3)(AS4)(AS5)(AS6)(AS7)
(AL0)(AL1)(AL2)(AL3)(AL4)(AL5)(AL6)(AL7)
(DE) (DE)
RB4M4
RB5M5
RB6M6
RB7M7
To ODT ConnectorTo MDF
• 2400 ODT CABLE-AThe "2400 ODT CABLE-A" has three ODT connectors whose lead accommodation is shown below.
(NC) (NC)
(NC) (NC)
(NC) (NC)
Note: Leads in round brackets are not used for the time being.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 570Revision 1.0
PA-8TLTRTie Line Trunk
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO.SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIMMB(SW00)
MB0-7(SW01)
SW0(SW10)
SW1(SW15)
SW2(SW20)
SW3(SW25)
SW4(SW30)
SW5(SW40)
ON
8
ON
76543210
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 571
Revision 1.0
PA-M87Recording / Paging Device Adapter
PA-M87Recording / Paging Device Adapter
1. General Function
This circuit card is used to provide an interface between the Attendant Console(s) and the externalrecording/paging equipment as shown in the figure below. Occupying every two slots within a PIM, asingle interface adapter can handle a maximum of six ATTCONs and one-or two-circuit recording/pagingequipment to combine. The connection patterns for the devices and service activation via ATTCONs canvary, depending on key settings on the card (see Section 5, 'Switch Settings' for details).
Figure 3-177 Location of PA-M87 (RECC/PGADP) within the System
MDF
Max.6
Max.3
Max.3
RECC/PGADPMDF
Recording Device
or Paging Device
or Paging Device
or Paging Device
Recording Device
Recording Device
MDF
RECC/PGADP
MDF
MDF
ATTCON
ATTCON
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 572Revision 1.0
PA-M87Recording / Paging Device Adapter
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The mounting locations of this circuit card are shown below. Note that this circuit card requires a vacancyof two consecutive slots.
Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
PIMMounting Module
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2300
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 573
Revision 1.0
PA-M87Recording / Paging Device Adapter
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
Face layout of each lamp, switch and connector on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-178.
Figure 3-178 Face Layout of PA-M87 (RECC/PGADP)
4. Lamp Indications
The table below shows the meaning of lamp indications.
LAMP NAME COLOR MEANING
ATT0 ~ ATT5
Green(Steady-“ON”)
Provided that any of the ATTCONs has a connection to the Recording/Paging equipment via the card, the lamp(s) corresponding to the cited ATTCON number(s) emit(s) steady light.
Green(Flash)
Provided that any of the ATTCONs has not established a connection with the Recording/Paging equipment, the lamp(s) corresponding to the cited ATTCON number(s) emit(s) flashing light.
ATT5ATT4ATT3ATT2ATT1
VR0
SW12 SW13
SW11
SW10
SW14
SW15
REC/PGA (To MDF)
VR1
ATT0
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 574Revision 1.0
PA-M87Recording / Paging Device Adapter
5. Switch Settings
Switch settings on the card and their detailed meanings are as follows:
Note 1: This switch setting becomes effective parallel with the key operations of SW12 and SW13.
Note 2: To validate this switch setting, also operate the following keys (SW10-8, SW14, SW15) as required.
SWITCH NAME SWITCHNO.
SETTING STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
SW10
1ON Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #0 by loop
start (momentary)
OFF Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #0 by loop start (constant)
2ON Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #1 by loop
start (momentary)
OFF Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #1 by loop start (constant)
3ON Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #2 by loop
start (momentary)
OFF Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #2 by loop start (constant)
4ON Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #3 by loop
start (momentary)
OFF Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #3 by loop start (constant)
5ON Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #4 by loop
start (momentary)
OFF Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #4 by loop start (constant)
6ON Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #5 by loop
start (momentary)
OFF Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #5 by loop start (constant)
7ON No. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine
= 6 : 1 Note 1
OFF No. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine= 3 : 1 × 2 sets Note 1
8ON Recording/Paging activation by loop/ground start signal
sending (momentary) Note 2
OFF Recording/Paging activation by loop/ground start signal sending (constant) Note 2
PATTERN FOR START SIGNAL TRANSMISSIONKEY SETTING
(SW10-8)KEY SETTING(SW14, SW15)
Momentary Loop Start/Momentary Ground Start ON Up
Constant Loop Start/Constant Ground Start OFF Up
Telephone Loop (Handset lifting) OFF Down
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 575
Revision 1.0
PA-M87Recording / Paging Device Adapter
Warning: When the Remote Phone is not used, be sure to turn the SW11 to the left side. If the switch key is left onthe right side, the machine components may be damaged by over current.
Note 3: To validate this switch setting, also operate the following keys (SW10-8, SW14, SW15) as required.
Note 4: This switch setting becomes effective parallel with the key operations of SW10-7.
SWITCH NAMESWITCH
NO.SETTING
STANDARDSETTING
MEANING
SW11 RIGHT Remote Phone is used.
LEFT Remote Phone is not used.
SW12SW13
UPNo. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine
= 6 : 1 Note 4
DOWNNo. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine
= 3 : 1 × 2 sets Note 4
SW14 SW15 UP
Patterns for Recording/Paging activation:by loop start/ground start signal sending
Note 3
DOWNPatterns for Recording/Paging activation:via the telephone loop (handset lifting)
Note 3
VR0
(Volume Resistance)
Voice output adjustment - GAIN (0 ~ +20dB) - for 1st circuit of Recording/Paging machine.
VR1
(Volume Resistance)
Voice output adjustment - GAIN (0 ~ +20dB) - for 2nd circuit of Recording/Paging machine.
321
Left Right
3
2
1
UP
DOWN
1
2
3
UP
DOWN
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 576Revision 1.0
PA-M87Recording / Paging Device Adapter
6. External Interface
The location of REC/PGA connector leads and their connection diagram are shown in Figure 3-179.
Figure 3-179 REC/PGA Connector Leads
See also Connecting Route Diagram. (Figure 3-180)
Location of REC/PGA Connector Leads
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
CHAMP Connector (J)REC/PGA
K1B
B0M0BK0BB1
B2M2B
M1B
K2B
K4B
B3M3BK3BB4
B5M5B
M4B
K5B
L0BL1BT0B
ZB
T1B
K1A
A0M0AK0AA1
A2M2A
M1A
K2A
K4A
A3M3AK3AA4
A5M5A
M4A
K5A
L0AL1AT0A
ZA
T1AT0CT1C
For Recording/Paging Machine #0
For Recording/Paging Machine #1 Note
For ATT #0
For ATT #1
For ATT #2
For ATT #3
For ATT #4
For ATT #5
Note: These leads are used when the two - circuit system is adopted for the Recording/Paging service features (No. of ATTCON: Output Equipment = 3 : 1 × 2 circuits).
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 577
Revision 1.0
PA-M87Recording / Paging Device Adapter
Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (1/4)
PBX
RECC/PGADP
B0A0
M0AM0BK0AK0BL0AL0BT0AT0B
KBLALBAB
KA
MDF
To ATT
To Recording/Paging machine Note 3
50FLT-CHAMPCABLE
Front connector
[ In case telephone set loop is used for Recording/Paging activation]
Telephone Terminal Side Leads
Speech SignalLeads
Note 1
Note 2
Note 1: For speech signal output leads toward Recording/Paging equipment. Note 2: For control signal output leads toward Recording/Paging equipment. Note 3: There is restriction here in case a Recording machine is used: The Recording machine should be the type which is fixed between the Central Office and telephone terminals.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 578Revision 1.0
PA-M87Recording / Paging Device Adapter
Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (2/4)
PBX
RECC/PGADP
B0A0
M0AM0BK0AK0BL0AL0BT0AT0B
KBLALBAB
T0C
KA
MDF
To ATT
50FLT-CHAMPCABLE
[ In case Recording/Paging is activated by the loop start or ground start signal sending ]
Speech Signal LeadsLoop Start Leads
Ground Start Leads
To Recording/Paging machine
Note 1: For speech signal leads toward Recording/Paging equipment. Note 2: For control signal leads toward Recording/Paging equipment.
Front connector
Note 1
Note 2
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 579
Revision 1.0
PA-M87Recording / Paging Device Adapter
Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (3/4)
PBX
RECC/PGADP
B0A0
M0AM0BK0AK0BL0AL0BT0AT0B
KBLALB
T0CZAZBL0AL0BT0AT0BT0CZAZBA0
KA
MDF
To ATT
50FLT-CHAMPCABLE
RECC/PGADP
50FLT-CHAMPCABLE
B0M0AM0BK0AK0B
KAKBLALBAB
AB
To ATT
[ In case 7 or more ATTCONs are connected to a single Recording/Paging machine ]
Front connector
Note 1
Note 2
To Recording/Paging machine
Note 1: To use a single Recording/Paging machine for 7 or more ATTCONs, the necessary number of PA-M87 card(s) must be reinforced, according the ATT number, on the side of the ICS. If this is the case, provide relevant multiple connections between the first-card connector leads and the leads due for the reinforced circuit card(s). Note that the connection should be performed on the MDF and each connector lead name must be identical in each connection proccess.
(example) L0A (below) L0A (above) T0A (below) T0A (above)
L0B (below) L0B (above) T0B (below) T0B (above)
Note 2: When performing the multiple connections, the leads here (“ZA” and “ZB”) must be given another multiple connection in addition to that required in a normal pattern (refer to Note 1).
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 580Revision 1.0
PA-M87Recording / Paging Device Adapter
Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (4/4)
PBX
RECC/PGADP
B0A0
M0AM0BK0AK0BL0AL0BT0AT0B
BME
T0C
A
MDF
To TLT
50FLT-CHAMPCABLE
[ In case the TLT card (analog station) is connected instead of ATTCONs ]
Front connector
To Paging Machine
E&M Signal Leads
Speech Signal LeadsLoop Start Leads Note
Note : When the Paging machine is to be activated by the ground start, connect the T0B lead to the ground.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 581
Revision 1.0
PA-M87Recording / Paging Device Adapter
7. Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
SW10
SW11
SW12SW13
SW14SW15
VR0
(Volume Resistance)
VR1
(Volume Resistance)
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
321
Left Right
3
2
1
UP
DOWN
3
2
1
UP
DOWN
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 582Revision 1.0
PA-24PRTB-APrimary Rate Interface Trunk
PA-24PRTB-APrimary Rate Interface Trunk
1. General Function
The PA-24PRTB-A (PRT) circuit card is a digital interface supporting voice and data communications at1.5 M bit/sec. Being equipped with a Link Access Procedure for a D channel (LAP D) controller based onthe ITU-T I/Q series, this card provides a Primary Rate Access Interface (PRI) with the system. A built-inresonance circuit extracts clock signals, which are supplied from the network, so that the system may be inexact synchronization with the network. To obtain appropriate speech level, this card is also equipped witha mask ROM in which typical PAD patterns have been already written. A desired PAD value can be easilyselected by key settings and programming from the MAT.
Figure 3-181 Location of PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) within the System
I/O Local Bus
CPU
System Clock
INT TSW INT
Speech Path (PCM Signal)
D-channel Signaling Link
2-wire
2-wire
PLO
1.544MHz ClockExtraction from Network
24ch
T
R
ISDNNETWORK
24PRT
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 583
Revision 1.0
PA-24PRTB-APrimary Rate Interface Trunk
2. Mounting Location / Condition
The PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) card can be mounted in the following shaded universal slots as shown below.
Note: This card cannot be mounted in slot 5.This card cannot use Group0 (G=00) of Unit0 (U=0) of even-number Module Group.
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-182.
Figure 3-182 Face Layout of PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT)
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Universal Slots Universal Slots
Note
OPE
N-OPE
MB
BL23
BL00
MODE
CN2
23
01 LB
PCMBERAIS
FRMRMT
DOPEPKT
LYR
SW0
SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
SW1
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 584Revision 1.0
PA-24PRTB-APrimary Rate Interface Trunk
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
Table 3-15 PA-24PRTB-A Lamp Indication Reference
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.
N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.
PCM Red Lights when input signal down is detected (PCM LOSS).
FRM Red Lights when frame alignment loss is detected.
PER Red Lights when a CRC error occur frequently.
RMT Red Lights on receiving Remote Alarm Indication (RAI).
AIS Yellow Lights on detection of AIS.
DOPE Green Remains lit while the D Channel Controller is on.
LYR Green Lights when the link of the D channel is set up.
RKT Green Lights when the packet of the D channel is in use.
BL00
BL23
Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.
Flash Flashes while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60 IPM).
OFFRemains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.(When BL23 is in used as D channel, lamp is always on.)
-
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 585
Revision 1.0
PA-24PRTB-APrimary Rate Interface Trunk
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
MB UP Circuit card make busy
DOWN × Circuit card make busy cancel
MODE 5 AT&T (#4/#5 ESS)
7 NT DMS 100/DMS 250
10 Q-SIG. (ETS 300 172)
LB0
ON Internal loop back set
OFF × Internal loop back cancel
1ON Line loop back set
OFF × Line loop back cancel
2ON Payload loop back set
OFF × Payload loop back cancel
3ON D-channel Handler (DCH) make busy request
OFF × D-channel Handler (DCH) make busy request cancel
SW01
ON × Impedance 100 Ω
OFF Impedance 110 Ω
2ON Send transformer middle point Ground
OFF × Send transformer middle point Open
3ON Receive transformer middle point Ground
OFF × Receive transformer middle point Open
4 ON × Fixed
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 586Revision 1.0
PA-24PRTB-APrimary Rate Interface Trunk
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD
SETTING MEANING
SW1 1 OFF × Standard setting (Digital PAD/ROM selection)
2 ON × Fixed
3ON Interface structure: 24B
OFF × Interface structure: 23B + D
4ON D channel packet service is provided.
OFF × D channel packet service is not provided.
SW21
2
3
4 ON × 24-Multiframe
5 ON × Zero Suppress Select B8ZS (24-multiframe)
6 ON × Standard setting
7 OFF × Standard setting
8ON × Line fault is notified to the upper CPU.
OFF Line fault is not notified to the upper CPU.
SW3 1 OFF × Fixed
2 OFF × Fixed
3 OFF × Alarm processing select Fixed to OFF
4 OFF × Main Signal All 1 supervision is not made.
5 ON × Fixed
6 ON × Fixed
7 ON × Fixed
8 ON × Fixed
SETTING OF EQUALIOZER
SW2-1 SW2-2 SW2-3 DISTANCE
ONONONONOFF
ONONOFFOFFON
ONOFFONOFFON
0 ~40 ~80 ~
120 ~160 ~
40m80m120m160m200m
Other combinations Not allowed
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 587
Revision 1.0
PA-24PRTB-APrimary Rate Interface Trunk
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW4 1 OFF × Fixed (D channel)
2ON × D Channel Mode Selection; Used Side
OFF D Channel Mode Selection; Network Side
3ON D Channel Signal Logic; Negative
OFF × D Channel Signal Logic; Positive (Standard)
4 ON ×
5 ON ×
6 ON × Fixed
7 ON × Fixed
8 ON × Fixed
SW5
1ON × PAD Pattern Selection
Note: When setting this switch, refer to Digital PADSetting Table.
OFF
2ON
OFF ×
3ON ×
OFF
4ON ×
OFF
5ON
OFF ×
6ON ×
OFF
7ON ×
OFF
8ON IDLE code is sent out.
OFF × IDLE code is not sent out.
SW4-4 SW4-5 D-channel Speed
ONOFFONOFF
ONONOFFOFF
64 kbps (Standard)Not used56 kbpsNot used
SW5-1 SW5-2 SW5-3 PAD Pattern
ON OFF ON PAD Pattern 1
OFF OFF ON PAD Pattern 2
ON ON OFF A→µ Loss (Bothway)
OFF ON OFF A→µ Loss (Receive)
ON OFF OFF µ→A Loss (Bothway)
OFF OFF OFF µ→A Loss (Receive)
SW5-4 SW5-5 DIGITAL PAD CONTROL
ONONOFFOFF
ONOFFONOFF
Both directionsReceive only (Standard)Send onlyARTD Fixed
SW5-6 SW5-7 DATA PAD CONTROL
ONONOFFOFF
ONOFFONOFF
64 k (Standard)56 k AT & T64 k INV.48 k PROTIMS
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 588Revision 1.0
PA-24PRTB-APrimary Rate Interface Trunk
Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24PRTB-A
This card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PAD patterns have been alreadywritten. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be done by key setting ofthe SW 5 (elements 1, 2, 3) on this card, and programming of the PAD data by the ARTD command - PAD.The selected PAD pattern and the programmed ARTD PAD data correspond as listed below.
Note: - represents “GAIN” in this table.
PAD DATAARTDPAD
PAD Pattern (selected by key setting)
PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2µ→A Loss(Bothway)
µ→A Loss(Receive)
A→µ Loss(Bothway)
A→µ Loss(Receive)
SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE
1 2 [dB] 2 [dB]-3 [dB]Note
3 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB]
2 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 3 [dB] 3 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB]
3 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 12 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 12 [dB]
4 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 3 [dB] 9 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 8 [dB]
5 PAD value complies with key settings of SW5-6,7. (Irrelevant to PAD patterns)
7 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] Through Through Through Through Through Through Through Through
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 589
Revision 1.0
PA-24PRTB-APrimary Rate Interface Trunk
6. External Interface
Figure 3-183 LT Connector Lead Accommodation
See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-184).
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 2
LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector
Accommodated in 3
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
E
Accommodated in 1
LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector
RBPOUTB
TB
E
RAPOUTA
TA
E
RBPOUTB
TB
E
RAPOUTA
TA
E
RBPOUTB
TB
E
RAPOUTA
TA
1 2 3 2 11 3 2 13 2 3
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 590Revision 1.0
PA-24PRTB-APrimary Rate Interface Trunk
Figure 3-184 Connecting Route Diagram
RA
RB
TA
TB
POUTA
POUTB
RA
TA
TB
RB
DIU1A
DIU1BPLO
PBXMDF
clock extraction
24 PRTTo DSU(DigitalServiceUnit)
Note
IN
OUT
Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24PRTB-A circuit card is as follows.
Note: As an example, DIU1A and DIU1B leads are used in this diagram. For more information onthe PLO card, see Chapter 2 in this manual.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 591
Revision 1.0
PA-24PRTB-APrimary Rate Interface Trunk
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO.SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM
MODE
LB
SW0
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel
3210
ON
1ON 2 3 4
1ON 2 3 4
1ON
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1ON
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1ON
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1ON
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 592Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DTI)Digital Trunk Interface
PA-24DTR (DTI)Digital Trunk Interface
1. General Function
The PA-24DTR (24DTI) circuit card provides an interface between 24 digital trunks and the system at1.544 Mbit/s. This card can be also used as an interface for a Common Channel Interoffice Signaling(CCIS) or an ISDN network when being connected to an additional CCH or DCH circuit card with a flatcable as illustrated below. A built-in resonance circuit can be used for the purpose of extracting clock sig-nals when the PBX functions as a PLO-secondary switch. To obtain appropriate speech level, this card isequipped with a mask ROM in which typical PAD patterns have been already written. A desired PAD valuecan be easily selected by key settings and programming from the MAT.
Figure 3-185 Location of PA-24DTR (DTI) within the System
I/O LocalBus
CPU
System Clock
INT TSW INT
CCH/DCH
Flat Cable
2
2
PLO
1.544MHz Clock Extraction(for a PLO-secondary office)
24ch
T
R
DIGITALNETWORK
Note
DTI(PA-24DTR)
: Common Channel Signaling Link
: Speech Path (PCM signal)
: Clock Signal
Note: When PA-24DTR is used in an Associated Channel Interoffice Signaling (ACIS) system, CCH/DCH is not required.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 593
Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DTI)Digital Trunk Interface
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-24DTR (DTI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Universal Slots Universal Slots
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 594Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DTI)Digital Trunk Interface
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-186. Note thatthere are two types of PA-24DTR (DTI) cards which differ in their face layouts.
Figure 3-186 Face Layout of PA-24DTR (DTI)
OPE
N-OPE
MB
PCM
BL23
BERAIS
FRMRMT
3210
CN2
BL00
SW15
SW13B
SW13
SW12
SW11
SW10
OPE
N-OPE
SW00
PCM
BL23
BERAIS
FRMRMT
3210
CN2
BL00
SW01
SW6C
SW4D
SW14
SW5D
SW25
SW39
SW58
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 595
Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DTI)Digital Trunk Interface
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.
N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.
PCM Red Lights in the case of input signal down (PCM LOSS).
FRM Red Lights in the case of frame alignment loss.
BER RedLights when frequent bit errors occur in the case of 12-multiframe and when a CRC error occurs frequently in the case of 24-multiframe.
RMT Red Lights on receipt of remote alarm indication.
AIS Yellow Lights on receipt of Alarm Information Signal (AIS).
BL00
BL23
Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.
FlashFlashes while DP signals are being sent out or received (Flashes to dial pulses), or the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60IPM).
OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
-
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 596Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DTI)Digital Trunk Interface
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
Note: This switch setting is applicable for a system adopts Associated Channel Interoffice Signalling (ACIS).
Figure 3-187 Available Locations for Loopback Testing
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW00(MB)
UP Circuit card make busy
DOWN ¥ Circuit card make busy cancel
SW01/13B0
ON Internal Loopback : Set
OFF ¥ Internal Loopback : Cancel
1ON External Loopback : Set
OFF ¥ External Loopback : Cancel
2ON Payload Loopback : Set
OFF ¥ Payload Loopback : Cancel
3ON All Channel Make Busy : Set Note
OFF ¥ All Channel Make Busy : Cancel
Sw
itch
TD
SW
Interface
PA
D
Speech P
athC
ontrol Block
Fram
er
Line Interface
DIGITALNETWORK
External Loopback(Line Loopback)
Payload Loopback
Internal Loopback
R
T
Speech Path
PA-24 DTR (DTI)
As illustrated below, loopback testing can be performed at three locations on this card by key setting of theSW01/13B.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 597
Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DTI)Digital Trunk Interface
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW15/251
ON × Impedance Setting: 100 [Ω]
OFF Impedance Setting: 110 [Ω]
2ON Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Ground
OFF × Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Open
3ON Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Ground
OFF × Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Open
4ON Idle Code: To be sent out
OFF × Not to be sent out
SW11/39
1ON PAD Control
OFF ×
2ON ×
OFF
3ON × Data PAD Control
OFF
4ON ×
OFF
5ON T Signal Control
OFF
6ON ×
OFF
7ON R Signal Control
OFF
8ON ×
OFF
SW11/39-1 SW11/39-2 PAD Control
ON ON Bothway
OFF ON Receive only (Send 0dB)
ON OFF Send only (Receive 0dB)
OFF OFF Fixed to ARTD command
SW11/39-3 SW11/39-4 Data PAD Value
ON ON 64 Kbps
OFF ON 56 Kbps
ON OFF 48 Kbps
OFF OFF 64 Kbps INV
SW11/39-5 SW11/39-6 T Signal Control
ON ON ABCD
OFF ON ABAB
ON OFF Bit Steal Inhibited
OFF OFF AAAA
SW11/39-7 SW11/39-8 R Signal Control
ON ON ABCD
OFF ON ABAB
ON OFF Bit Steal Inhibited
OFF OFF AAAA
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 598Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DTI)Digital Trunk Interface
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW10/4D1
ON Transmission Signal A Logic: Negative
OFF × Transmission Signal A Logic: Positive
2ON Receiving Signal A Logic: Negative
OFF × Receiving Signal A Logic: Positive
3ON RMT Alarm Sending: Not to be sent out
OFF × RMT Alarm Sending: To be sent out
4ON × Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: Not to be controlled
OFF Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: To be controlled
5ON × Data Link Control: MOS
OFF Data Link Control: BOS (For NEAX2400 ICS)
6ON Multiframe Selection: 12-Multiframe
OFF Multiframe Selection: 24-Multiframe
7ON Signal Selection: AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)
OFF Signal Selection: B8ZS (Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution)
8ON When this switch is set to ON, Alarm Processing is selected for
North America specification.(For NEAX2400 ICS, this Switch Setting is OFF.)OFF
SW12/58
1ON Equalizer Setting
OFF
2ON
OFF
3ON
OFF
SW12/58-1 SW12/58-2 SW12/58-3 Distance
ON ON ON 0~133 (ft)/0~40 (m)
ON ON OFF 133~267 (ft)/40~80 (m)
ON OFF ON 267~400 (ft)/80~120 (m)
ON OFF OFF 400~533(ft)/120~160 (m)
OFF ON ON533~667(feet)/
160~200(m)
Other Combinations Impossible
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 599
Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DTI)Digital Trunk Interface
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW12/58
4ON PAD Pattern Selection
Note: When setting this key, refer to Digital PAD SettingTable.
OFF ×
5ON ×
OFF
6ON ×
OFF
7ON × Alarm Sending when this circuit card is in N-OPE state.
(For NEAX2400 ICS, Switch 12/58-7 Setting is OFF.)
OFF
8ON ×
OFF
SW14/5D
1
ONDigital PAD ROM Selection: Special Specification (PROM Spec.)
OFF × Digital PAD ROM Selection: Standard Specification (MASK ROM Spec.)
2ON × LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Positive
OFF LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Negative
3ON Send a notice in the event of a line fault.
OFF × Do not send a notice in the event of a line fault.
4ON Zero Code Suppression is not provided.
OFF Zero Code Suppression is provided.
SW12/58-4 SW12/58-5 SW12/58-6 PAD Pattern
OFF ON ON PAD Pattern 1
OFF ON OFF PAD Pattern 2
ON OFF ON A→ µ Loss (Bothway)
ON OFF OFF A→ µ Loss (Receive)
OFF OFF ON µ→Α Loss (Bothway)
OFF OFF OFF µ→Α Loss (Receive)
Other Combinations Impossible
SW12/58-7 SW12/58-8 Kind of Alarm
ON ON Alarm is not sent out
ON OFF
OFF ON All “1”
OFF OFF RMT
Note:
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 600Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DTI)Digital Trunk Interface
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW13/6C1
ON ×
Fixed to all ON.
OFF
2ON ×
OFF
3ON ×
OFF
4ON ×
OFF
5ON ×
OFF
6ON ×
OFF
7ON ×
OFF
8ON × Netfusing : Not used
OFF Netfusing : used
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 601
Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DTI)Digital Trunk Interface
Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24DTR (DTI)
As mentioned in General Function, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PAD pat-terns have been already written. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be done bykey setting of the SW 12/58 (elements 4, 5, 6) on this card, and programming of the PAD data by the ARTD com-mand - CDN=30(PAD). The PAD patterns and ARTD data correspond as listed below.
Note: - represents “GAIN” in this table.
PAD DATAARTD
CDN=30
PAD Pattern (selected by key setting)
PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2A→µ Loss(Bothway)
A→µ Loss(Receive)
µ→A Loss(Bothway)
µ→A Loss(Receive)
SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE
1 2 [dB] 2 [dB]-3 [dB]Note
3 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB]
2 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 3 [dB] 3 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB]
3 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 12 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 12 [dB]
4 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 3 [dB] 9 [dB] 8 [dB] 8[dB] 0 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 8 [dB]
5 Key settings of SW 11/39 - 3,4 correspond to PAD values. (Regardless of PAD patterns).
7 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] Through Through Through Through Through Through Through Through
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 602Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DTI)Digital Trunk Interface
6. External Interface
The leads appear as follows on the LT connectors.
Figure 3-188 LT Connector Lead Accommodation
See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-189).
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 2
LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector
Accommodated in 3
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
E
Accommodated in 1
LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector
E
RB RAPOUTB POUTA
TB TA
E E
RB RAPOUTB POUTA
TB TA
E E
RB RAPOUTB POUTA
TB TA
1 12 23 3 1 12 23 3
PIMMounting Module
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 603
Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DTI)Digital Trunk Interface
Figure 3-189 Connecting Route Diagram
TA
TB
RA
RB
POUTA
POUTB
TA
RA
RB
TB
DIU1A
DIU1BPLO
PBXMDF
Note 1
DTICARRIER
EQUIPMENT
Note 2
OUT
IN
Note 1: This cable connection is required when clock signals must be extracted from the network side.
Note 2: As an example, DIU1A and DIU1B leads are used in this diagram. For more information about theseleads, see Chapter 2 in this manual.
Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24DTR (DTI) circuit card is as follows.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 604Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DTI)Digital Trunk Interface
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO.SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM SW01/13B
SW10/4D • 4-multiframe DTI Standard
• 12-multiframe DTI Standard
SW11/39 • 24-multiframe DTI Standard
• 12-multiframe DTI Standard
SW13/6C • Fixed to all ON.
SW12/58 Note: Equalizer Setting
SW15/25
SW14/5D • 24-multiframe DTI Standard
• 12-multiframe DTI Standard
SW00/MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel
ON
3210
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
Note
1ON
2 3 4
1ON
2 3 4
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 605
Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DLI)Digital Line Interface
PA-24DTR (DLI)Digital Line Interface
1. General Function
The PA-24DTR (24DLI) circuit card provides an interface between 24 digital lines and the system at 1.544Mbit/s. To obtain appropriate speech level, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which typical PADpatterns have been already written. A desired PAD value can be easily selected by key settings.
Note: The key settings become valid when SYS1 INDEX4 bit5=1.
Figure 3-190 Location of PA-24DTR (DLI) within the System
I/O LocalBus
CPU
INT TSW INT
24ch
T
R
TERMINALEQUIPMENT
DLI(PA-24DTR)
: Speech Path (PCM signal)
: Clock Signal
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 606Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DLI)Digital Line Interface
2. Mounting Location/Condition
The PA-24DTR (DLI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.
PIMMounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Universal Slots Universal Slots
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 607
Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DLI)Digital Line Interface
3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-191. Note thatthere are two types of PA-24DTR (DLI) cards which differ in their face layouts.
Figure 3-191 Face Layout of PA-24DTR (DLI)
OPE
N-OPE
MB
PCMBERAIS
FRMRMT
CN2
SW15
SW13
SW12
SW11
SW10
OPE
N-OPE
SW00
PCM
BL23
BERAIS
FRMRMT
3210
CN2
BL00
SW01
BL23
3210
BL00
SW01
SW6C
SW4D
SW14
SW5D
SW25
SW39
SW58
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 608Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DLI)Digital Line Interface
4. Lamp Indications
The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME COLOR STATE
OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.
N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.
PCM Red Lights in the case of input signal down (PCM LOSS).
FRM Red Lights in the case of frame alignment loss.
BER RedLights when frequent bit errors occur in the case of 12-multiframe and when a CRC error occurs frequently in the case of 24-multiframe.
RMT Red Lights on receipt of remote alarm indication.
AIS Yellow Lights on receipt of Alarm Information Signal (AIS).
BL00
BL23
Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.
FlashFlashes while DP signals are being sent out or received (Flashes to dial pulses), or the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60 IPM).
OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
-
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 609
Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DLI)Digital Line Interface
5. Switch Settings
Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
Figure 3-192 Available Locations for Loopback Testing
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW00(MB)
UP Circuit card make busy
DOWN × Circuit card make busy cancel
SW01/13B0
ON Internal Loopback : Set
OFF × Internal Loopback : Cancel
1ON External Loopback : Set
OFF × External Loopback : Cancel
2ON Payload Loopback : Set
OFF × Payload Loopback : Cancel
3 OFF × Not used (Fixed to OFF)
Sw
itch
TD
SW
Interface
PA
D
Speech P
athC
ontrol Block
Fram
er
Line Interface
TERMINALEQUIPMENT
External Loopback(Line Loopback)
Payload Loopback
Internal Loopback
R
T
Speech Path
PA-24 DTR (DLI)
As illustrated below, loopback testing can be performed at three locations on this card by key setting of the SW01/13B.
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 610Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DLI)Digital Line Interface
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW15/25
1ON × Impedance Setting: 100 [Ω]
OFF Impedance Setting: 110 [Ω]
2ON Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Ground
OFF × Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Open
3ON Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Ground
OFF × Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Open
4ON Idle Code: To be sent out
OFF × Not to be sent out
SW11/39
1ON One Digit Dialing: Valid
OFF × One Digit Dialing: Invalid
2 OFF × Not used (Fixed to OFF)
3 OFF × Not used (Fixed to OFF)
4 OFF × Not used (Fixed to OFF)
5ON T Signal Control
OFF
6ON ×
OFF
7ON R Signal Control
OFF
8ON ×
OFF
SW11/39-5 SW11/39-6 T Signal Control
ON ON ABCD
OFF ON ABAB
ON OFF Bit Steal Inhibited
OFF OFF AAAA
SW11/39-7 SW11/39-8 R Signal Control
ON ON ABCD
OFF ON ABAB
ON OFF Bit Steal Inhibited
OFF OFF AAAA
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 611
Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DLI)Digital Line Interface
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW10/4D1
ON Transmission Signal A Logic: Negative
OFF × Transmission Signal A Logic: Positive
2ON Receiving Signal A Logic: Negative
OFF × Receiving Signal A Logic: Positive
3ON RMT Alarm Sending: Not to be sent out
OFF × RMT Alarm Sending: To be sent out
4 OFF × Not used (Fixed to OFF)
5ON × Data Link Control: MOS
OFF Data Link Control: BOS
6ON Multiframe Selection: 12-Multiframe
OFF Multiframe Selection: 24-Multiframe
7ON Signal Selection: AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)
OFF Signal Selection: B8ZS (Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution)
8ON When this switch is set to ON, Alarm Processing is selected for
North America specification.(For NEAX2400 ICS, this Switch Setting is OFF.)OFF
SW12/581
ON Equalizer Setting
OFF
2ON
OFF
3ON
OFF
SW12/58-1 SW12/58-2 SW12/58-3 Distance
ON ON ON 0~133 (feet)/0~40 (m)
ON ON OFF 133~267 (feet)/40~80 (m)
ON OFF ON 267~400 (feet)/80~120 (m)
ON OFF OFF 400~533 (feet)/120~160 (m)
OFF ON ON 533~667 (feet)/160~200 (m)
Other Combinations Impossible
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 612Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DLI)Digital Line Interface
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW12/58
4ON PAD Pattern Selection
Note: When setting this key, refer to Digital PAD SettingTable.
OFF ×
5ON ×
OFF
6
ON ×
OFF
7
ON × Alarm Sending when this circuit card is in N-OPE state.
(For NEAX2400 ICS, Switch 12/58-7 standard Setting is OFF.)
OFF
8
ON ×
OFF
SW14/5D
1
ONDigital PAD ROM Selection: Special Specification (PROM Spec.)
OFF × Digital PAD ROM Selection: Standard Specification (MASK ROM Spec.)
2ON × LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Positive
OFF LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Negative
3ON Send a notice in the event of a line fault.
OFF × Do not send a notice in the event of a line fault.
4ON Zero Code Suppression is not provided.
OFF Zero Code Suppression is provided.
SW12/58-4 SW12/58-5 SW12/58-6 PAD Pattern
OFF ON ON PAD Pattern 1
OFF ON OFF PAD Pattern 2
ON OFF ON A→ µ Loss (Bothway)
ON OFF OFF A→ µ Loss (Receive)
OFF OFF ON µ→Α Loss (Bothway)
OFF OFF OFF µ→Α Loss (Receive)
Other Combinations Impossible
SW12/58-7 SW12/58-8 Kind of Alarm
ON ONAlarm is not sent out
ON OFF
OFF ON All “1”
OFF OFF RMT
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 613
Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DLI)Digital Line Interface
Note: This PAD value table is PAD pattern 1. If other PAD pattern is required, assign PAD pattern by elements4~6 of SW12/58. The elements become valid when assigning ASYD SYS1 INDEX4 bit5=1. When ASYDSYS1 INDEX4 bit5=0, PAD value is “0dB”.
SWITCHNAME
SWITCHNO.
SETTINGSTANDARD
SETTINGMEANING
SW13/6C1
ON Main Signal All 1 Supervision: Valid
OFF × Main Signal All 1 Supervision: Invalid
2ON × Ringer Control: Continuous
OFF Ringer Control: Intermittent
3ON Sending PAD Value Selection (PAD Pattern1) Note
OFF ×
4ON
OFF ×
5ON ×
OFF
6ON Receiving PAD Value Selection (PAD Pattern1) Note
OFF ×
7ON
OFF ×
8ON
OFF ×
SW13/6C-3 SW13/6C-4 SW13/6C-5 PAD Value
OFF OFF OFF 0 dB
OFF OFF ON 2 dB
OFF ON OFF 4 dB
OFF ON ON 6 dB
ON OFF OFF 8 dB
ON OFF ON 0 dB
ON ON OFF 0 dB
ON ON ON 0 dB
SW13/6C-6 SW13/6C-7 SW13/6C-8 PAD Value
OFF OFF OFF 0 dB
OFF OFF ON 2 dB
OFF ON OFF 4 dB
OFF ON ON 6 dB
ON OFF OFF 8 dB
ON OFF ON 0 dB
ON ON OFF 0 dB
ON ON ON 0 dB
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 614Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DLI)Digital Line Interface
Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24DTR (DLI)
As mentioned in General Function, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PAD pat-terns have been already written. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be done bykey setting of the SW 12/58 (elements 4, 5, 6) on this card.
Note: - represents “GAIN” in this table.
SW13/6C
SEND-3,4,5RECEIVE-6,7,8
PAD Pattern (selected by key setting)
PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2A→µ Loss(Bothway)
A→µ Loss(Receive)
µ→A Loss(Bothway)
µ→A Loss(Receive)
3 4 5SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE
6 7 8
OFF OFF OFF 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] Through Through Through Through Through Through Through Through
OFF OFF ON 2 [dB] 2 [dB]-3 [dB]Note
3 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB]
OFF ON OFF 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 3 [dB] 3 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB]
OFF ON ON 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 12 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 12 [dB]
ON OFF OFF 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 3 [dB] 9 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 8 [dB]
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 615
Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DLI)Digital Line Interface
6. External Interface
The leads appear as follows on the LT connectors.
Figure 3-193 LT Connector Lead Accommodation
See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-194).
PIMMounting Module
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100
LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5
231915221814211713201612
231915221814211713201612
110907050301
100806040200
110907050301
100806040200
HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0
Group No.
Slot No.
LT Connector
PIM
Highway Block
LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
Accommodated in 2
LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector
Accommodated in 3
26272829303132333435363738394041
123456789
10111213141516
42434445464748
17181920212223
4950
2425
E
Accommodated in 1
LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector
E
RB RAPOUTB POUTA
TB TA
E E
RB RAPOUTB POUTA
TB TA
E E
RB RAPOUTB POUTA
TB TA
1 12 23 3 1 12 23 3
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 616Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DLI)Digital Line Interface
Figure 3-194 Connecting Route Diagram
TA
TB
RA
RB
TA
RA
RB
TB
PBXMDF
DLITERMINAL
EQUIPMENTOUT
IN
Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24DTR (DLI) circuit card is as follows.
NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3Page 617
Revision 1.0
PA-24DTR (DLI)Digital Line Interface
7. Switch Setting Sheet
MODULE SLOT NO.SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
PIM SW00 (MB)
SW01/13B
SW10/4D • 24-multiframe DLI Standard
• 12-multiframe DLI Standard
SW11/39 • 24-multiframe DLI Standard
• 12-multiframe DLI Standard
SW13/6C
SW12/58 Note: Equalizer Setting
SW15/25
SW14/5D • 24-multiframe DLI Standard
• 12-multiframe DLI Standard
SW00/MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel
ON
ON
3210
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8ON
Note
1ON
2 3 4
1ON
2 3 4
1 2 3 4ON
1 2 3 4ON
CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296Page 618Revision 1.0
This page is for your notes.